JP7475863B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a technology has been proposed in which a vibration means is provided on the ball launching handle (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-38019 A

The technology described in Patent Document 1 leaves room for improvement in terms of increasing the interest of the vibration-based effects.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine that enhances the entertainment value of the game when vibration effects are used.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
An operation means operable by a player;
A performance control means capable of executing a performance,
The game control means includes:
A determination means for determining the advantageous state;
A determination means for determining that the advantageous state will be achieved before the determination by the determination means;
A state control means for controlling a special state in which a variable display is more easily performed than in a normal state;
and an information transmitting means capable of transmitting to the performance control means a plurality of types of information including determination result information capable of identifying that the advantageous state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved;
The performance control means includes:
A change notice can be executed to change the display mode of the displayed identification information to a different display mode,
A pre-reading effect can be executed based on the judgment result information,
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
After the start of the reach effect, a light emitting effect can be executed in which a light emitting means corresponding to the operation means is illuminated as a line of sight guiding effect for guiding a line of sight of a player to the operation means ,
a predetermined vibration effect is executed by vibrating the operation means at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to a start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed and a second timing prior to the start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed;
When executing the visual line guidance effect after starting the reach effect, a special vibration effect can be executed in which the operation means is vibrated during a specific effect period that is an execution period of the visual line guidance effect ,
The special vibration effect can be executed even when the line-of -sight guidance effect is not executed after the reach effect is started,
The special vibration effect can be executed in a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode;
When the line-of -sight guiding effect is executed after the start of the reach effect, the special vibration effect can be executed in the second mode at a higher rate than when the line-of -sight guiding effect is not executed after the start of the reach effect,
As the special vibration effect,
A first special vibration effect corresponding to the operation of a movable body for effect different from the operation means during the specific effect period can be executed,
A second special vibration effect corresponding to the image display during the specific effect period can be executed,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting section and a second light emitting section adjacent to the first light emitting section;
The performance control means is capable of executing the light-emitting performance by causing the first light-emitting unit to emit light at a first predetermined timing as the gaze guidance performance, and is also capable of executing the light-emitting performance by causing the first light-emitting unit and the second light-emitting unit to emit light at a second predetermined timing after the first predetermined timing,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed;
The predetermined vibration effect and the first special vibration effect have different aspects,
The predetermined vibration effect and the second special vibration effect have different aspects,
The first special vibration performance and the second special vibration performance have different aspects.
It is characterized by:
(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to a player, and that is capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., driving a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (e.g., driving a vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in a variable display effect control pattern) as a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. a vibration effect execution means (e.g., an effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect process of step S172 using vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern or the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203), and a light emission effect execution means capable of executing a light emission effect (e.g., light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 with a light emission color included in the operation unit effect pattern) that causes the operation unit to emit light in association with the predetermined vibration effect (e.g., a light emission process that executes the variable display effect process of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203). and a specific performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 for executing a variable display performance process in step S172 based on a variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing specific performances (e.g., a reach performance of SP Reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game, and the rate at which the predetermined vibration performance is controlled to the advantageous state is higher (e.g., a jackpot reliability according to an operation unit performance pattern, etc.) when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed, and The proportion of the advantageous state controlled varies depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the constant vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the purpose of the operation unit performance pattern, etc.), the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of the vibration effect in the periods AKZ01 to AKZ05, etc.), and the vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44, etc.).
A predetermined vibration effect can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started,
moreover,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command) capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means,
The game control means includes:
A determination means for determining whether to enter the advantageous state (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110, etc.);
A determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state will be achieved before the determination of the determination means;
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
and an information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103 that transmits a performance control command) capable of transmitting to the performance executing means a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can specify that the advantageous state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved;
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state will be entered before the state control means controls the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmission means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the special state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the special state will be entered (for example, a display result designation command for "miss (time reduction)" can be transmitted, etc.),
The performance execution means includes:
When the determination result information is received, a pre-reading effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed),
When the determination result information is received after the special information is received, the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when the determination is Yes in step S059AKS082, the processing of steps S059AKS084 and S1304 is executed, etc.).
It is characterized by:
According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. Furthermore, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention related to the following means 2. Conventionally, there is a pachinko game machine that enhances the interest of the game by a so-called variable display game, in which a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when the game medium enters a winning area such as a winning hole provided in the game area and an execution condition (starting condition) is established, a plurality of types of identification information (hereinafter, display patterns) are variably displayed on a variable display device, and whether or not a predetermined game value is awarded is determined based on the display result, as shown in JP2015-80649A. In such a pachinko game machine, when the stopped pattern mode when the variable display of the display pattern in the variable display game completely stops becomes a specific display mode, a favorable state (jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player is created. Then, there is a game machine that controls the game machine to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state after the jackpot game state ends.
As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed that is controlled to a special state without passing through a jackpot gaming state.

However, there was room for improvement in controlling state transitions.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the control of state transitions and increase the interest in gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command) capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means,
The game control means includes:
A determination means for determining whether to enter the advantageous state (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110, etc.);
A determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state will be achieved before the determination of the determination means;
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
and an information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103 that transmits a performance control command) capable of transmitting to the performance executing means a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can specify that the advantageous state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved;
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state will be entered before the state control means controls the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmission means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the special state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the special state will be entered (for example, a display result designation command for "miss (time reduction)" can be transmitted, etc.),
The performance execution means includes:
When the determination result information is received, a pre-reading effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed),
When the determination result information is received after the special information is received, the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when the determination is Yes in step S059AKS082, the processing of steps S059AKS084 and S1304 is executed, etc.).
It is characterized by:

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a stop symbol determination process. A figure showing an example of settings for the setting suggestion performance execution decision table. A figure showing configuration examples and setting examples regarding setting suggestion patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. A diagram showing an example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. A front view of a pachinko gaming machine relating to characteristic part 10SH. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine relating to characteristic part 10SH. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic portion 10SH. An explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of a jackpot. A figure showing an example of the execution timing and performance period of a vibration effect and a visual guidance effect. A figure showing an example of the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect. A figure showing an example of the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect. A diagram showing an example configuration of a performance device for characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. A figure showing an example of settings when executing an operation unit performance pattern and a specific linked performance. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing settings of vibration patterns. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a performance using vibration and light emission. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting a continuous performance pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a performance control pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting the timing at which an operation unit performance can be executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. A figure showing an example of the execution of a presentation in which a game effect lamp is illuminated. A figure showing an example of setting a performance period during which a specific linked performance can be executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of music playback execution. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a special chart display result determination table. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a time-saving type determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. A figure showing an example of a time-saving promotional performance period. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of main performance control commands. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving start process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process at the end of a time-saving period. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a remaining reservation period end determination process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer at the start of a winning streak. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a reservation change determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when a data is dropped. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a stop symbol setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving promotion effect setting process. A figure showing an example of determining a time-saving promotion performance pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a return performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. 11 is a timing chart showing each timing during variable display when the time-saving symbol is displayed stationary and in other cases. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed stationary or when a time-saving promotional effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed stationary or when a time-saving promotional effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed stationary or when a time-saving promotional effect is executed. A figure showing an example of the presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed stationary or when a time-saving promotional effect is executed. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process in an information output process. 6 is a timing chart showing output timings of various signals output in the external information output process. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a special chart display result determination table. A figure showing an example of a special chart display result. A figure showing an example of a presentation operation when a time-saving pattern is displayed in a stopped state. A front view of a pachinko game machine relating to characteristic part 063AK. A diagram showing the configuration of the special variable winning ball device relating to feature part 063AK when the large winning opening is controlled to a closed state. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining the flow of a game ball that has entered the big prize slot related to the characteristic part 063AK. 13A is a diagram showing a configuration of a distribution unit according to the characteristic portion 063AK, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a configuration of a distribution member according to the characteristic portion 063AK. 13A to 13C are diagrams for explaining the flow of game balls that have entered the distribution section related to the feature part 063AK. A figure to explain the operation of the distribution member related to characteristic part 063AK. This is a diagram to explain the relationship between the small win start presentation time related to feature part 063AK and the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution section. (a) is a timing chart of the performance corresponding to the small hit fluctuation related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram for explaining the execution presence/absence and the performance mode of the performance corresponding to the small hit fluctuation related to the feature part 063AK. 1A is a timing chart of the time-saving suggestion effect related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the time-saving suggestion pattern related to the feature portion 063AK. (a) is a diagram for explaining a normal time passing prompting performance corresponding to the first special game related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram for explaining a normal time passing prompting performance corresponding to the second special game related to the feature part 063AK. (c) is a diagram for explaining a time-saving time passing prompting performance related to the feature part 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of normal processing of special patterns related to feature part 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a first special symbol display result determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a second special symbol display result determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing a list of big win types related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a big win type determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing a list of small win types related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a small win type determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. A figure showing a list of variation patterns related to feature part 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process related to feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table related to feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a miss fluctuation pattern determination table for feature part 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a time-saving variation pattern determination table for a normal state related to a feature part 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a configuration of a time-saving variation pattern determination table for a time-saving state related to a feature part 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a special pattern stopping process related to the feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a small win start performance waiting time determination table for feature part 063AK. This is a flowchart showing an example of a small win pre-release processing related to feature part 063AK. This is a flowchart showing an example of processing during the opening of a small win related to feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a hit end designation command determination table related to feature part 063AK. A figure showing an example of the configuration of a passing notification performance waiting time determination table for feature part 063AK. This is a flowchart showing an example of a small hit end processing related to feature part 063AK. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic part 063AK. (a) is a diagram showing a decorative pattern that is a small winning combination related to the feature part 063AK. (b) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a decorative pattern determination table for a small winning in a normal state related to the feature part 063AK. (c) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a decorative pattern determination table for a small winning in a time-saving state related to the feature part 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process related to the feature part 063AK. 1A is a flowchart showing an example of a special winning waiting process related to the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a small winning start performance time determination table related to the feature portion 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a small win performance processing related to feature part 063AK. A flowchart showing an example of a small win end presentation processing related to feature part 063AK. 13A to 13I are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in a normal state relating to the characteristic part 063AK. 13A to 13G are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in a normal state relating to the feature part 063AK. 13A to 13E are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in the time-saving state related to feature section 063AK. 13A to 13E are diagrams showing examples of performance operations in the time-saving state related to feature section 063AK. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a normal hold change determination table according to a modified example of the feature portion 063AK. FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a limit hold change determination table according to a modified example of the feature portion 063AK. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing examples of performance operations relating to modified examples of the characteristic portion 063AK. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine having characteristic part 065AK. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal symbol process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a normal symbol determination table. A diagram showing the results of normal display and the number of time reductions. A diagram showing the special chart display results and the number of time reductions. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a normal pattern stops. A flowchart showing an example of the performance control process processing of feature unit 065AK. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a general map linked performance control process. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a special chart linked performance determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a time-saving notification setting process. This is a timing chart showing the performance content when the time-saving transition occurs in feature part 065AK. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of feature part 065AK. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of feature part 065AK. A figure showing an example of the performance operation of feature part 065AK. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing an image display device, (B) is a diagram showing the rotating display of the hold display in each hold display area, (C) is a diagram showing the moving display of the caption in the caption display area, and (D) is a diagram showing the blinking pattern of the fourth pattern. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of image data constituting a display on an image display device. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control data retention area. 1A is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 11 is a part of a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. A diagram showing the execution decision rate of chance-up effects. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the effect pattern of the still image display effect, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the effect content of each effect pattern. 13A is a diagram showing the determination ratio of the presentation pattern of the operation promotion presentation, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the presentation content of each presentation pattern. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α1. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α2. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach α3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β1. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β2. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β3. 13 is a timing chart showing the variable display of super reach β3. A figure showing the presentation mode of the first reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the first reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the second reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the third reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the third reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation mode of the fourth reach presentation. A figure showing the presentation form of the second reach presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the fourth reach presentation in a modified example. A figure showing the presentation form of the fourth reach presentation in a modified example.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) is provided that is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the first and second large winning openings (attackers) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the second start winning opening (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have won the first and second large winning openings (attackers) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 may display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. As a jackpot performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade performance to indicate that the value of the jackpot game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small jackpot game state, a small jackpot performance to notify the player of the small jackpot game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small jackpot game state and a jackpot game state for some jackpot types (a jackpot type for a jackpot game state in the same manner as a small jackpot game state, for example, a jackpot type for which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether the current state is a small jackpot game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small jackpot game state and after the end of the jackpot game state, so that the player cannot distinguish whether the current state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

Sub-substrates other than the main substrate 11, such as the performance control substrate 12, the sound control substrate 13, and the lamp control substrate 14, are also called sub-substrates. As in the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-substrates may be provided for different functions, or one sub-substrate may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, a specific image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a specific sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is generated periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute timer interrupt process periodically.

After executing such game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. In addition, the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change has reached the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening to start the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and to open the jackpot opening, based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for opening the jackpot opening and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state where probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of jackpot judgment values so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the gameplay state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to the probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability of the jackpot type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the gameplay state is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a big win or small win is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a big win game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a big win game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update processing is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the processing returns to step S73. Before returning to the processing of step S73, other processing may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol showing "- " may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, it also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation of the features related to the setting suggestion production)
Hereinafter, a description will be given of a characteristic feature relating to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this characteristic feature, a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate can be executed while the variable display is being executed.

Figure 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the effect control process as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting processing, a stop pattern determination processing is executed (step S201). In the stop pattern determination processing, a combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative patterns, such as the final stop pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns, is determined. Following the stop pattern determination processing, a preview effect determination processing is executed (step S202). The preview effect determination processing makes it possible to determine the preview effect included in the advantageous suggestion effect.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of multiple patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special chart change performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling the execution of various performances. For example, one of the multiple prepared special chart change performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command. Also, one of the multiple prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the determination result by the preview performance determination process in step S202. Note that the special chart change performance control pattern and the preview performance control pattern are not limited to being set as separate performance control patterns, and one performance control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings for each performance may be set.

When the performance control pattern is determined in step S203, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as the performance control timer setting section) is set in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, for example (step S204). Also, settings are made to start the variation of the decorative patterns, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special pattern variation) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control section 123, and the variation of the decorative patterns can be started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part corresponding to the pending number "1" (the display part at the left end) is erased (consumed), and the pending displays in the display parts corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4", etc. are moved (shifted) one by one to the left. This shifts the pending display. In the active display part provided on the screen of the image display device 5, an active display corresponding to the pending display erased (consumed) in the pending display area may be performed. Note that when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second start winning, the setting for updating the active display in the active display area may be performed without updating the pending display. After that, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the performance process during the variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Figure 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stopping symbol determination process. In the stopping symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed (step S221). Whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed can be determined based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the reach performance of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop pattern in the case of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop pattern determination process is terminated. In the case of non-reach, the variable display result is "miss". In the case of normal reach, the variable display result includes the case where the variable display result is "jackpot" and the case where the variable display result is "miss". In the case of non-reach, where the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern is not a reach state, the final stop pattern is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the non-reach combination. The final stop pattern in the case of non-reach is determined to be different (mismatched) decorative patterns in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. In the case of normal reach, where the variable display result is "miss", the final stop pattern in the case of reach miss is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a missed reach is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R. In the event of a normal reach where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is the confirmed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop pattern at the time of the super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of the super reach, the variable display result may be either a "jackpot" or a "miss." At the time of the super reach where the variable display result is a "miss," the final stop pattern at the time of the reach miss is the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. At the time of the jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot," the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the jackpot.

During a super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss," the same (matching) decorative symbols are displayed as fixed decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such a reach miss combination or a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbols that can be determined as reach symbols may include multiple types of decorative symbols, such as seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers may be only performance images showing the numbers, or may be performance images showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol may be determined as one of multiple decorative symbols by referring to a reach symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the reach symbol. The numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative symbols that become the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "miss", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol decreases as the numbers become 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the lowest. In contrast, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol increases as the numbers become 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the highest. In such a determination ratio setting, when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the highest, and as the numbers 6, 5, 4, 3, and 2 are displayed, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state decreases, and when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. In addition, in the reach pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "jackpot", the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be the same. The number of judgment values assigned to each decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be different, or the number of judgment values assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern. The determination ratio of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may differ depending on the type of jackpot.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop pattern determination process is terminated. If the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect (step S225). The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, or "effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is executed.

Based on the result of the determination in step S225, it is determined whether or not "effect" has been determined, in which a setting suggestion effect is executed (step S226). If "effect" has been determined, in which a setting suggestion effect is not executed (step S226; No), the process of determining the symbols to be stopped is terminated. If "effect" has been determined (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is identified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and stores the notified setting value in a specified area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 is identified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and the stopping symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern may be determined to be one of a plurality of setting suggestion patterns, for example, by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in ROM 121, based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122.

Figure 10-3 shows an example of a setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, in the ROM 121, table data constituting the decision table TA01 shown in Figure 10-3 is stored in advance as the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the decision table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect varies depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the decision ratio of "present" to execute the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "miss". In such a setting ratio setting, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. Note that in the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot".

Figure 10-4 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as multiple setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether the symbol display color is changed and, if changed, the display color. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to suggestion display colors including copper, silver, and gold in addition to the normal display color red. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color and suggests that the expectation level is low, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the expectation level is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting that the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to give suggestions regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 depending on whether the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

Figure 10-4 (B) shows an example of settings for the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in Figure 10-4 (B) is pre-stored in ROM 121 as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stopping symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by, for example, referring to the determination table TA11. In the determination table TA11, there are portions where the number of judgment values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion effect using a reach pattern is executed, the reach pattern becomes a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, so there is a high probability of control to a jackpot game state. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is high, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-3, the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, the reach pattern when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode includes a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7, and a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, and also suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In the case where the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed to continue giving a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state and also giving a suggestion regarding the setting value.

The setting suggestion presentation can be executed so that the presentation mode differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, and the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, whether the symbol display color is changed to copper, or not, differs. If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, and the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6, the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, whether the symbol display color is changed to gold, or not, differs.

Instead of or in addition to changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol, the setting suggestion effect may be to change any aspect of the reach state, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol. Alternatively, it may be to change the performance mode by any performance device, such as displaying a background image, an outer frame image, or any other performance image, outputting sound from speakers 8L and 8R, lighting up decorative light-emitting bodies such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operating performance movable members, or a combination of some or all of these. The setting suggestion effect and other optional performances in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executable when any data related to performance control, any data not related to performance control, or a combination of these satisfies a single or multiple conditional expressions previously determined for performance execution. A performance that changes the symbol display color is also called a change performance.

The multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and patterns that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 may be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is a "miss," whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 may be determined at a predetermined rate only when the variable display result is a "jackpot," and cannot be determined when the variable display result is a "miss." In this case, pattern RE-2 may be determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 may be determined at a different rate depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Figure 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S172 of the performance control process processing as the variable display performance processing. In the variable display performance processing, it is determined whether or not the special chart fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the performance control process timer (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various performances as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting processing. These commands are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, etc. This allows a variety of effects to be produced by a specified performance device, such as displaying a specified performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, outputting specified sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on, off, or blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operating movable components for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice performance period (step S242). If it is the advance notice performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the advance notice performance (step S243). If it is not the advance notice performance period (step S242; No) or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach performance period (step S244). If it is the reach performance period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the reach performance (step S245). By the control of step S245, when the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern is stopped and displayed, and then the reach performance is executed after the pattern display color is changed, it is possible to provide suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state and to provide suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1.

If it is not the reach performance period (step S244; No) or after the control of step S245 has been performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be determined in advance as a performance execution period in which the pattern display color is changed when a setting suggestion performance using a reach pattern is executed. If it is the change performance period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change performance (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No) or after the control of step S247 has been performed, control is performed to execute performance during variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, based on, for example, the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, and then the variable display performance processing ends.

The change performance period may be set to a different length of time depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change performance period may be set to the shortest first period, in the case of pattern RE-1, the change performance period may be set to the second period longer than the first period, in the case of pattern RE-2, the change performance period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change performance period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when a performance that notifies an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player tends to take an image or video of the performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player and post it on a member registration website such as a social networking service (SNS) or an Internet video supply site. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous performance is short, a problem occurs in that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for a performance that is often performed even in an unfavorable case (unfavorable performance), there is a problem that a long execution period of the unfavorable performance gives a sense of discomfort to the player because it does not stimulate the desire to take a photo. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to ensure time for shooting, and the execution period of unfavorable effects is shortened to reduce discomfort. This prevents the player from missing an advantageous effect when it is executed, and also ensures time for shooting. Furthermore, by ensuring time for shooting, the player can publish the captured images and videos on the Internet, which can increase public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in many cases, the images and videos are published, including which pachinko gaming machine 1 at which gaming parlor they were taken, which means that the gaming parlor is advertised by the player. In this way, by ensuring time for shooting when a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only for the player but also for the gaming parlor.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the pattern determination command has not been received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is terminated and the device waits. If a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving a pattern determination command after the variable display time has elapsed, a predetermined error process may be executed in response to the fact that the pattern determination command was not received normally. If a pattern determination command has been received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop pattern (determined decorative pattern) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern (step S250). Next, a certain time is set as a waiting time for receiving a jackpot start command (step S251). In addition, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S252), and then the variable display performance process is terminated.

Figure 10-6 shows an example of the execution of a setting suggestion effect. Figure 10-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is in a reach state and a reach is established. When a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, a reach is established and a normal reach reach effect is executed. Figure 10-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which a normal reach reach effect transitions to a super reach reach effect and a reach development occurs. On the display screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced size, and a performance image in the super reach reach effect is displayed. Figure 10-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect. A performance display corresponding to the change effect is displayed superimposed on the reach symbol that is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, a performance image announcing a message such as "Pattern display color change!!" is displayed, suggesting a change in the pattern display color.

Figure 10-6 (D1) shows a performance execution example HD111 in which the pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color. Figure 10-6 (D2) shows a performance execution example HD112 in which the pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper. Figure 10-6 (D3) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver. Figure 10-6 (D4) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold. In performance execution example HD111, the pattern RE-0 does not change the display color of the reach symbol, and it remains the normal display color red. In this way, a failure performance (false performance) in which the symbol display color does not change is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low. In performance execution example HD112, pattern RE-1 changes the display color of the reach symbol to copper, suggesting that the set value is confirmed to be 2 or higher. In performance execution example HD113, pattern RE-2 changes the display color of the reach symbol to silver, suggesting that the player has a high expectation of a favorable set value. In performance execution example HD114, pattern RE-3 changes the display color of the reach symbol to gold, suggesting that 6, the highest set value, has been confirmed.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect may be an arbitrary effect such as a pseudo consecutive effect or a pre-reading notice effect that suggests the probability of a jackpot and also suggests the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be an effect that can make a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state during the execution of the variable display. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then continued, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then ended, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while continuing, or a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, a suggestion as to whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. For example, the multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination rates depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed, a suggestion is made in the presentation mode of a pattern that is determined with a high probability, thereby diversifying the presentation and increasing interest in the game so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state may be made, but no suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made in conjunction with the execution of the jackpot start performance (fanfare performance) or the performance during the jackpot (such as the performance corresponding to the first round or second round). There may also be cases where suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 are made without making suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or in addition to some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state may be given. For example, suggestions regarding a probability variable state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be given. In addition, suggestions regarding a state in which any game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded as an advantageous state may be given, depending on whether or not it is controlled.

(Description of characteristic portion 10SH)
Next, a characteristic feature 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH has an operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 has a push button 31B that the player can press to give a specific command.

The gaming machine according to feature 10SH is equipped with a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a gaze guidance effect execution means capable of executing a gaze guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the operation means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a gaze guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 10SH has a higher expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a higher reliability of winning when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect execution means of feature section 10SH can execute a vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at either of timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts and timing T2 when a reach is established, or at either of timing T3 when a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed after timing T1 and timing T2, and at timing T4 when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

The vibration effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect in a manner in which the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B are common regardless of whether it is either timing T1 or timing T2, or either timing T3 or timing T4.

The visual line guidance effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH does not execute visual line guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute visual line guidance effect at timing T1 and timing T2.

The visual guidance effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 and timing T4.

The vibration effect execution means related to characteristic unit 10SH can execute a vibration effect when a visual guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect when a visual guidance effect is being executed.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from a vibration effect and a gaze guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach effect of a super reach.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute a vibration effect when a specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is provided with a display means for displaying information. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 for displaying various performance images.

The display of the visual guidance effect related to characteristic part 10SH has a lower priority than the display of specified information, and a higher priority than the display of information different from the specified information. For example, the visual guidance effect image has a lower priority than the constant small pattern, the hold number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than the hold display, active display, background image, and decorative pattern.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 10SH, and shows the layout of the main components.

The push button 31B is made of a translucent material, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. With this configuration, the push button 31B can be made to emit light by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

The push button 31B is also configured to be able to vibrate when driven by a vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is configured, for example, as an eccentric motor in which a weight with an offset center of gravity is attached to the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. Note that multiple vibration motors 131 may be provided to provide a variety of vibration modes for the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L, 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions on the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided to the left of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided to the right of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. The game effect lamps 9L, 9R have multiple LEDs built in along the extension direction of the game effect lamps 9L, 9R.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 11-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the performance image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R, and drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R based on the lamp signal, turning on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the lamps to be turned on/off. Note that the control of turning on/off the lamps may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a motor control board 130. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the performance image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits that drive the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic part 10SH. The performance control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 11-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display to be executed and the display result of the variable display to be executed (step 10SHS1). The fluctuation pattern and display result are identified by the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 when the variable display starts and analyzed in the command analysis process. The final stop pattern is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to a combination of the fluctuation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, lottery refers to a method of determination using a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. The random number value uses one of the performance random numbers updated by the random number circuit 124 or the performance random number update process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect (step 10SHS2). A vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect that is not linked to a preview effect. In the processing of step 10SHS2, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect by drawing lots using random number values and a table prepared in advance in ROM 121.

In the table referenced in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the decision value to be compared with the random number value should be assigned to the decision result of whether or not a vibration effect is to be performed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is to be performed, so that the reliability of a jackpot is higher when a vibration effect is performed than when the vibration effect is not performed, and the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is performed.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain effect A is calculated, for example, as follows: (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is a "jackpot") / {(probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is a "jackpot") + (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is not a "jackpot")}.

Therefore, the table referenced in the lottery of step 10SHS2 only needs to specify the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot" and the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot" so that the jackpot reliability according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect will be a predetermined value.

(Vibration effects and jackpot reliability)
11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the vibration effect and the reliability of the big win. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a plurality of types of vibration effects, which are execution patterns SE1 to SE10, according to a combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the light color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, or timing T2 when a reach is achieved. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved. Also, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts. Also, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 in this embodiment can execute a vibration effect at either timing T3, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, when a normal reach reach performance is being executed, or timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed. In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as vibration effects at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as vibration effects at timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

With this configuration, a vibration effect may be executed when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed, which can increase excitement.

In addition, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance in this embodiment can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, regardless of whether it is timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, or timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance in this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance in this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for three seconds and emits light in rainbow colors, regardless of when the vibration effect can be executed. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for three seconds and emits light in rainbow colors.

In this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when the vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. Also, in this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot for the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result definitively indicates that a jackpot has been displayed.

This configuration allows the user to focus on the color of the light emitted by the push button 31B when it vibrates, and for how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the timing of execution of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when it is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts than when it is executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed. Also, even if the vibration effect is the same, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when it is executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed than when it is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts.

This configuration can heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins. Also, if the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a specified reach state when no vibration effect is executed at timing T1, it can heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed, rather than at timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed. And, when a vibration effect is not actually executed at timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, it can further heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed.

The jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. Furthermore, if multiple types of normal reach reach performances can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the normal reach reach performance being executed at that time, or may be higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of normal reach reach performance.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T4 while the Super Reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the Super Reach. Furthermore, if multiple types of Super Reach reach performances can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of Super Reach reach performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T4 while the Super Reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the Super Reach reach performance being executed at that time, or may be higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of Super Reach reach performance.

With this configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, and the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed can be used as a chance-up effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the vibration effect is executed in such a manner that the push button 31B is always vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors, and the display result is definitively notified that it is a "jackpot."

This configuration can heighten the sense of expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, rather than timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins. And when the vibration effect is not actually executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins, it can further heighten the sense of expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved.

In this way, in this embodiment, the sense of expectation for the vibration effect to be executed can be changed in a complex manner as the display of the decorative patterns progresses.

In addition, by setting the probability of executing a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors to a sufficiently low probability compared to the probability of executing other vibration effects, it is possible to increase the excitement when it is definitively notified that the display result is a "jackpot."

In addition, in this embodiment, when the push button 31B is vibrated to produce a vibration effect, the push button 31B is always illuminated.

This configuration allows the user to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, increasing the chances that the user will recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation then determines, based on the result of the determination in step 10SHS2, whether or not to execute a vibration presentation at either timing T3 when the normal reach presentation is being executed, or timing T4 when the super reach presentation is being executed in the current variable display (step 10SHS3).

When a vibration effect is to be executed at either timing T3 during the execution of a normal reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of a super reach effect (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an eye-guiding effect (step 10SHS4). An eye-guiding effect is an effect that guides the player's gaze to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an eye-guiding effect by drawing lots using random numbers and a table prepared in advance in ROM 121. In the table referenced in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio for the presence or absence of an eye-guiding effect is set regardless of which type of vibration effect is executed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of an eye-guiding effect at the same ratio regardless of which type of vibration effect is executed this time.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when a normal reach reach effect is being executed, or timing T4 when a super reach reach effect is being executed, a gaze guidance effect can be executed.

This configuration allows the push button 31B to be noticed before the vibration effect is executed, thereby sufficiently increasing the interest of the vibration effect.

On the other hand, if a vibration effect is executed at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts or timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the gaze guidance effect is not executed.

When the display result is derived and displayed, a "miss" display result may be displayed, and then a rescue effect may be executed, resulting in the true display result being derived and displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display is derived and the current variable display has started, if a gaze guidance effect is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, this may give the wrong impression that a rescue effect was executed in the previous variable display. In contrast, in this embodiment, a gaze guidance effect is not executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, thereby preventing such a misunderstanding.

In addition, if a visual guidance effect is executed at the time T2 when a reach is achieved, it may not be possible to properly recognize that the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern has reached the specified reach state. In contrast, in this embodiment, a visual guidance effect is not executed at the time T2 when a reach is achieved, so that it is possible to properly recognize that the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern has reached the specified reach state.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, if a vibration effect is not executed at either timing T3 during the execution of a normal reach reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of a super reach reach effect (step 10SHS3; No), or after executing the processing of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute other effects such as a reach effect, and the type of effect to be executed (step 10SHS5). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute various effects such as a preview effect, and the type of effect, by a lottery. At this time, the probability of winning is varied depending on whether or not a preview effect is executed and the type of effect, by varying the determination ratio in the lottery depending on the current display result and the current fluctuation pattern. Also, if the current pattern specifies a reach, it is determined that the reach effect specified by the fluctuation pattern will be executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the performance that has been decided to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 sets the timer value corresponding to the special chart fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern as the initial value for the performance control process timer, and stores in the timer value storage area of RAM 122 performance specific data that specifies the type and mode of the performance that has been decided to be executed, and an execution timing specific timer value that indicates the execution timing of the performance by comparing it with the timer value of the performance control process timer, in association with each other. If there are multiple performances that have been decided to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 stores the performance specific data and the execution timing specific timer value for each performance in the timer value storage area.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start executing the variable display of the decorative pattern in the manner specified by the current variation pattern and which derives the determined final stop pattern (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts the variable display of the decorative pattern. At this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

Then, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2" (step 10SHS8), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Execution timing and duration of vibration and gaze guidance effects)
11-5 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing and duration of vibration effects and gaze guidance effects. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute vibration effects at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts or the timing T2 when a reach is established. Also, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute vibration effects at either the timing T3 when a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed or the timing T4 when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

In addition, as described above, when the CPU 120 for controlling the effects executes a vibration effect at either timing T3 when a normal reach reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when a super reach reach effect is being executed, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a gaze guidance effect before that.

In this embodiment, when the presentation control CPU 120 executes a gaze guidance effect before executing a vibration effect at timing T3 while a normal reach is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the gaze guidance effect 4 seconds before timing T3, and starts the vibration effect when timing T3 is reached. Similarly, in this embodiment, when the presentation control CPU 120 executes a gaze guidance effect before executing a vibration effect at timing T4 while a super reach is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the gaze guidance effect 4 seconds before timing T4, and starts the vibration effect when timing T4 is reached. The presentation period for the gaze guidance effect in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the gaze guidance effect is being executed.

This configuration creates a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect, enhancing the presentation effect.

(Example of performance)
11-6 and 11-7 are diagrams showing examples of vibration effects and gaze guidance effects. In these examples, an example of executing a vibration effect at timing T4 during the execution of a reach effect of a super reach will be described.

The performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing multiple types of super reach reach performances. In the reach performance of a super reach, the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), a background image 10SHY of a "mountain view" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the reach performance of the super reach is started, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed when the reach was achieved. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), a "left" reach decorative pattern 10SH5L is displayed, which is a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L when the reach was achieved, and a "right" reach decorative pattern 10SH5R is displayed, which is a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R when the reach was achieved.

In addition, a small pattern display area 10SHK, which is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, is provided in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special patterns and decorative patterns. The performance image showing the small pattern is also called the notification information image. Therefore, in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a performance image showing the small pattern that is the notification information image is variably displayed, and a performance image showing the confirmed small pattern that is the display result is derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small pattern different from the decorative pattern is performed. During the period from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts to when the determined decorative pattern that is the display result is derived, the variable display of the small pattern continues in a constant display mode and does not disappear from the screen or be blocked by an obstruction. Therefore, the small pattern display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always see the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 10SHK. The small pattern variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK is also called a constant small pattern or a small pattern for performance. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, a performance image showing a plurality of types of small patterns that are identifiable each other may be variably displayed as a notification information image in a display mode that is partially or entirely common to each of the plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern showing a number similar to the portion showing a number in the decorative pattern. The small pattern may be displayed only when the decorative pattern is not displayed. For example, after the variable display of the decorative symbols is displayed in a reach mode, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbols, a variable display of a small symbol may be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A).

In addition, a fourth pattern may be provided following the special and decorative patterns, and the fourth pattern may be variable displayed in sync with the variable display of the special and decorative patterns. The variable display of the fourth pattern may be realized, for example, by continuing display control that repeatedly displays and hides a specific display color at regular time intervals in a fourth pattern display area provided on or off the screen of the image display device 5. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth pattern, the display result in the variable display of the small patterns may be displayed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize.

The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, to the right side of the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, a player who is paying attention to the effects displayed on the image display device 5 may find it difficult to check the display state of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and may have difficulty in recognizing whether the variable display of the special symbol is in progress or whether the display result has been derived. In response to this, by performing a variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, it is possible to display whether the variable display is in progress or whether the display result has been derived in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

In this example, a pending display area 10SHH is displayed to display a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display area 10SHA is displayed to display an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. Note that when a reach performance of a super reach is being executed, the pending display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may be hidden.

In addition, a reserved number display area 10SHHS is provided in the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the reserved number display area 10SHHS, similar to the reserved number display area 10SHH, the reserved number of the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special game is displayed in a specific manner. The display form is a form in which it is displayed in Arabic numerals.

Then, as described above, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the gaze guidance presentation 4 seconds before timing T4 during the execution of the reach presentation of the super reach. As a gaze guidance presentation, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a presentation that uses a visual presentation effect, for example, to guide the player's gaze to the push button 31B.

In this example, the performance control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC that resembles a character holding a hammer, and a button image 10SHB that resembles a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the state of the character image 10SHC so that the character performs the action of swinging up the hammer, as shown in Fig. 11-6 (B) to (D). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the LEDs built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside, in accordance with the character's action of swinging up the hammer, as shown in Fig. 11-6 (B) to (D).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the state of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer, as shown in Figures 11-7 (E) and (F). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the LEDs built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside, in time with the character swinging down the hammer, as shown in Figures 11-7 (E) and (F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), at timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 changes the appearance of the various images so that the hammer swung down by the character hits the button image 10SHB and multiple star-like effect images 10SHS scatter from the button image 10SHB. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), at timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 starts a vibration performance, vibrating the push button 31B and lighting up the game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R built into the push button 31B.

Then, one second after timing T4, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the gaze guidance presentation, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration presentation has elapsed, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the vibration presentation, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and turns off the game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R built into the push button 31B.

Here, the push button 31B is located away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, below the play area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, a player who is paying attention to the effects displayed on the image display device 5 may find it difficult to check the state of the push button 31B, and may have difficulty in recognizing whether the push button 31B is vibrating or lit up. In response to this, by executing a gaze guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before it vibrates, and the vibration of the push button 31B can be properly recognized, sufficiently increasing the interest of the vibration effect.

The priority of the display of the visual guidance effects is set lower than that of the constant small symbols and the reserved number display. This priority setting can be achieved by displaying the visual guidance effects in a layer behind the layer that constantly displays the small symbols and the reserved number display.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed behind the constant small pattern displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, has a lower priority than the constant small pattern.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed behind the reserved number display shown in the reserved number display area 10SHHS, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, has a lower priority than the reserved number display.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the eye guidance effects is set higher than the pending display, active display, background image, and decorative patterns. This priority setting can be achieved by displaying the eye guidance effects in a layer that is closer to the front than the layers that display the background image and decorative patterns.

In this example, as shown in Figures 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the background image 10SHY of a "mountain scenery," and it can be said that the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB, which are displays for guiding the viewer's gaze, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of a "mountain scenery."

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R, and the character image 10SHC, which is a display for guiding the eye, can be said to have a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R, and the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, can be said to have a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the reserved display displayed in the reserved display area 10SHH, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the viewer's gaze, has a higher priority than the reserved display.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the viewer's gaze, has a higher priority than the active display.

With this configuration, when the gaze guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the gaze guidance effect can be made prominent while ensuring optimal visibility of the small symbols and the reserved number display at all times.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), when the visual guidance effect is being executed, the display of the visual guidance effect and the constant small pattern and the reserved number display, which have a higher priority than the display of the visual guidance effect, are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

With this configuration, when the gaze guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the small symbols and the reserved number display can be more optimally ensured at all times, while the visibility of the gaze guidance effect can be made more noticeable.

(Modification of characteristic portion 10SH)
The invention relating to characteristic portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the processing of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 11-3, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect may be set according to which type of vibration effect is executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect at different ratios according to whether the current vibration effect is a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, or a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Here, it is easy to execute the visual guidance effect when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red is executed. Also, when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is executed, the visual guidance effect is always executed. In other words, when the gaze-guiding effect is executed, the execution rate of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. With this configuration, the execution of the gaze-guiding effect can increase the expectation of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability being executed.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance may be capable of executing a vibration performance linked with the advance notice performance. In this case, as a vibration performance linked with the advance notice performance, multiple types of vibration performance may be executed according to a combination of the linked advance notice performance, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance, and the light color of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a feature advance notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed according to the operating state of the movable body 32. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a vibration performance linked with a highly reliable feature advance notice performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked feature advance notice performance. With this configuration, the vibration performance can be a performance that increases the chances of winning in the feature advance notice performance.

The performance control CPU 120 may also be capable of executing a vibration performance linked to other highly reliable preview performances. This vibration performance vibrates the push button 31B in synchronization with the image displayed in the preview performance, and causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance only needs to be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked preview performance. With this configuration, the vibration performance can be used as a chance-up performance in the preview performance.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 may be one in which the jackpot game state is started when the game ball passes through a specific area provided in the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or winning hole, after the determined decorative pattern that is the jackpot combination is derived. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery performance that notifies the player of the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected. The performance control CPU 120 may also execute a vibration performance linked to the round lottery performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, and notifies the player that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is announced in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B may be vibrated for three seconds and illuminated in rainbow colors to definitively announce that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state is the highest number of rounds among the multiple options. This configuration can increase attention to the vibration effect linked to the round lottery effect.

The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing an error notification process. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11, or when an error is detected in the performance control board 12, an error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5, or a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. When performing a gaze guidance performance, the performance control CPU 120 may display an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5. In that case, the display of the gaze guidance performance may have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. With this configuration, even if a gaze guidance performance is being performed when the error notification image is displayed, the visibility of the error notification image can be preferably ensured.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the gaze guidance effect is performed and when the gaze guidance effect is not performed. For example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer when the gaze guidance effect is performed than when the gaze guidance effect is not performed, it is possible to increase the interest when the gaze guidance effect is performed and the vibration effect is performed. Also, for example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer when the gaze guidance effect is not performed than when the gaze guidance effect is performed, it is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating even if the gaze guidance effect is not performed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance may be different before the reference timing and after the reference timing, with a certain timing as the reference. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance may be set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, which is a timing before the timing T2 when the reach is established, and 3 seconds at the timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, which is a timing after the timing T2, or at the timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed, which is a timing after the timing T2. In this way, the vibration time after the reference timing is longer than the vibration time before the reference timing. This configuration can enhance the performance effect when the vibration performance is executed after the reference timing.

The reliability of the jackpot of the vibration effect may be varied depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B. For example, the push button 31B may be vibrated with a first strength and a second strength greater than the first strength, and when the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength, the reliability of the jackpot of the vibration effect may be made higher than when the push button 31B is vibrated with the first strength. With this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the strength of the vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration effects and the reliability of the big win may be the same for a first type of pachinko gaming machine 1 and a second type of pachinko gaming machine 1 that is different from the first type. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the variation in the execution pattern of the vibration effects and the reliability of the big win executed in the first type of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second type of pachinko gaming machine 1, respectively, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A vibration effect may be executed as a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the opportunities to execute the vibration effect.

In addition, when a vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution that is the target of the look-ahead preview may differ between when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect is the first mode and when it is the second mode. For example, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution that is the target of the look-ahead preview may differ between when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect is a mode in which the push button 31B vibrates continuously for a predetermined time and when it is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. This configuration can increase attention to the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect.

Alternatively, when a vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as a look-ahead preview effect may be set to be only executable at any one of multiple timings at which a vibration effect can be executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently in progress. For example, the vibration effect as a look-ahead preview effect may be executed only at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. With this configuration, when a vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which a vibration effect as a look-ahead preview can be executed, it is possible to conveniently recognize that a vibration effect has been executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently in progress.

When a vibration performance is executed as a pre-reading notice performance at a timing when a vibration performance as a notice performance for predicting the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed can be executed, the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance for predicting the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance. For example, when a vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance can be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance for predicting the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance is set to 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance for predicting the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to a mode in which the push button 31B continues to vibrate for a predetermined time, and the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance is set to a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. With this configuration, when a vibration effect can be executed as a pre-reading preview effect at a timing when a vibration effect can be executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, it is possible to easily recognize which vibration effect has been executed.

When the execution pattern of the vibration effect and the jackpot reliability are common between a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type, the jackpot reliability may be common even if the mode of the vibration effect executed at the specific timing in the first type of pachinko game machine 1 is different from the mode of the vibration effect executed at the second type of pachinko game machine 1. For example, even if the illumination mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed at the timing T2 when a reach is established in the first type of pachinko game machine 1 is different from the illumination mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the second type of pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot reliability is 100%. With this configuration, even if the type of pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at a specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B during the vibration effect may be adjusted to match the image of the effect being executed at that time, for example, when the gaze-guiding effect is not being executed. For example, when an announcement effect is executed to announce that a reach has been achieved at timing T2 when the reach is achieved, the vibration effect is set to vibrate the push button 31B during the period when the image of the announcement effect is being displayed. With this configuration, even when the gaze-guiding effect is not being executed, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time is created, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

When a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type have the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, only the lower limit of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed for vibration effects of the same execution pattern. With this configuration, for example, when a vibration effect is executed as an effect to increase the chances of another effect, it is possible to flexibly adjust the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other effect while preventing players from feeling uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at a timing different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, after the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect can execute a provocative effect that encourages the development of a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability than the reach state after temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination. After the provocative effect is executed, there are cases where the state develops into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and cases where the state does not develop into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and the display result is a "miss". When the state develops into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect executes a provocative success effect that notifies the development into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability as the performance result of the provocative effect. On the other hand, when the state does not develop into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and the display result is a "miss", the CPU 120 for controlling the effect executes a provocative failure effect that notifies the development into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability as the performance result of the provocative effect. When executing such a provocation effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing when the provocation success effect is executed. This configuration can increase the interest when the provocation success effect is executed.

The vibration duration of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the teasing success effect may be adjusted to match the image of the teasing success effect. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the interest when the teasing success effect is executed.

The illumination color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the teasing success effect may be the same as the illumination color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration effects of multiple execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. With this configuration, when the teasing success effect is executed, even if it develops into a reach state with a high jackpot reliability, the display result may be "miss," but it is possible to prevent the jackpot reliability from being excessively increased.

In addition, when the display result is a "jackpot," the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a vibration effect immediately before the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, is stopped. This configuration not only increases the interest in the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped, but also heightens the sense of anticipation for the vibration effect itself, and can increase interest when the vibration effect is executed at other times as well.

When a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type have the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the light emitted by the push button 31B during the vibration effect can be "rainbow-colored" even when a "jackpot" occurs for a jackpot type other than the jackpot type with the highest advantage among multiple types of jackpot types with different advantages for the player. With this configuration, when the light emitted by the push button 31B during the vibration effect becomes "rainbow-colored," it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a "jackpot" occurs for the jackpot type with the highest advantage.

If there are only two types of jackpots that provide players with different degrees of advantage, it is possible to avoid setting an execution pattern in which the push button 31B emits a rainbow color during vibration effects. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a jackpot of a type that provides a low degree of advantage to the player from occurring even if the push button 31B emits a rainbow color during vibration effects, and thus prevents the player's expectations for the vibration effects from being diminished.

The presentation control CPU 120 may use an auditory presentation effect to guide the player's gaze to the push button 31B as a visual guidance presentation. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may output a specific sound effect when a vibration presentation is being executed, and output the specific sound effect as a visual guidance presentation so that the volume gradually changes from a low volume to a high volume. With this configuration, a player who has difficulty recognizing visual guidance presentations that use visual presentation effects can be directed to the operating means before the operating means vibrates.

When the configuration is such that the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the same execution pattern may be different when the first setting value is set and when the second setting value is set, which is different from the first setting value. For example, even when the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is set, when the setting value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of that execution pattern may be higher than when the setting value is "1". With this configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is "jackpot", the expectation of the highly advantageous setting value can be increased.

In the case where the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the setting value, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the first setting value is set and when the second setting value is set, which is different from the first setting value. With this configuration, the setting value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the setting value is any of "1" to "3" and when the setting value is any of "4" to "6". With this configuration, the vibration effect can suggest whether or not the setting value is a high setting that may be the most advantageous setting value "6" for the player. Also, for example, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the setting value is an odd number and when the setting value is an even number. With this configuration, the vibration effect can suggest whether or not the setting value is an even number that may be the most advantageous setting value "6" for the player.

Even at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it may be possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. With this configuration, even at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it is possible to draw attention not only to the fact that the vibration effect is being executed, but also to the state when the vibration effect is executed.

If it is possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the vibration effect may be executed at both the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the timing T2 when the reach is established. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is not executed at either the timing T1 or the timing T2, the combination of the execution pattern of the vibration effect at the timing T1 and the execution pattern of the vibration effect at the timing T2 may be a specific combination, so that the display result is definitively notified as "jackpot". With this configuration, even if the vibration effect that vibrates the push button 31B for three seconds and causes the push button 31B to glow in rainbow colors is not executed when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T2 when the reach is achieved, and to further increase attention to the vibration effect at the timing T2.

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 during the execution of the normal reach reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of the super reach reach effect. In this case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for three seconds and illuminating the push button 31B in rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the execution pattern of the vibration effect at timing T3 and the execution pattern of the vibration effect at timing T4 may be a specific combination, so that the display result is definitively notified as "jackpot". With this configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 during the execution of the normal reach reach effect, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for three seconds and illuminating the push button 31B in rainbow colors is not executed, not only can the expectation of the vibration effect being executed at timing T4 during the execution of the super reach reach effect be increased, but the attention to the vibration effect at timing T4 can be further increased.

The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot". For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" may be longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot". Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is not definitely a "jackpot" is monotonous, whereas in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot", the push button 31B vibrates in accordance with a predetermined rhythm. With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" is a special vibration performance.

When a vibration effect is executed at timing T3 when a normal reach is being performed or at timing T4 when a super reach is being performed, a visual guidance effect may be executed without fail. With this configuration, the sense of expectation that the display result will be a "jackpot" due to the execution of a reach effect can be appropriately increased by appropriately recognizing the vibration of the operating means.

When a vibration effect is executed at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started or the timing T2 when the reach is established, the vibration effect may be executed at either the timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed or the timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. In that case, the execution pattern of the vibration effect executable at the timing T3 or the timing T4 may be restricted so that the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 are not lower than the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2, in other words, so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 is not lower than the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2. For example, when the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE2 is executed at the timing T1, the execution of the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE5 is restricted at the timing T3, and the execution of the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE8 is restricted at the timing T4. With this configuration, when multiple vibration effects are performed in one variable display, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the jackpot from decreasing.

When it is possible to execute a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the mode of the vibration effect linked to the preview performance and the mode of the vibration effect not linked to the preview performance may be different. For example, in a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the beat of the music played in the linked preview performance. Also, for example, in a vibration effect linked to a reel preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the sound effect when the reel operates. Also, for example, in a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is illuminated in a color different from the illumination color of the push button 31B in a vibration effect not linked to a preview performance. With this configuration, when a vibration effect is executed, it is easy to recognize whether the vibration effect is linked to a preview performance or not.

It may also be possible to execute a present box effect. In this case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer may pop out from the open present box, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), and a gaze-guiding effect may be executed. With this configuration, the execution of the present box effect may increase the sense of anticipation for the gaze-guiding effect and the vibration effect.

When an operation performance for operating the push button 31B can be executed, the push button 31B may be lit in this operation performance during the operation valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. In this case, the push button 31B is lit in a manner different from the lighting manner of the push button 31B in the vibration performance. For example, when the push button 31B is lit in the vibration performance, it may be controlled to be a lighting manner for vibration performance in which the push button 31B is continuously illuminated in red for 3 seconds during which the push button 31B is vibrated. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is lit in the operation performance, it may be controlled to be a lighting manner for button operation suggestion in which the push button 31B is switched between red illumination (illumination) and non-illumination (off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation valid period. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. In addition, during a valid lever operation period during which the operation of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A is valid, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A may be lit up to notify that the operation of the operating lever is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A is lit up in a lever operation suggestion mode during the valid lever operation period. The lighting mode for the lever operation suggestion may be the same as the lighting mode for the button operation suggestion, or may be a different lighting mode from the lighting mode for the button operation suggestion.

For example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like may be operated by the player to change settings related to the effects, such as the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the setting of the type of music or background to be output, the brightness setting of the image display device 5, the brightness setting of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. Note that, for example, it may be possible to select which effect setting to change from a menu screen, or a different operation may be performed corresponding to the item to be changed by the player, and the setting corresponding to that operation may be changed. In addition, when a special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be lit to notify that the settings related to the effects can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is lit in a different manner from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation effect. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the settings related to the effects can be changed.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 10SH)
In relation to characteristic part 10SH, a gaming machine has been proposed that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can execute a vibration effect in which an operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, see JP 2019-051075 A).

Generally, players play games while looking at the display means on which the variable display and various effects are displayed. Therefore, if the operating means is not within the player's field of vision, there is a possibility that the player will not be aware that the operating means is vibrating even when a vibration effect is executed. In such a case, the interest provided by the vibration effect cannot be sufficiently heightened.

Therefore, in order to draw attention to the gaming means before the vibration effects are executed and to sufficiently heighten interest in the vibration effects, the gaming machine of means 1 relating to characteristic section 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, etc.), and includes operation means that can be operated by the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a push button 31B that the player can press to perform a predetermined instruction operation, etc.), and vibration effect execution means that can execute a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates, etc.), and is configured to attract the player's attention. and a visual line guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual line guidance effect that guides a line to the operation means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a visual line guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the push button 31B, etc.), and the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 1 20 is capable of executing a vibration effect at any one of timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and timing T2 when a reach is established, and any one of timing T3 during which a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, and timing T4 during which a reach effect of a super reach is being executed), and is capable of executing the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect at any one of timing T1 and timing T2, or timing T3 and The vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B are common regardless of whether the timing is T1 or T4), the visual line guidance effect execution means does not execute the visual line guidance effect at the first timing (for example, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute the visual line guidance effect at timings T1 and T2), and can execute the visual line guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the visual line guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at timings T3 and T4).

This configuration allows the player to focus on the operating means before the vibration effect is executed, and can adequately increase interest in the vibration effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 relating to feature 10SH may be configured such that in the gaming machine of means 1, the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the gaze guidance effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect when the gaze guidance effect is being executed, etc.).

This configuration creates a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect, enhancing the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of feature 3 relating to feature 10SH may be equipped with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the gaze guidance effect in the gaming machine of means 1 or 2 (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a reach effect of a super reach, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed, etc.).

With this configuration, a vibration effect may be performed while a specific effect is being performed, which can increase interest.

The gaming machine of feature 10SH according to means 4 may be equipped with a display means for displaying information in any of the gaming machines of means 1 to 3 (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be equipped with an image display device 5 for displaying various presentation images, etc.), and the display of the gaze-guiding presentation may have a lower priority than the display of specified information and a higher priority than the display of information different from the specified information (e.g., the presentation image of the gaze-guiding presentation may have a lower priority than the constant small symbols, the hold number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than the hold display, active display, background image, decorative symbols, etc.).

With this configuration, when the visual guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the visual guidance effect can be made prominent while ensuring the visibility of the specified information.

The gaming machine of feature 5 relating to feature 10SH is a gaming machine of any one of means 1 to 4, in which the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect of the first mode and the vibration effect of the second mode which suggests that there is a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than in the first mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white is executed). (e.g., the reliability of a jackpot is higher when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when a winning combination is executed), and when the visual guidance effect is executed, the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed than the first vibration effect (for example, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a visual guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when a winning combination is executed).

With this configuration, the gaze guidance effect can be executed, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation for the execution of the second type of vibration effect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each feature of the characteristic feature 10SH may be combined with a part or all of each feature of the other characteristic features as appropriate. The combined feature features or individual uncombined feature features may be combined with a part or all of each feature of the other characteristic features as appropriate.

(Explanation of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 12-1 shows a configuration example of the performance device related to the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for performance, which serves as a movable performance device, is provided at the lower end front, which is the lower edge part on the front side overlapping with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to the operation motor via, for example, a link mechanism. The movable body 32 can be changed to an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operation motor. The movable body 32 may be one whose position can be changed by power from, for example, an operation solenoid or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 has a frame and a window. The frame of the movable body 32 is made of a decorative material and has a configuration that can be covered so that the player cannot see the display screen of the image display device 5. The window of the movable body 32 is made of transparent glass or synthetic resin, or is formed as a simple opening, and has a see-through configuration that allows the player to see the display screen of the image display device 5.

The game effect lamp 9 may include multiple LEDs constituting the upper frame lamp 9C, multiple LEDs constituting the left frame lamp 9M, and multiple LEDs constituting the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the game area in the game machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position to the left of the game area in the game machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position to the right of the game area in the game machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include multiple LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and multiple LEDs constituting the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of multiple LEDs built into the operating stick (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of multiple LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be formed in part or in whole from a translucent material. As a result, when the lever lamp 9B1 is turned on, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated. Also, when the button lamp 9B2 is turned on, the push button 31B can be illuminated.

For example, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are integrally formed, and the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are configured to vibrate when driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or in a position close to the push button 31B, or may be built into the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or provided at the base position of the operation lever. Multiple vibration motors 131 may be provided to diversify the vibration modes of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

In the pachinko game machine 1, an operation section performance including a light-emitting performance accompanied by a vibration performance can be executed as a suggestive performance that indicates that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the vibration performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration manner according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light-emitting performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Note that in the light-emitting performance included in the operation section performance, one of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. For example, only the push button 31B may be illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting only the button lamp 9B2.

Figure 12-2 (A) shows an example of the setting of the operation unit performance pattern used to execute the operation unit performance. In this setting example, operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance as a plurality of operation unit performance patterns. The light emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and use are set corresponding to each operation unit performance pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the light emission state when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in the light emission performance included in the operation unit performance. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the vibration state when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the rate at which the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and is controlled to the jackpot game state when the operation unit performance according to the operation unit performance pattern is executed. The uses corresponding to the operation unit performance patterns indicate the timing at which the operation unit performance is executed for each operation unit performance pattern.

The operation unit performance can be executed at multiple times in accordance with the progress of the variable display, such as when the pre-change starts, when the target change starts, when a reach is established, when the reach develops, and when a hit/miss notification tease is given. The pre-change starts at a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion by the operation unit performance. The target change starts at a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion by the operation unit performance. When a reach is established, it is a timing corresponding to the case where the variable display becomes a reach state. When a reach develops, it is a timing corresponding to the case where a development performance is executed in conjunction with the reach performance of a super reach. The development performance is a performance that notifies the execution of the reach performance of a super reach (reach development) after the reach performance of a normal reach is executed. When a hit/miss notification tease is given, it is a timing corresponding to the teasing performance before the hit/miss notification performance that notifies the execution of whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" while the reach performance of a super reach is being executed.

In the example setting shown in FIG. 12-2(A), multiple operation unit performance patterns that can be used to execute operation unit performances according to multiple timings are prepared in advance. Also, it is set up so that different operation unit performance patterns can be used according to multiple timings at which the operation unit performances can be executed.

When the reach performance of the super reach is executed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when only the reach performance of the normal reach is executed and the reach performance of the super reach is not executed. Depending on whether the reach performance of the super reach is executed and the fixed decoration pattern of the jackpot combination is derived, it is possible to notify whether the game state is controlled to the jackpot. For the reach performance of the super reach, for example, a plurality of reach performances including the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach performance may include performances with different performance modes. Each reach performance may include performances with a common performance mode. The determination ratio when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the determination ratio when the variable display result is not a "jackpot" may be set so that the reliability of the jackpot is according to each reach performance. It is only necessary to set the presence or absence of the reach performance, the presence or absence of the reach performance of the super reach, the performance mode in the reach performance, etc. according to the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table using the random number value for determining the variation pattern.

Regardless of the specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as reach effects, the execution of the operation unit effects can be determined at a predetermined rate according to whether the variable display result is a "jackpot". Such operation unit effects that can be executed regardless of specific effects are also called standalone operation unit effects. In contrast, effects that cause the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light or vibrate in association with specific effects may be executed. Effects that cause light emission or vibration in association with such specific effects are also called specific linked effects.

Figure 12-2 (B) shows a setting example when a specific interlocking performance is executed. In this setting example, the light emission color and vibration pattern are set when a specific interlocking performance is executed in conjunction with multiple specific performances, such as the movable body operation, image display, music playback, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The light emission color in the specific interlocking performance is set according to the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient if the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated as part of the specific performance. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking performance is set according to the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient if the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as part of the specific performance. In this way, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as part of the specific performance, the jackpot reliability is common to the specific performance, and a unique jackpot reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the specific interlocking performance is included in the special vibration performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance. The illumination of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during a specific linked performance is included in the specific illumination performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance.

The reach effect of SP Reach A may have a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. The jackpot type selection CH1 may have a selection effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the smallest (e.g., 4 rounds). The jackpot type selection CH2 may have a selection effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is the second jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the largest (e.g., 16 rounds). The jackpot type selection CH1 and CH2 may be selection effects related to the type of jackpot depending on the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the end of the jackpot game state, or the end condition, or may be selection effects related to the presence or absence or amount of rank-up, which is an increase in the number of rounds from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state, in the jackpot game state. As the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2, when the jackpot game state can be controlled to a certain probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game state based on the game ball that entered the V entry port of the V entry attacker, a lottery performance may be executed for a jackpot game state with a different degree of advantage depending on whether or not the V entry attacker is open, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the end conditions of the certain probability variable control. When the small win game state can be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the occurrence of a V entry due to a game ball entering the V entry attacker, a lottery performance may be executed for a small win game state or a jackpot game state with a different degree of advantage depending on whether or not the V entry attacker is open, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the number of rounds of the jackpot game state controlled after the occurrence of a V entry.

Until the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released is started, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state, and then, during the period from the start of the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released to the occurrence of a V winning due to the game ball entering the V winning attacker, the state is controlled to the strong vibration monitoring state, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled not to vibrate. Then, when a V winning occurs, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state, and a performance including the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is easily detected, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is more difficult to detect than the strong vibration monitoring state. In a period in which there is a high risk of cheating by a player generating vibration, the state is controlled to the strong vibration monitoring state. In contrast, in a period in which there is a low risk of cheating by a player generating vibration, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state. When a vibration error is detected, it is sufficient that the performance control CPU 120 can execute control to notify the occurrence of an abnormality, such as displaying an alarm image, outputting an alarm sound, turning on an alarm lamp, outputting an alarm signal, or a combination of some or all of these. When a vibration error is detected, the pachinko game machine 1 may be stopped from playing under the control of the CPU 103 in the game control microcomputer 100. This allows appropriate vibration monitoring and prevents a decrease in interest in the game from being caused by an inappropriate abnormality judgment that results in a vibration error being notified or a game being stopped.

Figure 12-3 shows the vibration pattern settings. A number of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration modes of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Figure 12-3 (A) shows the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects. Figure 12-3 (B) shows the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration effects included in the specific linked effects.

Vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which on and off periods alternate three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed when the pre-fluctuation starts. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the pre-fluctuation start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC01, the light color of the light effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes white.

In vibration pattern AKV02, the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed when the pre-change starts. In addition, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC11 that can be executed when the target change starts. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the pre-change start or the target change start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC02, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect becomes red. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC03, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect becomes rainbow. In the operation unit presentation using operation unit presentation pattern AKC11, the color of the light emitted by the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is white in response to the vibration presentation.

In vibration pattern AKV03, the vibration mode has an on period that continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit effects by operation unit effects patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed when the target fluctuation starts. On the other hand, the operation unit effects by vibration pattern AKV03 are not included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at a timing different from the target fluctuation start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC12, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect is red. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC13, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect is rainbow.

In vibration pattern AKV11, the vibration mode during the on period matches the effect AKR1 when a reach is achieved. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is achieved. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC21, the light color in the light-emitting effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In vibration pattern AKV12, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the effect AKR2 when a reach is achieved. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is achieved. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC22, the light color in the light-emitting effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes orange.

In addition, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when a reach is reached, an effect using a common vibration pattern may be executed with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is reached. For example, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is reached. Also, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is reached. In these cases, there will be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach is reached and the operation unit effect executed when the pre-change starts or the target change starts. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common, so that an increase in the control burden and control data of the effect can be prevented.

In vibration pattern AKV21, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the performance AKS1 when a reach develops. The vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed when a reach develops. On the other hand, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach develops. In the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31, the light color in the light-emitting performance that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration performance becomes white.

In vibration pattern AKV22, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the effect AKS2 when a reach develops. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed when a reach develops. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach develops. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC32, the light color in the light effect that illuminates the stick controller 31A and push button 31B in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes white.

In addition, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach develops, an effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time of the reach development. For example, a vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect with operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed when the reach develops. Also, a vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV03 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect with operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed when the reach develops. In these cases, there will be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach develops and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-change or the start of the target change. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common, so that the control burden of the effect and the increase in control data can be prevented.

In vibration pattern AKV31, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the on-period may continue until the player's action on the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed when inviting the winner or loser. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the win/lose notification effect. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC41, the light color of the light-emitting effect that causes the stick controller 31A and push button 31B to light up in conjunction with the vibration effect is gold.

In addition, when a vibration effect is performed by the vibration pattern AKV31, whether or not to provide an effective detection period may be varied depending on the type of effect performed with the variable display, such as the type of reach effect. When the effective detection period is provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have an operation suggestion light-emitting mode that switches between gold light emission (on) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. In addition, when the effective detection period is not provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have a light-emitting mode for vibration effect that continuously emits gold light over the period in which the operation lever and push button 31B are vibrated. On the other hand, when the effective detection period is provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have an operation suggestion light-emitting mode that switches between red light emission (on) different from gold and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. By executing a light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting mode is switched between light-emitting and non-light-emitting every 150 milliseconds, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation of the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is valid while executing the vibration effect. Alternatively, the priority of the light-emitting control may be made different by using a plurality of lamp layers in which lamp control data can be set. For example, in the first lamp layer, lamp control data is set as a light-emitting mode for suggesting a normal operation, in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between red light-emitting (on) and non-light-emitting (off) every 150 milliseconds. In the second lamp layer, lamp control data is set as a light-emitting mode for suggesting a special operation, in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is continuously lighted in gold for an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds. Then, the light-emitting control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is executed with priority over the light-emitting control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. This allows the light emission pattern for suggesting a special operation to be prioritized over the light emission pattern for suggesting a normal operation as the light emission pattern for the light emission effect.

The multiple reach effects that become super reaches may include a strong SP reach with a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach with a relatively low jackpot reliability. In the reach effect of a strong SP reach, a hit/miss notification effect is executed after a motion detection effect is executed by detecting the player's motion to operate the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of a strong SP reach is executed, it is sufficient that the vibration mode continues for an on period until the player's motion to operate the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. In the reach effect of a weak SP reach, a hit/miss notification effect is executed without executing a motion detection effect. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of a weak SP reach is executed, it is sufficient that the vibration mode by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed 1500 milliseconds or more before the hit/miss notification effect. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the valid detection period. Alternatively, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that switches between an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated every 150 milliseconds and an off period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B is not vibrated during the valid detection period. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds. The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a strong SP reach is executed and the operation performance when the reach performance of a weak SP reach is executed. For example, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a strong SP reach is executed may be controlled to be a light emission mode in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between gold light emission (on) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds during the valid detection period. In contrast, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a weak SP reach is executed may be controlled to be a light emission mode in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds to emit gold light.

Vibration pattern AKV41 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV42 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to the screen display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV43 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV44 provides a vibration pattern in which the on-period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

Vibration by vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific linked performance executed together with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the specific light-emitting performance becomes blue along with the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Vibration by vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific linked performance executed together with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the specific light-emitting performance becomes gold along with the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Vibration by vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the special linked performance that is executed in conjunction with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the special light-emitting performance changes from blue to red to gold in response to the vibration of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

The vibrations caused by vibration pattern AKV44 may be special vibration effects included in specific linked effects executed together with a jackpot confirmation notification, or may be special vibration effects included in specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH1, CH2. In specific linked effects executed together with a jackpot confirmation notification, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes rainbow colors as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. In specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH1, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes white as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. In specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH2, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes rainbow colors as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate.

Figure 12-4 shows an example of an effect that is executed by vibrating and illuminating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Here, multiple effect execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Note that the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B only need to emit light with a normal light emission brightness set to a low light emission color so that the light emission color is white in the normal light emission state. Alternatively, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-illumination so that they do not emit light in the normal light emission state.

In the performance execution example AKA01, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in white. When an operation unit performance is executed using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the light color becomes white. The operation unit performance pattern AKC01 can be used when executing an operation unit performance at the start of a pre-variation. The operation unit performance pattern AKC11 can be used when executing an operation unit performance at the start of a target variation. Both operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performances using the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 all have a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC11 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC32 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV22. The light color also becomes white when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as a specific performance.

In the example of effect execution, AKA02, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in red. When an operation unit effect is executed using either operation unit effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the light color becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern AKC02 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a preliminary change. Operation unit effect pattern AKC12 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a target change. Both operation unit effects using operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 have a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect using operation unit pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03. When playing music for SP Reach A as a specific effect, a performance period in which the light color becomes red is also included.

In the example of effect execution, AKA03, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in rainbow colors. When an operation unit effect is executed using either the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 or AKC13, the light-emitting color becomes rainbow. The operation unit effect pattern AKC03 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a preliminary change. The operation unit effect pattern AKC13 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a target change. The operation unit effects using the operation unit effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 both have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect using the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect using the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV03. The light-emitting color also becomes rainbow when a specific effect such as a jackpot confirmation notification or a jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed.

In the performance execution example AKA04, a light emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in pink. When an operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 is executed, the light color becomes pink. Operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 includes a vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV11.

In the performance execution example AKA05, a light emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in orange. When an operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 is executed, the light color becomes orange. Operation unit performance pattern AKC22 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 includes a vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV12.

In performance execution example AKV06, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated blue. When an operation section performance is executed, the light color does not turn blue. When the movable body operation of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, the light color turns blue. Also, when music playback of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, a performance period in which the light color turns blue is included.

In the performance execution example AKV07, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in gold. When an operation section performance is executed by operation section performance pattern AKC41, the light emission color becomes gold. Operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be used when executing an operation section performance during a hit/miss notification. The operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC41 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV31. When an image display of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, the light emission color becomes gold. Also, when a music playback of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, a performance period in which the light emission color becomes gold is included.

In this way, the light emission colors of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or common depending on the execution timing of the operation unit performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance. In addition to the light emission color, any light emission mode, such as the light emission time, the number of times light is emitted (the number of times it flashes), the light emission cycle (the flashing cycle), and the light emission brightness, may be different or common depending on the execution timing of the operation unit performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance.

When the operation section performance is executed at the start of the advance variation, it can be executed as a pre-reading notice performance or a continuous notice performance. The pre-reading notice performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion. The continuous notice performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" continuously over multiple variable displays that are executed before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion. The continuous notice performance can be executed using a continuous performance pattern for each reserved memory number. The reserved memory number here may be the number of reserved special figures at the time of the start winning. As the continuous performance pattern for each reserved memory number, multiple continuous performance patterns are prepared in advance according to the performance mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of reserved special figures at the time of the start winning, and is subtracted by one each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

Figure 12-5 shows an example of the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance. The continuous performance pattern can be determined, for example, by using a random number value for determining the continuous performance pattern, referring to a continuous performance pattern determination table corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and determining the determination result to which a determination value matching the random number value is assigned according to the result of the winning determination.

Figure 12-5 (A) shows the continuous performance patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "2". In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD01, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC11 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD02, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC12 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD03, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC12 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD04, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD05, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD06, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-5 (B) shows the consecutive performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "3". In the consecutive preview performance using the consecutive performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-5 (C) shows the consecutive performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "4". In the consecutive preview performance using the consecutive performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any of "1" to "3", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-6 is a flow chart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S161 of Figure 9 as a pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in Figure 12-6, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that enables the execution of a pre-reading notice performance that becomes a continuous notice performance. In step AKS101, it is judged whether or not the performance control command transmitted at the time of the start winning (starting port winning designation command, pending memory number notification command, winning time judgment result command) has been received. If no command is received, it is judged that the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied. If a command is received, the notification content according to the received command is identified, and for example, the winning time judgment result is identified as the notification content according to the winning time judgment result command.

The winning judgment result may be a result of judging whether the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether the variation pattern is determined to be a specific variation pattern by the start winning judgment process executed in step S101 of the special pattern process process using the game random number extracted at the start winning. The winning judgment result may be, for example, any of the following: jackpot, super reach confirmation on miss, reach confirmation on miss, and general on miss. The winning judgment result of a jackpot is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot judgment range and is controlled to the jackpot game state. The winning judgment result of a super reach confirmation on miss is a judgment result included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the variation pattern is within the super reach confirmation range on miss, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the variation pattern is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game state is not controlled to the jackpot game state. The winning judgment result for a reach confirmation on a miss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range on a miss. The winning judgment result for a general win on a miss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range on a miss nor within the reach confirmation range.

The pre-reading prediction condition may be established when the winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss. Also, the pre-reading prediction condition may be established when the current winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss, and all previous winning judgment results corresponding to the reserved memory have been general on a miss. Note that if the pre-reading prediction performance that will result in a consecutive prediction performance is already set to start, the pre-reading prediction condition may be restricted from being established.

If the pre-reading prediction condition is not met (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading prediction setting process is terminated. If the pre-reading prediction condition is met (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction (step AKS102). For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction may be extracted, and depending on the result of the winning judgment, a pre-reading prediction execution decision table stored in advance in ROM121 may be referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction, thereby determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction performance. In step AKS102, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction performance, either "no execution" when the pre-reading prediction performance is not executed, or "execution" when the pre-reading prediction performance is executed. It is determined whether or not the result of the decision at this time has been determined to be "execution" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is not to be executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading preview setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of reserved memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Next, the consecutive performance pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the consecutive performance pattern may be extracted, and the consecutive performance pattern may be determined to be one of a number of patterns by referring to a consecutive performance pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 according to the result of the winning judgment.

After the continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105, a pre-reading preview setting is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading preview setting process is terminated. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-reading preview flag provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as the performance control flag setting section) may be set to the ON state.

In such a pre-reading notice setting process, if the winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss, the pre-reading notice condition in step AKS101 can be established, and it becomes possible to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice in step AKS102 and the continuous performance pattern in step AKS105. If the winning judgment result is a jackpot, step AKS102 may determine "execution yes" to execute the pre-reading notice performance at a higher rate than when the winning judgment result is a confirmed super reach on a miss. Also, in step AKS105, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, the continuous performance pattern may be determined at a different rate than when the winning judgment result is a confirmed super reach on a miss. In this way, it is sufficient that the continuous notice performance that becomes the pre-reading notice performance can be executed based on the winning judgment result that becomes the pre-reading judgment result.

Figure 12-7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S171 of Figure 9 as a variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 12-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern, etc., which will be the final decorative pattern as the variable display result of the decorative pattern (step AKS201). The performance control CPU 120 may determine the final stop pattern based on the variable display content, such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. The variable pattern designation command and the display result notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by setting the transmission of the command at the start of the special pattern's variation when the variable pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special pattern process process. The variable pattern designation command is a performance control command that designates the variable pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is a performance control command that designates the variable display result determined using a random number value for determining the special pattern display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display results may be "non-reach (miss)", "reach (miss)", "non-probability change (jackpot)", and "probability change (jackpot)".

When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss." When the variable display content is "reach (miss)," the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the reach miss combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss." When the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot," and the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes a time-saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot," and the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes a probability change state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns with the same even numbered patterns is determined as the final stop pattern. Also, when the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," it is sufficient to be able to determine a combination of fixed decorative patterns with the same odd numbered patterns as the final stop pattern. When the variable display content is "reach (miss)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns that will be a reach-miss combination is determined as the final stop pattern. When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns that will be a non-reach-miss combination is determined as the final stop pattern. When determining a combination of fixed decorative patterns, for example, numerical data that will be a random number value for pattern determination is extracted, and the stopping pattern of the decorative patterns can be determined by referring to a pattern determination table that is stored in advance in ROM121 according to the variable display content.

After the final stop pattern and the like are determined, the operation section presentation is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed. For example, if the pre-reading preview flag is on, it may be determined that a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed. If a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed, the remaining number of times is subtracted by 1, and the operation section presentation pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the consecutive presentation pattern. The consecutive presentation pattern may be the one determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading preview setting process, and may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the pre-reading preview flag may be cleared to the off state.

In step AKS202, when it is determined that the pre-reading notice performance is not being performed, the presence or absence of the operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display and the operation unit performance pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation unit performance may be extracted, and depending on whether the variable display result is a "jackpot", the presence or absence of the operation unit performance, i.e., whether or not to execute the operation unit performance, and the operation unit performance pattern to be used when executing the operation unit performance may be determined by referring to an operation unit performance determination table previously stored in RAM121. The operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display may be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice performance is not being performed, and may not be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice performance is being performed. Therefore, a limit is set for the operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operation unit performance included in the pre-reading notice performance is executed.

In step AKS202, when a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance is executed in conjunction with a specific performance based on a fluctuation pattern, the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted. For example, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit performance at any timing. In this case, a limiting restriction is set so that all operation unit performances cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display in the range of the variable display in which the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. Alternatively, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation unit performance at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of the target fluctuation or the establishment of the reach, while the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit performance at the timing corresponding to the development of the reach or the announcement of the hit or miss. In this case, a limiting restriction is set so that some operation unit performances cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display in the range of the variable display in which the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. In addition, within the range of the variable display in which a specific effect is executed, a limit may be set so that some or all of the operation unit effects are difficult to execute while the variable display is being executed. In this way, the effect control CPU 120, which determines the operation unit effects in step AKS202, can limit the execution of the operation unit effects, including the vibration effect, when a special vibration effect is executed.

When the operation unit performance is determined by step AKS202, if a special performance different from the specific performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the result of the judgment at the time of winning, the determination ratio of the operation unit performance may be set so that some or all of the operation unit performance is more likely to be executed during the execution of the variable display than when the special performance is not executed.

After the operation section performance is determined, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of the multiple patterns prepared in advance (step AKS203). For example, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of the multiple prepared performance control patterns (variable display performance control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as the usage pattern. The performance control CPU 120 may also select one of the multiple prepared performance control patterns (operation section performance control patterns) in response to the operation section performance determined in step AKS202, and set it as the usage pattern. In addition, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the performance control timer setting section) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, the decorative pattern or the like is started to vary on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, a display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (variable display performance control pattern) determined in step AKS203 can be transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123, thereby starting the variation of the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After the variable start setting has been made, settings are made to update the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display and the like, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", which corresponds to the performance processing during the variable display (step AKS207), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Figure 12-8 shows an example of the configuration of a performance control pattern. The performance control pattern includes a variable display performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (A) and an operation unit performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (B). The variable display performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (A) includes control data used to control the execution of various performances from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. The operation unit performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (B) includes control data used to control the execution of the operation unit performance.

The variable display performance control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, a performance control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, and end code. The performance control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the performance control process timer value, which is the stored value of the performance control process timer, and a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (performance time) of each performance operation is set in advance. Note that, instead of the performance control process timer judgment value, data indicating the timing of switching the performance control, etc., may be set in response to a specified control content or processing content, such as, for example, a specified performance control command being received from the main board 11, or a specified process being executed as a process for controlling a performance operation in the performance control CPU 120.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variable mode of each decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating the audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects etc. linked to the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the audio control data is data that specifies the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes data indicating the light emission drive mode of light-emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the lamp control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode of light-emitting bodies during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes data indicating the performance operation mode corresponding to the detection of the player's action, such as the effective detection period during which the player's action, such as tilting the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, pointing to the trigger button, or pressing the push button 31B, is effectively detected, and data specifying the control content of the performance operation when each action is effectively detected. The vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes data indicating, for example, the on period and drive mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all performance control patterns, and there may be performance control patterns that include some of the control data depending on the content of the performance action by each performance control pattern. Furthermore, for multiple types of process data included in a performance control pattern, the type of control data that makes up each process data may differ depending on the content of the performance action executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data that includes all of the display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, and there may be process data that includes some of these. Furthermore, various other control data may be included, such as movable body control data that indicates the operating state of the movable body 32.

In the variable display performance processing in step S172 of the performance control process processing, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, a determination is made as to whether it matches any of the performance control process timer judgment values, and if it does match, control of the performance operation is performed according to the various corresponding control data. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 proceeds with the control of the performance devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, light-emitting elements such as game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, vibration motor 131, movable body 32, etc.) according to the contents of process data #1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the performance control pattern. In addition, in each process data #1 to #n, the display control data #1 to #n, audio control data #1 to #n, lamp control data #1 to #n, operation detection control data #1 to #n, and vibration control data #1 to #n correspond to the performance control process timer judgment values #1 to #n, and constitute the performance control execution data #1 to #n that indicate the control content of the performance operation in the performance device and specify the execution of performance control.

The operation unit performance control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, a performance control process timer judgment value, lamp control data, and vibration control data. The lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light-emitting body in the operation unit performance, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In other words, the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are illuminated in the light emission performance included in the operation unit performance. The vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern includes data that indicates the on period and drive mode of the vibration generating device in the operation unit performance, such as the drive of the vibration motor 131. In other words, the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are vibrated in the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance.

Figure 12-9 shows an example of the timing settings for the operation section performance in vibration performance execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 are timings for which the operation section performance can be executed at the start of pre-change, corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the pre-change. For example, if a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process, the operation section performance can be executed at some or all of timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-change, depending on the remaining number of times. For example, if the remaining number of times is "3", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT01, if the remaining number of times is "2", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT02, and if the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 12-9 corresponds to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target change, and is the timing at which the operation unit performance can be executed at the start of the target change. For example, if a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process, at some or all of timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the advance change, the operation unit performance can be executed using the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times, and then at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the operation unit performance can be executed using the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times being "0". Also, at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the operation unit performance may be executed. Specifically, if one of the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation unit performance can be executed using the determined operation unit performance pattern at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change.

The timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as timing AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, may be such that the operation unit performance can be executed at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the operation unit performance can be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this way, the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in Figure 12-9 are timings at which the operation unit presentation when a reach is established, when a reach develops, and when a hit/miss notification is triggered can be executed as operation unit presentations corresponding to the current variable display. For example, depending on the operation unit presentation pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, there are cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach develops, and cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT14 when a hit/miss notification is triggered. Specifically, if either operation unit presentation pattern AKC21 or AKC22 is determined in step AKS202, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established. Also, if step AKS202 determines that either operation unit presentation pattern AKC31 or AKC32 is selected, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT13, which is the time when the reach develops. Alternatively, if step ASK202 determines that operation unit presentation pattern AKC41 is selected, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT14, which is the time when the win/loss notification is triggered.

Figure 12-10 shows an example of control of the operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC01. The operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the light color shown in Figure 12-10 (A) becomes white, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in Figure 12-10 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds, as shown in Figure 12-10 (B). The light emission performance associated with this vibration performance is performed by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance, as shown in Figure 12-10 (A). During the off period of the vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off. In the light emission effect, the light color becomes white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration effect, and the white light emission luminance may change periodically, for example, by alternating between a first luminance with a high white light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low white light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds during the on-period of 300 milliseconds.

Figure 12-11 shows an example of control of the operation unit performance by operation unit performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC02 includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes red as shown in Figure 12-11 (A) and a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 as shown in Figure 12-11 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 when the pre-variation starts. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC03 includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes rainbow as shown in Figure 12-11 (A) and a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 as shown in Figure 12-11 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 when the pre-variation starts. The vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds as shown in Figure 12-11 (B). As shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that, in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC02, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit red light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect, and in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow light. For example, the multiple LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow colors by transitioning between red, red-purple, blue-purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange light colors according to the elapsed time and the light emission position. The light emission positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be specified as multiple sections, such as the top and bottom of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2, and it is sufficient that the light emission time, light emission color, and light emission brightness may be partially or entirely set according to each section.

Figure 12-12 shows an example of control of the operation part performance by the operation part performance pattern AKC11. The operation part performance by the operation part performance pattern AKC11 includes a light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting color shown in Figure 12-12 (A) becomes white, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in Figure 12-12 (B), and can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on-period of 1500 milliseconds continues, as shown in Figure 12-12 (B). In the light-emitting performance associated with this vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration performance, as shown in Figure 12-12 (A). In the light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting color becomes white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration performance, the white light-emitting brightness may change periodically, for example, by alternating between a first brightness with a high white light-emitting brightness and a second brightness with a low light-emitting brightness every 30 milliseconds during the on-period of 1500 milliseconds.

Figure 12-13 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC12 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color becomes red as shown in Figure 12-13 (A) and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 as shown in Figure 12-13 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC13 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color becomes rainbow as shown in Figure 12-13 (A) and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 as shown in Figure 12-13 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds as shown in Figure 12-13 (B). As shown in FIG. 12-13(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that, in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC12, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit red light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect, and in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow light. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may periodically change the light emission brightness of red light by alternately repeating a first brightness with a high light emission brightness of red light and a second brightness with a low light emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the vibration effect. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 has a light emission mode that changes the light emission brightness in a shorter period than the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC11. In this way, the light emission performance may be performed in a different light emission period as well as a different light emission color, so that the reliability of a jackpot can be suggested. During the on period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently, for example, by alternating between red light emission and non-emission every 20 milliseconds. As a presentation mode of the light-emitting effect, the light emission cycle may be common, but the light emission color may be different to indicate the reliability of a jackpot. In this way, for example, when the light-emitting colors in the light-emitting effects are different, the light-emitting cycle may be common to reduce the control burden of the light-emitting effects.

Figure 12-14 shows an example of control of the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC21. The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be executed in response to the performance AKR1 shown in Figure 12-14 (A) which is the performance when the reach is established at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and includes a light emission performance in which the light color shown in Figure 12-14 (B) becomes pink, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in Figure 12-14 (C). The performance AKR1 which is the performance when the reach is established may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image showing a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or may be a performance that displays a background image according to the reach establishment, or may be any other performance associated with the establishment of the reach. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated multiple times every predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds) as shown in Figure 12-14 (C). As shown in FIG. 12-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is achieved by the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 lighting up in pink in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the OFF period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off.

Figure 12-15 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by the operation unit presentation pattern AKC22. The operation unit presentation by the operation unit presentation pattern AKC22 can be executed in response to presentation AKR2, which is the presentation when a reach is established, shown in Figure 12-15 (A), at the timing AKT12 when a reach is established, and includes a light emission presentation in which the light color shown in Figure 12-15 (B) becomes orange, and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV12 shown in Figure 12-15 (C). Presentation AKR2, which is the presentation when a reach is established, may be, for example, a presentation that displays a presentation image showing a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or may be a presentation that displays a background image according to the establishment of a reach, or may be any other presentation associated with the establishment of a reach. Presentation AKR1 and presentation AKR2, which are the presentations when a reach is established, may have different presentation forms. As shown in FIG. 12-15(C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is a vibration mode including an on period of the first vibration on time (e.g., 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (e.g., 100 milliseconds) alternately repeated twice, followed by an on period of the second vibration on time (e.g., 250 milliseconds) and an on period of the third vibration on time (e.g., 500 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 12-15(B), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off. In addition, when the on period of the vibration effect is a different vibration on time, the light emission patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange continuously. In contrast, during the on periods of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently. During the on periods of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 alternate between emitting orange light and not emitting light every 20 milliseconds, thereby intermittently emitting orange light.

The operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops, corresponding to the performances AKS1 and AKS2 when the reach develops, and include a light emission performance in which the light color becomes white, and a vibration performance by vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of operation unit performance pattern AKC31, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 becomes a vibration mode for the on period that matches the performance AKS1. In the case of operation unit performance pattern AKC32, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV22 becomes a vibration mode for the on period that matches the performance AKS2. In both cases of operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the light emission performance associated with these vibration performances is that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance.

The operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be executed in response to the win/lose prompting performance at the timing AKT14 when the win/lose notification is prompted, and includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes gold, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV31. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode with an on period of 1500 milliseconds or more. The light emission performance accompanying this vibration performance is performed by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 lighting up in gold in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance.

As shown in FIG. 12-12 and FIG. 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect includes the case where the light emission color becomes white and the case where the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, which are different from white. When the light emission color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03, which is different from vibration pattern AKV02, is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs when the light emission color becomes white and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that when the light emission color becomes red and when the light emission color becomes rainbow, a vibration effect using the common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both cases. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same when the light color is red and when the light color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, it is possible to provide a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color becomes white in association with the vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC11. The operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color becomes white in association with the vibration performance by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32. In this way, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts and the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops have a common light-emitting color of white, and the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, the light-emitting modes of the light-emitting modes of the light-emitting modes are common, while the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the interest in the game. In addition, the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting color becomes red or rainbow, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 or AKC13. As in this case, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts and the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops may have different light-emitting modes and different vibration modes. As in the case where the light-emitting color becomes white, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance that is common to the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. Also, as in the case where the light-emitting color becomes red or rainbow, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts may include a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance that is different from the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. The operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops does not have to include an illumination pattern of the illumination effect that is different from the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with the vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. All of these operation unit effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered include operation unit effects by operation unit effect pattern AKC41, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes gold in association with the vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV31. This operation unit effect has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered have a common jackpot reliability of 100%, and there are cases in which the vibration modes of the vibration effects are different. In addition, the light emission color and vibration pattern of the vibration effect are different between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the reliability of the big hit is the same, but the vibration pattern of the vibration effect or the light emission pattern of the light emission effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be increased.

Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, when the target fluctuation starts, include operation unit effects based on operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes white, red, or rainbow in association with vibration effects based on vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03. Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT12, when a reach is established, include operation unit effects based on operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with vibration effects based on vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. In this way, there are cases where the light-emitting patterns of the light-emitting patterns and the vibration patterns of the vibration effects differ between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT11, when the target fluctuation starts, and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12, when a reach is established. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section performance differs, the light emission mode of the light emission performance differs, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance differs, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, thereby increasing the interest in playing the game.

Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes white in association with vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In this way, there are cases where the light-emitting state of the light-emitting state differs between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed, and the vibration state of the vibration effect differs. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, the light emission state of the light emission performance or the vibration state of the vibration performance is different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include a light emission performance that executes a light emission performance with a white light emission color. Also, the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include a light emission performance that executes a light emission performance with a pink or orange light emission color. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, even if the light emission state of the light emission performance is the same, the vibration state of the vibration performance is different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT01 to AKT03 when the preliminary fluctuation starts, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, the jackpot reliability is 100% regardless of the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more regardless of the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered, the jackpot reliability is 100%. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation unit performance is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance and the timing when the vibration performance is executed. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect. Note that the vibration mode of the vibration effect can be varied by varying the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity caused by driving the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of strong and weak vibrations in vibration intensity, or any other vibration pattern that vibrates an operating member such as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B.

The multiple specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include the moving body operation, image display, music playback, or the jackpot confirmation notification, and the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The reach performance of SP Reach A has a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. Therefore, the vibration performance by the operation unit performance has a higher jackpot reliability than the reach performance of SP Reach A, and the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state when executed is higher. The moving body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A are all executed as part of the reach performance, so they do not have individual jackpot reliability. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification is a performance that definitely notifies that the variable display result is a "jackpot". The jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 are lottery performances of jackpot types according to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. The jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type selection CH1, CH2 differ from effects with a high jackpot reliability, such as the reach effect of SP Reach A, in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In this way, for a specific effect that has a high jackpot reliability among multiple specific effects, it is sufficient that the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when a vibration effect is executed by the operation unit performance than when the specific effect is executed. Also, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when a vibration effect is executed by the operation unit performance than when the vibration effect is not executed by the operation unit performance.

Figure 12-16 shows an example of the performance of effects achieved by illuminating the game effect lamps 9. The game effect lamps 9 include an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2. Here, multiple performance execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the mode of performance execution by illuminating the lights.

In performance execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in white to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in red by a light-emitting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using either of the operation unit performance patterns AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light-emitting effect in which the light color changes to red in conjunction with a vibration performance.

In the performance execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in red to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in rainbow colors due to the illumination effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using either of the operation unit performance patterns AKC03 or AKC13 includes an illumination effect in which the illumination color becomes rainbow in conjunction with the vibration effect.

In performance execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white display color from left to right, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated to change from black to white to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated white by a lighting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a lighting effect in which the light color changes to white in conjunction with a vibration performance.

In performance execution example AKF04, when the text display on the image display device 5 is blue, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in blue to match the text display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in white by a light-emitting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light-emitting effect in which the light color becomes white in conjunction with a vibration performance.

For example, a predetermined performance by displaying background display, text display, or any other performance image on the image display device 5 can be executed according to the progress of the game, including the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the performance processing during variable display executed in step S172 of the performance control process processing, the control data read from the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting processing is used to control the execution of a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, such as the variable display. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, and lamp control data for controlling the emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N. If an operation unit performance is executed during the execution of such a predetermined performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 can light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the light emission mode of the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance in the operation unit performance. In the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of the performance control process, the control data read from the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the execution of the operation unit performance. This control data includes lamp control data for controlling the emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data for controlling the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. In response to the emission performance associated with the vibration performance in such an operation unit performance, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a different light emission mode from the light emission performance of the operation unit performance associated with a predetermined performance. In this way, by making the emission modes different between the operation members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light-emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N, the performance by light emission can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved.

The predetermined performance may be executed by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N may be illuminated in a color that matches the audio output, such as background music, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in a color that matches the light-emitting performance in the operation unit performance. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound that is a message that gives the player an impression of red, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N may be illuminated in red that matches the audio output, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in white by the light-emitting performance in the operation unit performance. Even in this way, by making the light-emitting modes of the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A different from those of the other light-emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N different, the light-emitting effects can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. The predetermined effect may be to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and make the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. non-illuminated (turned off). When this predetermined effect is executed, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. By executing the operation unit effect during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased to the vibration effect that vibrates the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Figure 12-17 shows an example of the setting of the performance period in which a specific linked performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in association with the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The specific linked performance that can be executed in the period AKZ01 includes a specific light-emitting performance in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes blue in association with the special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed in association with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The specific linked performance that can be executed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light-emitting performance in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes gold in association with the special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects using vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed in conjunction with the playback of music in the reach effect of SP Reach A. The specific linked effects that can be executed in period AKZ03 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B changes from blue to red to gold in conjunction with the special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV43.

The period AKZ04 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific linked effects executable during period AKZ04 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B becomes rainbow-colored in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44. The jackpot confirmation notification may be any notification that allows the player to recognize a jackpot by stopping and displaying a confirmed decorative pattern that results in the display of a decorative pattern, displaying a performance image of a scene in which an ally character wins a battle with an enemy character in a reach presentation, outputting a jackpot confirmation notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R, turning on a jackpot confirmation notification lamp included in game effect lamp 9, or a combination of some or all of these.

In addition, following the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered, a specific link performance may be executed during the period AKZ04 associated with the jackpot confirmation notification. In this case, the specific link performance associated with the jackpot confirmation notification can be executed while the operation unit performance heightens the player's sense of expectation, thereby enhancing the impression of the performance and improving the interest in playing. When executing a specific link performance following such an operation unit performance, the vibration mode of the vibration performance or the special vibration performance may be different between the operation unit performance and the specific link performance, or the light emission mode of the light emission performance or the specific light emission performance may be different. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration performance and the special vibration performance. The light emission brightness may be different between the light emission performance and the specific light emission performance. By making the vibration mode and light emission mode different to give the performance a sharp contrast, the difference between the operation unit performance and the specific link performance can be easily recognized, the performance can be appropriately diversified, and the interest in playing can be improved.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. Specific linked effects that can be executed during the period AKZ05 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes white in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44 when jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed. Specific linked effects that can be executed during the period AKZ05 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes rainbow in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44 when jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed.

Figures 12-18 to 12-20 show cases where the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. Figure 12-18 shows performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when a movable body operation is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 12-19 shows performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when an image display is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 12-20 shows performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when a music is played in the reach performance of SP Reach A.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the reach mode and the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be a position at the lower front end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Next, when the reach performance of the SP reach A is started by the reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position, as in the performance execution example AKG01, and the movable body operation is performed. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by linear movement or parallel movement upward from the initial position, and a performance image showing a message such as "SP reach A" is displayed at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window part provided inside the movable body 32. After that, as the position change of the movable body 32 continues, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the performance execution example AKG02. At this time, a performance image showing a message such as "This change is ..." is displayed at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window part of the movable body 32.

As the position of the movable body 32 is changed, as in the performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed, causing the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with vibration. The specific interlocking performance executed along with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17. Furthermore, when the position of the movable body 32 continues to be changed and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front upper end of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the performance execution example AKG03, the specific interlocking performance during the period AKZ01 ends. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front upper end of the display screen, which is the initial position, is 2500 milliseconds, and the special vibration performance may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate continuously over this period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that switches between an on period in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrates every 250 milliseconds and an off period in which no vibration occurs. Also, a specific light-emitting effect may be executed in a light-emitting mode that continuously lights up the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in blue over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light-emitting effect may be executed in a light-emitting mode that switches between blue light (on) and no light (off) every 250 milliseconds.

When the movable body operation is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A such as performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light in a light pattern in which the light color and light brightness gradually change from bottom to top as the position of the movable body 32 is changed. For example, when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light in a blue light color and with a light brightness that changes in a wave shape depending on the height and time.

After the movable body operation is completed as in performance execution example AKG03, a performance image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in performance execution example AKG11, as an image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. At this time, for example, text display showing the message "Super Hot" is displayed in a gold display color. Also, as in performance execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added around the text display.

In conjunction with the display of the performance image, which is an image display such as the performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, a specific interlocking performance is executed, causing the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with vibration. The specific interlocking performance executed in conjunction with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV42 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color becomes gold during the period AKZ02 shown in FIG. 12-17. When the display of the text indicating the message ends and the display of the performance image in the reach performance different from the text display begins, as in the performance execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking performance in the period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the text display indicating the message "Super Hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the special vibration performance may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate continuously over this period AKZ02. Also, during period AKZ02, a specific light-emitting effect may be performed with the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B alternately repeating a first luminance with a high gold light emission brightness and a second luminance with a low light emission brightness every 10 milliseconds.

When image display is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A such as performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light of gold, for example, to match the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5 and the emission color of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. For example, with the display of a performance image resulting in an image display such as performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light of gold, and when the display of a performance image such as performance execution example AKG13 begins, they may emit light of a color different from gold.

After the display of a performance image as in performance execution example AKG13 has begun, the sound of music phrase PH01 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A as in performance execution example AKG21. Next, the sound of music phrase PH02 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as in performance execution example AKG22. After that, the sound of music phrase PH03 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as in performance execution example AKG23. In this way, by outputting the sounds of multiple music phrases PH01 to PH03 in sequence as the performance progresses, it is possible to execute the overall music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A.

In conjunction with the output of sound that results in music playback as in performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific linked performance is executed, causing the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to vibrate and emit light. The specific linked performance executed in conjunction with music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV43 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color changes from blue to red and then from red to gold during the period AKZ03 shown in FIG. 12-17. In performance execution example AKG21, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes blue in response to the sound output of music phrase PH01. In performance execution example AKG22, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes red in response to the sound output of music phrase PH02. In performance execution example AKG23, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes gold in response to the sound output of music phrase PH03. In this way, it is possible to execute a specific light-emitting effect in which the light color changes to multiple colors as the sounds of multiple music phrases PH01 to PH03 are output in sequence as the effect progresses.

Figure 12-21 shows a music playback execution example AKH01 in which the scales change in sequence as the performance progresses. In this case, for example, as shown in Figure 12-21 (A), during a period AKZ03 in which a specific linked performance can be executed in conjunction with music playback, sounds corresponding to the scales of Do, Re, Mi, Fa, So, La, Si, and Do are output by speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of Do output last needs to be one octave higher than the scale of Do output first.

Such a specific linked performance associated with music playback includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color changes as shown in FIG. 12-21(B) and a vibration performance in which the special vibration performance is based on the vibration pattern shown in FIG. 12-21(C), and can be executed during a period AKZ03 corresponding to music playback. The vibration performance shown in FIG. 12-21(C) is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated multiple times in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. In the specific light-emitting performance associated with this special vibration performance, the light-emitting color of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 changes in sequence between blue, red, and gold in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the on period of the special vibration performance, as shown in FIG. 12-21(B). During the stop period of the sound output and the off period of the special vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may not emit light and may be turned off. Note that during the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale, the light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting performance may be different for each scale. For example, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously illuminated in blue over a period corresponding to the scale of C that is first output. Next, during a period corresponding to the scale of D, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in an illumination mode that alternates between a first luminance with a high red illumination luminance and a second luminance with a low red illumination luminance. After that, during a period corresponding to the scale of E, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in an illumination mode that alternates between gold illumination (lit) and non-illumination (unlit). In this way, by providing illumination modes with different amounts of illumination for each illumination color corresponding to each scale, the presentation can be appropriately diversified and interest in the game can be increased.

The reach performance of SP Reach A is controlled to be executable by using the control data read from the variable display performance control pattern in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. The variable display performance control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) is set to be able to execute a specific linked performance in association with a specific performance such as the movable body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A by the lamp control data and vibration control data. In the specific linked performance, a special vibration performance can be executed by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration performance by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration performance by the vibration pattern in the operation unit performance. In this way, the vibration mode is different between the vibration performance in the operation unit performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance and the special vibration performance in the specific linked performance that can be executed in association with the execution of the specific performance, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When an operation section performance is executed, a vibration performance that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is accompanied by a light emission performance that uses the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 to light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a specific linked performance is executed, a specific light emission performance that uses the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 to light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is executed in conjunction with a special vibration performance that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. By executing a performance that includes vibration and light emission of the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, for example, a player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5 will recognize the vibration and light emission of the operation members that are different from the image display, and the unexpectedness of the performance will be enhanced.

During the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17, a specific linked effect including a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in conjunction with the movement of movable body 32, which is the movable object movement in the reach effect of SP Reach A. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect during the movement period of movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

During the period AKZ04 shown in FIG. 12-17, in response to a confirmed jackpot notification, a specific linked effect including a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to a notification that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific linkage effects include specific light emission effects in which the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 light up in association with a special vibration effect produced by one of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects in the operation unit effects and the specific light emission effects accompanying the special vibration effects in the specific linkage effects differ in terms of light emission patterns, such as light color. In this way, by making the light emission patterns different depending on the operation unit effects and the specific linkage effects, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white, and when the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in Figures 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white, and when the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-variation, and the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, are executed at different times and have different vibration patterns. In addition, the light emission color of the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT01, which is the start of the pre-variation, and the light emission color of the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, are white, red, or rainbow, so that the light emission patterns of the light emission patterns are the same. In this way, by providing cases where the vibration patterns of the vibration effects are different when the timing of executing the operation unit effects is different, while the light emission patterns of the light emission effects are the same, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increase the interest in the game.

The vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-variation, are executed in a variable display prior to the variable display in which the operation unit effects are executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, based on the winning time judgment result, which is the pre-reading judgment result. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation unit effects are executed, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 12-10 and FIG. 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start of the pre-variation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white. When the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between when the light emission color is white and when the light emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effects is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby appropriately diversifying the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increasing the interest in the game. Note that when the light emission color is red and when the light emission color is rainbow, a vibration effect using the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same when the light color is red and when the light color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, it is possible to provide a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous performance patterns used to execute the continuous preview performance include operation unit performance patterns in which the light emission color of the light emission performance differs depending on whether the remaining number is other than "0" or "0". For example, the continuous performance pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) includes an operation unit performance pattern AKC01 when the remaining number is "1" and an operation unit performance pattern AKC12 when the remaining number is "0". The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the light emission color becomes white. The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the light emission color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission mode is different between the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance of the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance of the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. In this way, by providing different lighting conditions for the lighting effects when the timing for executing the operation section effects differs, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous notice performance, the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is set to prevent the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large from being lower than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. For example, in the continuous performance pattern shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), if the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 is set when the remaining number of times is "1", it is set to prevent the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 from becoming the operation unit performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". If the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 is set when the remaining number of times is "1", it is set to prevent the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 or the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 from becoming the operation unit performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". This prevents the operation unit performance with a low jackpot reliability from being executed later at the start of the target fluctuation, etc., even though the operation unit performance with a high jackpot reliability was executed first at the start of the pre-variation, so that the player's expectations are not lowered and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-fluctuation, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow colors different from white, and when the light emission color is white, light emission and non-emission are repeated in accordance with the on and off periods of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01, and when the light emission color is red, light is emitted continuously in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIG. 12-12 and FIG. 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow colors different from white. When the light emission color is white, light is emitted in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02, and when the light emission color is red, light is emitted intermittently in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV03. Since the on period settings are different for the vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, the light emission patterns, such as the light emission period of the light emission effects, are different. Even in this way, it is sufficient to provide cases where the light emission patterns of the light emission effects are different when the timing of executing the operation unit effects is different.

(Modifications of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation unit performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regarding the specific linked performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The timing of execution of the operation unit performance, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1. The timing of execution of the specific linked performance, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, the timing of execution of the operation unit performance, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous degree related to the game in the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to such advantageous degree. The timing of execution of the specific linked performance, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous degree related to the game in the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to such advantageous degree.

The combinations of each case, such as when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different and when it is common, when the vibration mode of the vibration performance is different and when it is common, when the light emission mode of the light emission performance is different and when it is common, when the jackpot reliability is different and when it is common, etc., can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. The combinations of each case, such as when the timing of execution is different and when it is common between the operation unit performance and the specific linked performance, when the vibration mode of the vibration performance and the special vibration performance is different and when it is common, when the light emission mode of the light emission performance and the specific light emission performance is different and when it is common, can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, when the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emission performance by making the light emission mode of the light emission performance common. When the light emission modes of the light emission performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration performance by making the vibration mode of the vibration performance common. When some vibration modes in the vibration performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration performance by making other vibration modes in the vibration performance common. For example, if the vibration intensities in the vibration effects are different, the control burden of the vibration effects can be reduced by standardizing the vibration cycles in the vibration effects. If some of the light emission patterns in the light emission effects are different, the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by standardizing other light emission patterns in the light emission effects. For example, if the light emission colors in the light emission effects are different, the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by standardizing the light emission cycles in the light emission effects. The control burden can also be reduced by similar standardization for the vibration patterns of special vibration effects and the light emission patterns of specific light emission effects.

In addition to or instead of during execution of the variable display, when the game is controlled to any game state such as a small win game state or a big win game state, the operation unit performance or the specific linked performance may be executable. For example, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, the operation unit performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence of the V winning attacker opening, the opening time, the number of openings, or the number of rounds of the big win game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. When the game is controlled to a big win game state, the operation unit performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the end of the big win game state, the end conditions, the presence or absence of rank-up, which is an increase in the number of rounds from the number of rounds previously notified in the big win game state, and the amount of increase. Specific linked performance may be executed in conjunction with specific performances such as moving objects, image display, and music playback in the small win game state or the big win game state.

The specific effect capable of executing a specific linked effect may be any effect that can be executed in response to the execution of the variable display, or any effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike a reach effect, when a suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" at a certain rate and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, the specific linked effect may be executable during some or all of the effect period.

When controlled to any presentation state, it may be possible to execute operation unit presentations and specific linked presentations. For example, when controlled to a presentation state that is a special presentation mode, it may be possible to execute operation unit presentations and specific linked presentations at a higher rate than when controlled to a presentation state that is a presentation mode other than the special presentation mode.

The operating member capable of executing effects by vibration or light emission may be any motion detection member configured to detect the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects the operation of a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects the touch operation or pressing operation on a touch panel. In addition, a sensor that can detect a predetermined motion by the player, such as an infrared sensor, ultrasonic sensor, CCD sensor, or CMOS sensor, may be used. The motion of the player may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the player's hands, etc. using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In addition, any configuration that can detect the predetermined motion of the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically may be used. In addition to such a motion detection member, a contact member that the player can contact with his/her hand, etc. may be provided, and the contact member may be vibrated or illuminated together with the motion detection member or separately from the motion detection member.

The vibration effects included in the operation unit effects may correspond to the vibration effects in the characteristic part 48AK, the predetermined vibration effects in the characteristic part 49AK, and the first and second vibration effects in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects, the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects executable at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, may correspond to the first vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects, the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects executable at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, may correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The light emission effects included in the operation unit effects may correspond to the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects in the characteristic part 48AK, the light emission effects accompanying the predetermined vibration effects in the characteristic part 49AK, and the light emission effects accompanying the first and second vibration effects in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effects, the light-emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT01 to AKT03, which is the start of the preliminary fluctuation, may correspond to the light-emitting effects accompanying the first vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effects, the light-emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, may correspond to the light-emitting effects accompanying the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The special vibration effect included in the specific linked effect may correspond to the special vibration effect in the characteristic part 49AK.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving patterns, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving patterns, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing pattern, a lottery random number for a big win pattern, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time will be saved.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area is considered to be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

In addition, when the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count of the time-saving state (time-saving count) will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random number values as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings can affect performance other than the probability of winning.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but only in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving symbols may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving periods awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated will be updated.

The time it takes for the time-saving symbol to be confirmed may also be different from the time it takes for the other symbols to be confirmed.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 48AK)
The gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and includes an operating means operable by a player, a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, and a light-emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operating means emits light in association with the vibration effect, and the proportion of the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the advantageous state is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, and the vibration state of the vibration effect is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light-emitting effect may be, for example, the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light-emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern. The fact that the rate of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the use of the operation unit effect pattern. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, in the light colors and vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at a timing when a developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached a reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be common between the vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach mode, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common, for example, when the light emission color is white. The vibration modes may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV11 or AKV12 is different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be different, for example, when the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to timing, thereby improving interest in the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the vibration mode may be different, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game device includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the operating means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing, and is capable of executing a vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether the timing is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute a visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute a visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the interest in the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 49AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player includes an operating means operable by a player, a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as vibration effects in which the operating means vibrates, a light-emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light-emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect in accordance with the progress of a game, and the proportion of the game being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the game being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect, and the vibration state differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko game machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the operation unit effect control pattern or the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light-emitting effect may be, for example, the light-emitting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light-emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific effect may be, for example, the reach effect of SP reach A, the big win confirmation notification, the big win type lottery, etc. The specific effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The higher the rate of control to an advantageous state when a predetermined vibration effect is executed, the higher the probability of control to an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to an operation unit performance pattern. The different rate of control to an advantageous state according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the timing at which a predetermined vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the application of the operation unit performance pattern. The ability to execute a special vibration effect may be, for example, execution of a vibration effect in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The different vibration modes between a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at a timing when a developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached a reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state may have a common light emission mode and different vibration modes. Here, the light emission mode may be common when the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV11, AKV12 is different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the different light emission modes may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, which are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to timing, thereby improving interest in the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the different vibration mode may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11, AKV12, etc., different from the vibration patterns AKV21, AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game device includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a predetermined vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the operation means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing, and is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether the timing is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute the visual guidance effect before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. at step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. at step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The execution of the predetermined vibration effect may have a higher rate of being controlled to an advantageous state than the execution of the specific effect. Here, the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation rate of 50% or more, which is higher than the execution of the reach effect of SP Reach A.
In such a configuration, the player's anticipation for the specified vibration effects can be heightened, improving his/her interest in the game.

The specific effect execution means may execute an effect of moving a movable member as the specific effect, and the vibration effect execution means may execute a special vibration effect during the operation of the movable member. Here, the effect of moving the movable member may be, for example, the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, the vibration effects can be diversified to increase the interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect in response to a notification that the control is in an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the control is in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notification of a confirmed jackpot. The special vibration effect in response to this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44.
In such a configuration, the vibration effects can be diversified to increase the interest in the game.

The light emission effect execution means can execute a specific light emission effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with a special vibration effect, and the light emission form may be different between the light emission effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emission effect associated with the special vibration effect. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The light emission form may be different, for example, when the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow, different from when the light emission color changes from blue or gold, or from blue to red and then to gold.
According to such a configuration, the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A limiting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when the operation unit effect is determined in step AKS202.
According to this configuration, the vibration effects can be appropriately executed to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 50AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a vibration effect execution means that can execute a first vibration effect and a second vibration effect as vibration effects that vibrate the operating means, and a light-emitting effect execution means that can execute a light-emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the vibration effect, and the proportion of the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the advantageous state is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect, and the timing of execution of the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect are different, and the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect is common to the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration performance may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration performance may be, for example, the driving of the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission performance may be, for example, the lighting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light emission performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration performance is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the operation unit performance pattern. The fact that the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is different according to the light emission state of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The fact that the timing of execution is different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a pre-variation start timing AKT01 to AKT03 that is different from the target variation start timing AKT11. The fact that the vibration mode is different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV01 that is different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The fact that the light emission mode of the light emission performance is common between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a case where the light emission color included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 is white, red, or rainbow.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at a timing when the developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached the reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state may have a common light emission mode and different vibration modes. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the second vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different, for example, when the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the different light emission modes may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, which are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the second vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the vibration mode may be different, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a second vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the second vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a text image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the operation means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the second vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing, and is capable of executing the second vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether the timing is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute the visual guidance effect before the second vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the first vibration effect in a variable display prior to the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the result of the look-ahead determination. Here, the variable display prior to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory may be, for example, a variable display that is a pre-variable.

The light emission mode of the light emission performance associated with the first vibration performance includes a first vibration light emission mode and a second vibration light emission mode different from the first vibration light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the first vibration performance may be different when the light emission performance is performed in the first vibration light emission mode and when the light emission performance is performed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the first vibration light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second vibration light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission effect associated with the first vibration effect and the light emission effect associated with the second vibration effect. Here, the light emission mode may be different, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous performance pattern, the light emission color of the operation unit performance pattern is different from that when the remaining number of times is "0".
In such a configuration, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Each of the features 48AK to 50AK may be combined with some or all of the features of the other features, as appropriate. The combined features or individual features that are not combined may be combined with some or all of the features of the other features, as appropriate.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player, and that can be controlled to a normal state and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state)) that is easier to control to the advantageous state than the normal state, and that has an operation means (e.g., a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by a player, and a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., an operation unit effect pattern) that vibrates the operation means. a vibration effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes the performance process during variable display in step S172 using the operation unit performance control pattern or the vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a special vibration effect (e.g., driving the vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in the variable display performance control pattern) and a special vibration effect (e.g., driving the vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in the variable display performance control pattern); and a light emission effect execution means (e.g., and a specific performance execution means (e.g., the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) that can execute specific performances (e.g., the reach performance of SP Reach A, a jackpot confirmation notification, a jackpot type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game, and the rate at which the game is controlled to the advantageous state is higher (e.g., the rate at which the game is controlled to the advantageous state is higher) when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed. the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emission state of the light emission effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the jackpot reliability depending on the application of the operation unit performance pattern), the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of a vibration effect in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the vibration state differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 which are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44),
A predetermined vibration effect can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started,
moreover,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command) capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means,
The game control means includes:
A determination means for determining whether to enter the advantageous state (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110, etc.);
A determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state will be achieved before the determination of the determination means;
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
and an information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103 that transmits a performance control command) capable of transmitting to the performance executing means a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can specify that the advantageous state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved;
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state will be entered before the state control means controls the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmission means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the special state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the special state will be entered (for example, a display result designation command for "miss (time reduction)" can be transmitted, etc.),
The performance execution means includes:
When the determination result information is received, a pre-reading effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed),
An example of such a gaming machine is one that, when it receives the judgment result information after receiving the special information, restricts the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the judgment result information (for example, when it is judged as Yes in step 059AKS082, it executes the processing of step 059AKS084 and step S1304).
According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. Furthermore, it is possible to perform control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In other words, it is possible to draw attention to the light emission mode that has a high probability of controlling a specific vibration effect to an advantageous state, whether it is executed at the execution timing of a vibration effect, and whether a special vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of a specific effect, thereby increasing interest in the game, and since the effect execution means restricts the execution of a look-ahead effect based on the judgment result information when it receives judgment result information after receiving special information that can identify that the special state will be controlled, it is possible to avoid a situation in which interest in the game is actually reduced by the look-ahead effect, such as when it is known in advance by the execution of the look-ahead effect that the judgment result information determined after control to the special state is, for example, a judgment result that will end the special state. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is likely to attract the interest of players and is unlikely to reduce interest in the game when installed in an amusement facility.

The look-ahead effect and the vibration effect may also be associated with each other and executed together. For example, when executing a look-ahead notice, the operation means may be vibrated from the previous change that will become the target. In this case, it is preferable to indicate that a look-ahead notice is being executed by vibrating at the start of the change. In this way, the execution of the operation effect allows the player to anticipate a jackpot from the previous change, increasing excitement.

In addition, a vibration effect may be executed based on control being placed in a specific state or an advantageous state. This allows the player to be appropriately notified that control has been placed in an advantageous state, increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of increasing interest, there is a gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player when a specific display result is displayed as the variable display result,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command) capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means,
The game control means includes:
A determination means for determining whether to enter the advantageous state (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110, etc.);
A determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state will be achieved before the determination of the determination means;
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
and an information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103 that transmits a performance control command) capable of transmitting to the performance executing means a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can specify that the advantageous state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved;
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state will be entered before the state control means controls the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmission means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the special state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the special state will be entered (for example, a display result designation command for "miss (time reduction)" can be transmitted, etc.),
The performance execution means includes:
When the determination result information is received, a pre-reading effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed),
An example of such a gaming machine is one that, when the determination result information is received after the special information is received, limits the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the determination result information (for example, when the determination is Yes in step S059AKS082, the processing of steps S059AKS084 and S1304 is executed). An example of the form of this gaming machine will be described below as another example.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 059AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figs. 13-1 to 13-35. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment performs time-saving control not only after a big win game state, but also when the time-saving pattern is stopped as a variable display result (time-saving state). And, although the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the normal state and the time-saving state as a display result of the special chart game, the time-saving control is not newly performed even if the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed in the time-saving state. On the other hand, for the decorative pattern, different patterns are stopped and displayed in the normal state and the time-saving state. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 059AK having such a feature will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic description above will be omitted.

Figure 13-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is broadly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the gaming board surface, and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the gaming board 2. A gaming area is formed on the gaming board 2, and gaming balls, which serve as gaming media, are launched from a specified ball launching device and struck into this gaming area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol means, for example, a display of multiple types of special symbols that can be changed (the same applies to other symbols described later). The changes include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the change of the special symbol or normal symbol, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated. In the change of the decorative symbol, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. The changes also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specific special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a change. The "variable display" of the special symbol includes sequential lighting or flashing of multiple LEDs, and includes the display of a specific combination of LED lights (also called derived or derived display) as the display result.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled vertically or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also referred to as the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81. The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device. In the time-saving state, control (high-open control, high-base control) is executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole, improving the variable efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol). In the time-saving state, a so-called right shot is performed in which the game ball is shot into the game area on the right side of the player so that the game ball enters the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82, and the large winning hole door forms a large winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state. In the big win game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by making the game ball enter the large winning hole. Therefore, the big win game state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds in the big win game state and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the big win game state, a so-called right hit is performed to shoot the game ball into the right game area so that the game ball enters the large winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 13-1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 13-1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned by a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A.

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined command operation by pressing it. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 13-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning judgment process executed in step S101 of Figure 6. When the start winning judgment process is started, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is on or not (step S1201). If it is judged that the first start port switch 22A is on because it is judged that the first start port switch 22A is on in the switch process (step S2101; Yes), the CPU 103 judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") or not (step S1202). At this time, the CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first special symbol reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first special symbol reserved memory number counter (counter that counts the first special symbol reserved memory number) provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting section) of the RAM 102. If it is determined in step S1202 that the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit (step S1202; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as the game control buffer setting section), to "1" (step S1203).

If it is determined in step S1201 that the first start port switch 22A is off (step S1201; No) or if it is determined in step S1202 that the number of reserved first special symbols has reached the upper limit (step S1202; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the second start port switch 22B provided in correspondence with the second start port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S1204). If it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is on because it is determined in the switch processing that the second start port switch 22B is on (step S1204; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved special symbols for the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") (step S1205). At this time, the CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by reading the second reserved symbol count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved symbol count counter (counter that counts the number of reserved second special symbols) provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting section) of the RAM 102. If it is determined in step S1205 that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the upper limit (step S1205; No), the CPU 103 sets the start port buffer value to "2" (step S1206). If it is determined that the second start port switch 22B is not on (step S1204; No) or if it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is the upper limit (step S1205; Yes), the CPU 103 ends the start winning determination process.

After executing either the process of step S1203 or S1206, the CPU 103 updates the special symbol reserved memory number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value by adding 1 (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special symbol reserved memory number count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second special symbol reserved memory number count value is added by 1. Thus, the first special symbol reserved memory number count value is updated to increase (increment) by 1 when the game ball enters the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is established. Also, the second special symbol reserved memory number count value is updated to increase (increment) by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is established. At this time, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in a specified area of RAM 102 (such as the game control counter setting section), is updated to add 1 (step S1208).

After executing the process of step S1208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S1209). As an example, in the process of step S1209, from among the numerical data updated by the random counter provided in the random number circuit 104 or a predetermined area (such as the game control counter setting section) of the RAM 102, the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted. The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored as reserved data by being set at the top of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory section according to the start port buffer value (step S1210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the reserved data is set in the first special chart reserved memory section. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the reserved data is set in the second special chart reserved memory section. In addition, at this time, when the reserved data is set in the first special chart reserved memory section, the CPU 103 may control the first reserved display 25A to make the first reserved display 25A perform a display that can identify the first special chart reserved memory number that has been increased by one (for example, by increasing the number of lit LEDs by one). In addition, when the reserved data is set in the second special chart reserved memory section, the CPU 103 may control the second reserved display 25B to make the second reserved display 25B perform a display that can identify the second special chart reserved memory number that has been increased by one (for example, by increasing the number of lit LEDs by one).

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started even though a game ball has entered the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and a first start winning has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball's entry, until the number of reserved data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special symbol game using the first special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved memory information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a specific mode (for example, a reach effect, etc.).

The reserved number in the first special chart reserved memory section and the display position of the reserved display pattern (controlled by the performance control board 12) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when reserved data is stored in the first special chart reserved memory section, the reserved display pattern is displayed at the display position corresponding to the reserved number associated with this reserved data. For example, when reserved data is newly stored in association with reserved number "1", the reserved display pattern is displayed at the first display position on the far left side of the first reserved display section 5HL. For example, when reserved data is newly stored in association with reserved number "2", the reserved display pattern is displayed at the second display position located to the right of the first display position of the first reserved display section 5HL.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that has not yet started even though a game ball has entered the second start winning port formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B and a second start winning has occurred. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition by the game ball's entry, as reservation data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In this way, the reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved memory information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a specific mode (for example, a reach effect, etc.).

The reserved number in the second special chart reserved memory section and the display position of the reserved display pattern (controlled by the performance control board 12) basically correspond to each other. Therefore, when reserved data is stored in the second special chart reserved memory section, the reserved display pattern is displayed at the display position corresponding to the reserved number associated with this reserved data. For example, when reserved data is newly stored in association with reserved number "1", the reserved display pattern is displayed at the first display position on the far left side of the second reserved display section 5HR. For example, when reserved data is newly stored in association with reserved number "2", the reserved display pattern is displayed at the second display position located to the right of the first display position of the second reserved display section 5HR.

After executing the process of step S1210, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a prepared start gate winning designation command to the performance control board 12 (step S1211). After that, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a prepared pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12 (step S1212).

Then, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination process (step S1213). As described above, the winning random number value determination process is a process for determining the start winning time, and is a process for determining whether the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the random number value will be a "big win" or a "small win" based on the random number values MR1 and MR3 of the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S1209, and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (see FIG. 10-5). After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the starting port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S1214). At this time, if it is determined that the starting port buffer value is "2" (step S1214; "2"), the CPU 103 clears the starting port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S1215), and then ends the starting winning determination process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start port buffer value is "1" (step S1214; "1"), the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes its stored value to "0" (step S1216) before proceeding to step S1204. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed.

Figure 13-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S1213 of Figure 13-2 as the winning random number value determination process. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol normal process determines whether or not to control the special symbol display result (the variable display result of the special symbol) to a big win game state or a small win game state as a "big win" or a "small win". In addition, in the variable pattern setting process, the variable pattern corresponding to the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, in the winning random number value determination process, at the start winning timing when the game ball is detected at the start winning port (the first start winning port or the second start winning port), it is determined whether the variable display result of the variable display of the execution target of the random number value extracted at this timing (the random number value extracted in the process of step S1209) will be a "big win" or a "small win", and it is determined which variable display pattern of the decorative symbol will be (so-called "pre-reading"). As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball entering the starting winning hole begins (before the start conditions of the special symbol game are met), it is possible to predict in advance that the special symbol display result will be a "big win" or "small win" and that the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a predetermined display mode, and based on this prediction result, the display mode of the pending display can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 on the performance control board 12 side.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 13-3, the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag (a flag that is turned on when in the time-saving state) and the probability variable flag (a flag that is turned on when in the probability variable state) provided in a predetermined area (such as the game control flag setting section) of the RAM 102 (step S351). The CPU 103 identifies whether the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a jackpot game state or not by, for example, checking the value of the special chart process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as the game control flag control section) of the RAM 102. For example, if the value of the special chart process flag is between "4" and "7", it can be determined that the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a jackpot game state.

Following the processing of step S351, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the specified game state is a jackpot game state (step S352). If it is judged that the game state is not a jackpot game state (step S352; No), the CPU 103 further judges whether or not the game state is a high base state in which high opening control is performed in conjunction with time-saving control in a probability variable state or time-saving state (step S353). If it is judged that the game state is a high base state (step S353; Yes), or if it is judged that the game state is a jackpot in the processing of step S352 (step S352; Yes), the CPU 103 judges whether or not the start port buffer value is "2" (step S354). If it is judged that the start port buffer value is not "2" (step S354; No), the CPU 103 performs settings to limit the winning time judgment (step S356).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start port buffer value is "2" (step S354; Yes), or if it is determined in the processing of step S353 that the game is not in a high base state (step S353; No), the CPU 103 selects a special chart display result determination table from the first special chart display result determination table or the second special chart display result determination table to be used to determine the special chart display result in accordance with the start port buffer value ("1" or "2") or the current game state (step S355).

Following the processing of step S355, the CPU 103 judges whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S357). For example, the CPU 103 may judge whether there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing each determination value included in the jackpot determination range with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result extracted by the processing of step S1209 shown in FIG. 13-2 one by one. Alternatively, values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination value included in the jackpot determination range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum value and maximum value of the jackpot determination range to judge whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range. At this time, by judging that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be judged that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot" (jackpot start judgment).

In the process of step S357, for example, the CPU 103 may read the random number value MR1 stored in the special chart reserved memory unit in step S1210, and make the above judgment using the read random number value MR1. The CPU 103 may also store the random number value MR1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (an area other than the special chart reserved memory unit) or in a memory area of the CPU 103, separately from step S1210, and make the above judgment based on the stored random number value. This also applies to the random number value MR3 described below. In this way, the random number value used in the winning random number value judgment process does not have to be the random number value stored in the special chart reserved memory unit.

When it is determined in the processing of step S357 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S357; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S358). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for determining the jackpot type from the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart specified corresponding to the start port buffer value (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2"). The CPU 103 determines which of the multiple types of jackpot types the jackpot type is to be determined as by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type.

Following the processing of step S358, the CPU 103 selects a jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13-11) that has been prepared in advance by storing it in a specified area of the ROM 101, which will be described later, and sets it as the table to be used (step S359). The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is a table for determining the fluctuation pattern of the variable display that results in a "jackpot", and each fluctuation pattern is assigned a determination value that is compared with the random number value MR3.

If it is determined in the processing of step S357 that the random number value MR1 is not within the big win determination range (step S357; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within a predetermined small win determination range (step S360). The CPU 103 can determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the small win determination range by performing the same processing as in the case of the big win determination range for the determination value assigned to the special display result of "small win" in the special display result determination table selected by the processing of step S305.

If it is determined that the value is within the small hit determination range (step S360; Yes), a small hit variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 13-11 (B)) that has been prepared in advance by storing the value in a specified area of ROM 101 is selected and set as the table to be used (step S362). The small hit variation pattern determination table is a table for determining the variation pattern of the variable display that results in a "small hit", and each variation pattern is assigned a determination value that is compared with the random number value MR3.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the random number MR1 is not within the small win determination range (step S360; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined time-saving determination range (step 059AKS001). The CPU 103 can determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the time-saving determination range by performing the same process as in the case of the big win determination range for the determination value assigned to the special chart display result of "miss (time-saving)" in the special chart display result determination table selected by the process of step S355. Note that although the special chart display result of "miss (time-saving)" is a "miss," it indicates a variable display result in which the time-saving pattern is stopped and the time-saving control is performed from the variable display that is performed after the stopped display.

If it is determined that the time-saving type is within the time-saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the time-saving type based on the random number value MR2 (step 059AKS002). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for determining the time-saving type from the time-saving type determination table shown in FIG. 13-7 according to the variable special chart specified corresponding to the start port buffer value (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2"). The CPU 103 determines which of the multiple types of time-saving type is to be determined by referring to the selected time-saving type determination table data.

Following the processing of step 059AKS002, the CPU 103 selects a miss fluctuation pattern determination table (see Figs. 13-12 (A) and (D)) when the time-saving start flag is on, which is prepared in advance by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, and sets it as the table to be used (step 059AKS002A). The miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on is a table for determining a fluctuation pattern of a variable display in which the variable display result is a "miss" but the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed, and a determination value that is compared with the random number value MR3 is assigned to each fluctuation pattern. In step 059AKS002A, it is sufficient to select either the miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on in Fig. 13-12 (A) or the miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on in Fig. 13-12 (D) according to the type of time-saving.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving start flag is not within the time-saving determination range (step 059AKS001; No), a miss fluctuation pattern determination table for when the time-saving start flag is off (see Figure 13-12 (B)), which has been prepared by storing the table in advance in a specified area of ROM 101, is selected and set as the table to be used (step 059AKS002B).

After executing any one of steps S309, S312, S059AKS002A, and S059AKS002B, the CPU 103 refers to any one of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the small jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is on, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table when the time-saving start flag is off, set in the usage table, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted in S1209, and determines the fluctuation pattern assigned to the determination value that matches the random number value MR3 (S363). For example, the CPU 103 may determine the fluctuation pattern by comparing each individual determination value assigned to each fluctuation pattern with the random number value MR3 one by one to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR3, or may set values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the determination values assigned to each fluctuation pattern, and the CPU 103 may determine the fluctuation pattern by comparing the random number value MR3 with the minimum and maximum determination values.

After executing either the process of step S356 or S363, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the start winning command according to the judgment result of step S358, step 059AKS002, or step S363 (step S364), and ends the winning random number judgment process. The start winning command is composed of a start winning designation command, a special reserved memory number designation command, a pattern judgment result designation command, and a fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command. When the start winning buffer value is "1", the first start winning designation command, the first special reserved memory number designation command, the pattern judgment result designation command, and the fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command are set as the start winning command. When the start winning buffer value is "2", the second start winning designation command, the second special reserved memory number designation command, the pattern judgment result designation command, and the fluctuation pattern judgment result designation command are set as the start winning command. Commands that are set to be sent are sent during command control processing.

The first special chart reserved memory count designation command and second special chart reserved memory count designation command to be set for transmission are commands that designate the current first special chart reserved memory count or second special chart reserved memory count (commands including EXT data corresponding to the relevant memory count), and the designated number of special chart reserved memories can be determined by the count value of the first special chart reserved memory count counter or the second special chart reserved memory count counter. The symbol designation command to be set for transmission is a command specifying that the judgment result of the variable display result is a "big win" (a command including EXT data corresponding to a "big win") when the judgment result of step S357 is within the big win determination range (step S357; Yes), a command specifying that the judgment result of the variable display result is a "small win" (a command including EXT data corresponding to a "small win") when the judgment result of step S357 is within the small win determination range (step S360; Yes), and a command specifying that the judgment result of the variable display result is a "small win" (a command including EXT data corresponding to a "small win") when the judgment result of step 059AKS001 is within the time-saving determination range (step 059AKS001; Yes). When the judgment result of step S354 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), a command specifying that no judgment was made at the time of the start winning, namely "no judgment", may be used (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). When the judgment result of step S354 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), a command specifying that no judgment was made at the time of the start winning, namely "no judgment", may be used (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no judgment"). The fluctuation pattern determination result designation command to be set for transmission should be a command that designates the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result determined in step S363 (a command including EXT data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern that is the determination result), and when the determination result in step S354 is the start port buffer value = 1 (step S354; No), it should be a command that designates "no determination" that no determination was made at the time of the start winning (a command including EXT data corresponding to "no determination").

In the winning random number determination process, as described above, for the variable display corresponding to the random number values MR1 to MR3 extracted this time in step S1209, whether the variable display result of the variable display (special game) will be a "big win", a "small win", or a "miss (time reduction)", and the variable display's fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 13-10) are determined, and so-called pre-reading is performed. Note that in this process, the determination is made based on the current game state, not the game state when the variable display is actually executed, so the determination is not necessarily accurate, but it is possible to predict the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern with a certain degree of accuracy. In addition, in the winning random number determination process, if it is determined in the process of step S352 that a big win is occurring, or based on the determination in the process of step S353 that time reduction control is being performed, it is determined in the process of step S354 whether the start port buffer value is "2". At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" and not "2", the process proceeds to step S364 without executing the process of step S355 and the like, and the judgment at the time of the start winning is not made. In this way, when high opening control accompanying time-saving control is performed or in a jackpot game state, the above judgments are restricted so that they are not made based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by the game ball entering the first start winning port. In this way, when the special chart game using the second special chart is executed in priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, when time-saving control is in progress or in a jackpot game state, the pre-reading based on the first start winning is restricted from being executed, ensuring the soundness of the game.

Figure 13-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S110 of Figure 6 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 13-4, the CPU 103 first judges whether or not the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" (step S1231). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step S1231, the second reserved memory count value stored in the RAM 102 may be read, and it may be judged whether or not the read value is "0".

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; No), the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out as reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 151B corresponding to reserved number "1" (step S1232). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of step S1232, the second reserved memory count is updated by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory count, for example, and the reserved data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory unit 151B (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries (step S1233). Also, in the processing of step S1233, the total reserved memory count stored in the total reserved memory counter in RAM 102 may be updated by subtracting 1 from the total reserved memory count. At this time, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step S1234).

When the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step S1231 (step S1231; Yes), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step S1235). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S1235, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the RAM 102 is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step S1235 is executed when it is determined in step S1231 that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0", and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

Note that the special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs, for example. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the number of reserved first special charts is other than "0" in step S1235 (step S235; No), the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are read out as reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 151A corresponding to reserved number "1" (step S1236). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a variable random number buffer.

Following the processing of step S1236, for example, the first reserved memory count value is updated by subtracting 1 from the first special chart reserved memory count, and the reserved data indicated by the random numbers MR1 and MR2 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory unit 151A (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries (step S1237). Also, in the processing of step S1237, the total reserved memory count value stored in the total reserved memory counter in RAM 102 may be updated to subtract 1 from the total reserved memory count value. At this time, the variable special chart designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S1238).

After executing either the process of step S1234 or S1238, the special symbol display result determination table corresponding to the variable special symbol designation buffer value is selected and set as the table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step S1239). For example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1", the first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-5 (A) is set as the table to be used. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2", the second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 13-5 (B) is set as the table to be used. The CPU 103 may also select the special symbol display result determination table data corresponding to the current game state.

The first special pattern display result determination table is a table which is referenced to determine, before a confirmed special pattern which is the variable display result in a special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "jackpot" to a jackpot game state, whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "small hit" to a small hit game state, or whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "miss (time reduction)" to a time reduction state from the subsequent variable display, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result. The second special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine, before the determined special symbol that is the variable display result in the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is derived and displayed, whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "big hit" to a big hit game state, whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "small hit" to a small hit game state, or whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as a "miss (time reduction)" from the subsequent variable display to a time reduction state, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the first special chart display result determination table, depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is normal or time-saving state (low probability state), or probability variable state (high probability state), a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display results of "jackpot", "small win", "miss (time-saving)", and "miss". In the second special chart display result determination table, depending on whether the game state is normal or time-saving state (low probability state), or probability variable state (high probability state), a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display results of "jackpot", "miss (time-saving)", and "miss".

In the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" or whether or not to control the special chart display result to a time-saving state from the next variable display as a "miss (time-saving)". In each of the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state). That is, in each of the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that when the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is in the probability variable state, the probability of determining that it will be controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is in the normal state or the time-saving state. In addition, in the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, the determination data is assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and that the next variable display will be controlled to the time-saving state is higher. Therefore, the rate at which the special chart display result is a "miss (time-saving)" is higher in the variable display corresponding to the reserved second special chart stored at the end of the time-saving state.

In the example of the setting of the first special symbol display result determination table, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "30000" to "30350") is assigned to the "small hit" special symbol display result. On the other hand, in the example of the setting of the second special symbol display result determination table 130B, no determination value is assigned to the "small hit" special symbol display result. With such a setting, the ratio at which the special symbol display result is determined to be a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state can be made different between the case where the variable display result is determined based on the first start condition being satisfied for starting a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the variable display result is determined based on the second start condition being satisfied for starting a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In particular, in a special chart game using the second special chart, the special chart display result is not determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state, so that in game states where game balls are likely to enter the second starting winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, such as a time-saving state (low probability high base state) or a probability change state (high probability high base state), frequent occurrence of a small win game state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game due to prolonged play can be prevented. In addition, in the second special chart display result determination table, a predetermined range of determination values different from the settings in the first special chart display result determination table may also be assigned to the special chart display result of a "small win". For example, in the second special chart display result determination table, a smaller determination value than that in the first special chart display result determination table may be assigned to the special chart display result of a "small win". In this way, when the game is in a high base state such as a time-saving state or a probability-changing state, the ratio of determining that the game will be controlled to a small win game state may be lower than when the game is in a low base state such as a normal state or a probability-changing state without time-saving. Alternatively, regardless of whether the first or second start condition is met, the special chart display result may be determined by referring to a common special chart display result determination table.

Following the processing of step S1239 shown in FIG. 13-4, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination values assigned to each of the special chart display results of "big hit", "small hit", "miss (time reduction)", and "miss" to determine whether the special chart display result will be "big hit", "small hit", "miss (time reduction)", or "miss" (step S1240).

In step S1239, the table data for determining the special chart display result corresponding to the current game state is selected, so in the process of step S1240, depending on whether the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a probability variable state or not, different determination data is used to determine whether the special chart display result is a "jackpot". For example, when the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a normal state or a time-saving state, table data corresponding to the normal state or the time-saving state in the first special chart display result determination table or the second special chart display result determination table is selected as normal determination data, and the special chart display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined by referring to this. On the other hand, when the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a probability variable state, table data corresponding to the case when the game state is a probability variable state in the first special chart display result determination table or the second special chart display result determination table is selected as special determination data, and the special chart display result corresponding to the random number value MR1 is determined by referring to this.

After the special chart display result is determined in step S1240, it is determined whether the special chart display result is a "jackpot" or not (step S1241). If it is determined to be a "jackpot" (step S1241; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in RAM 102 is set to an ON state (step S1242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 13-6 is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of multiple types (step S1243).

The jackpot type determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of several types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the game state is controlled to a jackpot. In the jackpot type determination table, the number (determination value) compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is assigned to several types of jackpot types, such as "non-probable jackpot", "probable jackpot", and "sudden jackpot", depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (changed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

In the example of the setting of the jackpot type determination table, the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "sudden certainty" differs depending on whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variable special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "82" to "99") is assigned to the jackpot type of "sudden certainty", while when the variable special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot type of "sudden certainty". With such a setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type as "sudden certainty" can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first start condition for starting a special chart game using the first special chart by the first special chart display device 4A being satisfied, and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the second start condition for starting a special chart game using the second special chart by the second special chart display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special chart, the jackpot type is not determined to be "suddenly confirmed" and controlled to a short-term opening jackpot state, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time-saving control, frequent occurrence of a short-term opening jackpot state in which it is difficult to obtain a prize ball can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game due to prolonged play can be prevented.

In addition, even when the variable special chart is the second special chart, a predetermined range of determined values different from when the variable special chart is the first special chart may be assigned to the "sudden" jackpot type. For example, when the variable special chart is the second special chart, a smaller determined value may be assigned to the "sudden" jackpot type compared to when the variable special chart is the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in step S1243 shown in FIG. 13-4, the jackpot type is determined to be one of several types depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type stored in the variable random number buffer matches any of the determination values assigned to each of the jackpot types of "non-probable variable", "probable variable", and "sudden probability" (step S1244).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step S1244, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special symbol as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state or a sure-win state that is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is a storage value of a jackpot type buffer provided in RAM 102 (step S1245). As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-sure-win", the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is "sure-win", it can be set to "1", and if it is "sudden sure-win", it can be set to "2".

If it is determined in step S1241 that the result is not a "big win" (step S1241; No), it is determined whether the special chart display result is a "small win" or not (step S1246). Then, if it is determined that the result is a "small win" (step S1246; Yes), the small win flag provided in RAM 102 is set to ON (step S1247).

If it is determined in step S1246 that the result is not a "small win" (step S1246; No), it is determined whether the special chart display result is a "miss (time-saving)" (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "time-saving") (step 059AKS003). Then, if it is determined that the result is a "time-saving" (step 059AKS003; Yes), the CPU 103 selects and sets the time-saving type determination table shown in FIG. 13-7 as the table to be used for determining the time-saving type as one of several types, and determines the time-saving type based on the random number value MR2, in the same way as when determining the big win type (step 059AKS004).

The time-saving type determination table shown in FIG. 13-7 is a table that is referenced to determine one of a number of types of time-saving type based on MR2, which is also the random number value for determining the jackpot type, when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and that the time-saving state is to be controlled. In the time-saving type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the time-saving type is assigned to a number of types of jackpot types, such as "time-saving A" to "time-saving D," depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (fluctuated) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B). As shown in the figure, in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, if the special pattern that has been variably displayed (changed) in the special pattern game is the first special pattern, the time-saving type is determined to be "Time-saving A" or "Time-saving B", and if the special pattern that has been variably displayed (changed) in the special pattern game is the second special pattern, the time-saving type is determined to be "Time-saving C" or "Time-saving D". "Time-saving A" and "Time-saving C" are time-saving types that are controlled to the time-saving state while 100 special pattern games are played. "Time-saving B" is a time-saving type that is controlled to the time-saving state while 50 special pattern games are played. "Time-saving D" is a time-saving type that is controlled to the time-saving state while 20 special pattern games are played.

After executing the process of step 059AKS004 in FIG. 13-4, the CPU 103 stores the determined time-saving type by, for example, setting a time-saving type buffer value, which is a stored value in a time-saving type buffer provided in the RAM 102, corresponding to the time-saving type determined in step 059AKS004 (step 059AKS005). As an example, if the time-saving type is "time-saving A", the time-saving type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is "time-saving B", to "1", if it is "time-saving C", to "2", and if it is "time-saving D", to "3".

After executing the processing of step 059AKS005, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time-saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step 059AKS006). The time-saving flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control is currently in progress (sometimes simply referred to as the time-saving flag). If the time-saving flag is in the OFF state (step 059AKS006; No), the time-saving start flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the ON state (step 059AKS006A). The time-saving start flag is a flag indicating that time-saving control will start from the next special game to be played.

If step 059AKS003 determines that it is not a "miss (time-saving)" (step 059AKS003; No), if step 059AKS006 determines that the time-saving flag is on (step 059AKS006; Yes), or after executing any of the processes of steps S1245, S1247, and step 059AKS006A, a fixed special pattern is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether to control the game state to a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state or whether to control the game state to the next time-saving state, and further, the determined result of the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot game state, or the determined result of the type of time-saving state in the case of a time-saving state (step S1248). As an example, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special display result is not "miss (time-saving)", a special pattern showing the symbol "-" which is a miss pattern is set as the confirmed special pattern in response to the pre-determined result that the special display result is "miss". On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS003 that the special display result is "miss (time-saving)", one of the special patterns showing the numbers "1", "4", "6", and "8" which are time-saving patterns is set as the confirmed special pattern according to the determination result of the time-saving type in step 059AKS004. That is, according to the determination result of the time-saving type being "time-saving A", a special pattern showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special pattern. Also, according to the determination result of the time-saving type being "time-saving B", a special pattern showing the number "4" is set as the confirmed special pattern. According to the determination result of the time-saving type being "time-saving C", a special pattern showing the number "6" is set as the confirmed special pattern. Depending on the result of deciding that the time-saving type is "Time-saving D," the special symbol showing the number "8" is set as the confirmed special symbol.

If the special chart display result is determined to be a "small win" in step S1246, the special chart showing the number "2" which is a small win pattern is set as the confirmed special pattern in response to the pre-determined result that the special chart display result is a "small win". Also, if the special chart display result is determined to be a "big win" in step S1241, one of the special charts showing the numbers "3", "5", or "7" which are the big win patterns is set as the confirmed special pattern according to the determination result of the big win type in step S1244. That is, according to the determination result of the big win type being "non-probability change", the special chart showing the number "3" which is the normal big win pattern among the normal opening round big win patterns is set as the confirmed special pattern. Also, according to the determination result of the big win type being "probability change", the special chart showing the number "7" which is the probability change pattern among the normal opening round big win patterns is set as the confirmed special pattern. Depending on the result of determining that the jackpot type is "suddenly confirmed," the special symbol showing the number "5," which is the symbol for a short-term opening jackpot, is set as the confirmed special symbol.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S1248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step S1249), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step S1235 (step S1235; Yes), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step S1250), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5, for example, has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If it has been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, a setting for transmitting the customer waiting demo designation command is performed, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 13-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process executed in step S111 shown in Figure 6. When the fluctuation pattern setting process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step S261). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step S261; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figure 13-11 (A) and determines a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a jackpot when the special chart display result is "jackpot" (step S262).

Figure 13-10 shows an example of a variation pattern in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)" and "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)" or "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern. In the feature part 059AK, a variation pattern (the variation pattern of PB2-4 shown in the figure) dedicated to the time of a miss (time-saving) that is selected only when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and a variation pattern of a false time-saving that suggests that the variable display result will be a "miss (time-saving)" but is actually a "miss" are prepared. Regarding the variation pattern dedicated to the time of a miss (time-saving) that is selected only when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)", for example, there may be a variation pattern of a super reach performance that is executed only when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)", such as the variation pattern of a super reach D.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: normal reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach performance of a normal reach is executed, and super reach fluctuation patterns, in which the reach performance of a super reach is executed. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit" is called a small hit fluctuation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern and small hit fluctuation pattern are included in the hit fluctuation patterns corresponding to the variable display result being a "jackpot" or a "small hit". The super reach fluctuation pattern includes reach performances such as Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach C, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss".

The jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-11(A) is a table that is referenced to determine one of several types of fluctuation patterns based on the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, depending on the result of the determination of the jackpot type, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special chart display result is a "jackpot". In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-11(A), depending on whether the result of the determination of the jackpot type is "non-probability variable", "probability variable", or "sudden probability variable", the number (determination value) compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned to one of the fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, PB4-3, and PC1-1 to PC1-3.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table 132A shown in FIG. 13-11(A), there is a portion in which a determination value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern so that the proportion determined for each fluctuation pattern differs depending on which of the multiple types of jackpot types is determined. For example, the allocation of determination values to fluctuation patterns PA4-1, PB4-1, PB4-2, and PB4-3 differs depending on whether the jackpot type is "non-probable variable" or "probable variable." This makes it possible to vary the proportion determined for the same fluctuation pattern depending on the result of determining which of the multiple types of jackpot types to determine.

In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, there is a portion in which a determination value is assigned to a different fluctuation pattern depending on which of the multiple types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability change", a determination value is assigned to fluctuation pattern PA4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB4-3, while a determination value is not assigned to fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to fluctuation pattern PC1-3. In contrast, when the jackpot type is "sudden probability", a determination value is assigned to fluctuation pattern PC1-1 to fluctuation pattern PC1-3, while a determination value is not assigned to fluctuation pattern PA4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-1, fluctuation pattern PB4-2, and fluctuation pattern PB4-3. As a result, when the special chart display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is controlled to a short-term opening jackpot state according to "sudden probability", a fluctuation pattern different from the case of being controlled to a normal opening jackpot state can be determined.

In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be either "non-probability change", "probability change", or "sudden probability", the allocation of the determination value to each variation pattern may be made different depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-saving state. This makes it possible to make the ratio of being determined to the same variation pattern different depending on whether the game state is in one of the multiple types. In addition, when the jackpot type is determined to be either "non-probability change", "probability change", or "sudden probability", the determination value may be assigned to a different variation pattern depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state, a probability change state, or a time-saving state. This makes it possible to determine a different variation pattern depending on whether the game state is in one of the multiple types. In this embodiment, more determination values are assigned to the variation pattern PA4-1, which indicates the variation pattern of the normal reach, when the jackpot type is "non-probability change", than when it is "probability change". Therefore, when the reach effect of the Super Reach is executed, the chance of the jackpot type being a "probable win" is higher than that of a "non-probable win", which gives the player hope and increases his/her interest in the game. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-11(A), more determination values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern PB4-2 that produces the reach effect of the Super Reach B than to the fluctuation pattern PB4-1 that produces the reach effect of the Super Reach C, and to the fluctuation pattern PB4-3 that produces the reach effect of the Super Reach A than to the fluctuation pattern PB4-2, that is, as the fluctuation time becomes longer (see the fluctuation time in FIG. 13-10).

Returning to FIG. 13-8, if it is determined in the processing of step S261 that the big win flag is off (step S261; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the small win flag is on (step S263). If it is determined that the small win flag is on (step S263; Yes), the CPU 103 refers to the small win fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-11 (B) and determines the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the small win when the special chart display result is "small win" (step S264).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the small hit flag is in the OFF state (step S263; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time-saving start flag is in the ON state (step 059AKS007). If it is determined that the time-saving start flag is in the ON state (step 059AKS007; Yes), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table when the time-saving start flag is ON, as shown in Figures 13-12 (A), (C), and (D) (step 059AKS008). On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving start flag is in the OFF state (step 059AKS007; No), the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern table when the time-saving start flag is OFF, as shown in Figures 13-12 (B) and (E) (step 059AKS009).

After executing the processing of step 059AKS008 or step 059AKS009, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern corresponding to a miss when the special chart display result is "miss (time reduction)" or "miss" depending on the type of special chart, such as whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, and whether or not the time reduction is in progress (step 059AKS010). Specifically, in step 059AKS010, when the special chart display result is "miss (time reduction)" and the variable special chart is the first special chart, regardless of whether or not the time reduction control is being performed, the time reduction start flag on time miss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (A) is referenced, and the variation pattern is determined to be one of multiple types according to the type of time reduction based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern stored in the variation random number buffer. On the other hand, when the special chart display result is "miss (time-saving)" and the variable special chart is the second special chart, depending on whether or not time-saving control is being performed, the time-saving start flag on time-miss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (C) or (D) is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to one of several types based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. Also, when the special chart display result is "miss" and the variable special chart is the first special chart, depending on whether or not time-saving control is being performed in the time-saving state ... On the other hand, in the normal state, the time-saving start flag OFF miss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-12 (E) is referenced, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3. As shown in the figure, in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, when the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" (when the time-saving start flag ON miss fluctuation pattern determination table is selected), the determination value is assigned so that the time-saving type is determined at different rates according to the type of super reach. Specifically, the determination value is assigned so that the time-saving type with the highest number of time-savings is determined when the super reach with a high jackpot expectation is executed (the determination value is assigned so that the rate of the time-saving type of "time-saving A" is higher for B than for super reach C). Also, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" (when the time-saving start flag ON miss fluctuation pattern determination table is selected), the determination value is not assigned to the super reach A with the highest jackpot expectation. That is, in the feature part 059AK, the determination value is assigned so that the rate of "miss (time reduction)" differs depending on the type of super reach. In addition, in the feature part 059AK, as shown in FIG. 13-11 and FIG. 11-12, when the reach performance of the super reach B or the super reach C is executed, the determination value is assigned so that a plurality of variable display results are obtained, such as a jackpot, a miss (time reduction), or a simple miss. Therefore, the variation of the performance results is increased, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, as described above, the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second start winning hole is provided in the game area on the right side for the player, and the game ball wins only when the so-called right hit is made. Therefore, in the feature part 059AK, the second special chart changes in the time reduction state by the player hitting the right in the time reduction state. On the other hand, when the time reduction control is ended and the reserved memory corresponding to the second special chart remains, the second special chart changes in the normal state. That is, in the normal state, the second special chart changes only when the time-saving control ends and reserved memory corresponding to the second special chart remains. Therefore, in the feature part 059AK, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (E), the variable display (variation) variation pattern determination table corresponds to the maximum number of variable displays performed after the time-saving control ends, which is four times (corresponding to the maximum number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special chart, which is "4").

Returning to FIG. 13-8, after executing the processing of step 059AKS010, the CPU 103 judges whether the time-saving start flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS011). If the time-saving start flag is in the ON state (step 059AKS011; Yes), the CPU 103 judges whether the determined fluctuation pattern is PB2-4 indicating that it is a fluctuation pattern of time-saving confirmation (i.e., a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the time-saving when it is a miss (time-saving)) (step 059AKS012). If the determined fluctuation pattern is not PB2-4, a time-saving promotion performance period as a period for executing the time-saving promotion performance described later is added to the special chart fluctuation time indicated by the determined fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS013). Specifically, in step 059AKS013, as shown in FIG. 13-9, a time-saving promotion performance period according to the time-saving type may be added. In addition, PB2-4, which is a special fluctuation pattern for when you lose (time-saving), and PB2-5, which is a fluctuation pattern for the time-saving fake, include a time-saving teasing performance period (10 seconds) in the special chart fluctuation time shown in Figure 13-10. The time-saving teasing performance is a performance that teases whether or not the time-saving pattern, which is a decorative pattern that indicates that the time-saving state will be controlled from the next variable display, will be displayed as the final stopping pattern of the decorative patterns.

After executing any one of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 in FIG. 13-8, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol fluctuation time (also called the fluctuation time), which is the variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts in the special symbol game until the determined special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 13-10, the special symbol fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with multiple fluctuation patterns prepared in advance, but when the processing of step 059AKS013 is executed, it is a period to which a time-saving teasing performance period is added. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is derived by setting the special pattern variable time corresponding to the variable pattern selected in each process of steps S262, S264, and 059AKS013 (the period to which the time-saving teasing performance period is added when the process of step 059AKS013 is executed). The special pattern variable time is set, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special pattern variable time to a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. In addition, in the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, when the time-saving start flag is in the on state and the determined variable pattern is not PB2-4, an example is shown in which the time-saving teasing performance period as a period for executing the time-saving teasing performance is added to the special pattern variable time indicated by the variation pattern, but in addition to this, for example, when the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit", a predetermined period may be added to the special pattern variable time. In this case, just like the time-saving type, a period corresponding to the jackpot type can be added, and the processing can be the same as in step 059AKS013. Specifically, the periods corresponding to "Time-saving A," "Time-saving B," and "Time-saving C" shown in FIG. 13-9 can be added as periods corresponding to "Non-probability change," "probability change," and "sudden probability change."

Following the processing of step S266, a setting is made to start the variation of the special pattern so that either the special pattern game using the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A or the special pattern game using the second special pattern in the second special pattern display device 4B, for which the start condition is satisfied, is started (step S267). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", a setting is made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", a setting is made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern in the second special pattern display device 4B. This starts the special pattern game. Note that when the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special pattern, it may control the first reserved indicator 25A to make the first reserved indicator 25A perform a display that can identify the first special pattern reserved memory number that has been subtracted by one (for example, by reducing the number of lit LEDs by one). In addition, when the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special chart, it may control the second reserved display 25B to cause the second reserved display 25B to display an indication that identifies the second special chart reserved memory number that has been reduced by one (for example, by reducing the number of lit LEDs by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the CPU 103 performs a transmission setting for a command (a command at the start of the variation of the special pattern) at the start of the variation of the special pattern in order to notify the performance control board 12 of the special pattern display result and the result of the determination of the variation pattern (step S268). For example, when the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 performs a transmission setting for sequentially transmitting a first variation start designation command, a variation pattern designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S262, S264, or S265), a display result designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a first special pattern reserved memory number designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the first special pattern reserved memory number count value reduced by 1, that is, the number of first special pattern reserved memories when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of the execution of the special pattern game) as a variation start command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 performs transmission setting to sequentially transmit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as a variable start command, a second variable start designation command, a variable pattern designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the variable pattern determined in step S262, S264 or S265), a display result designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a second special chart reserved memory number designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the second special chart reserved memory number count value reduced by 1, that is, the number of second special chart reserved memories when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special chart game).

After executing the processing of step S268, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "2" (step S267) and then ends the variation pattern setting processing.

Figure 13-13 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in Figure 13-13, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special symbol confirmation display flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting section) of the RAM 102 is on (step S291). Here, the special symbol confirmation display flag is set to the on state by the process of step S295 described below in response to the derivation and display of a confirmed special symbol that is a variable display result in the special symbol game.

When the special pattern confirmation display flag is off in step S291 (step S291; No), settings are made to derive and display the confirmed special pattern (step S292). At this time, a decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process is performed to send a decorative pattern stop command to the performance control board 12 (step 059AKS021). The decorative pattern stop command is also called a pattern confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is terminated and the display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed, and is also a command that specifies the period (confirmation period) for which the derived and displayed decorative pattern is to be displayed.

Here, we will explain the main performance control commands sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by the command control process with reference to Figures 13-14. Note that "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number.

Command 80XX (H) is a presentation control command (variation pattern designation command) that designates the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. In this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command is set that corresponds to each variation pattern. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and this number is set as "XX" in the command (for example, "01" for variation pattern PA1-1). The variation pattern designation command is also a command for designating the start of the variation of the decorative pattern.

Command 8A01 (H) is a presentation control command (first start port winning designation command) that specifies that a first start winning has occurred due to a gaming medium entering the first start port. Command 8A02 (H) is a presentation control command (second start port winning designation command) that specifies that a second start winning has occurred due to a gaming medium entering the second start port. The first start port winning designation command and the second start port winning designation command are sometimes collectively referred to as start port winning designation commands.

Command 8CXX (H) is a presentation control command (display result specification command) that specifies whether or not to treat it as a jackpot or a miss (time-saving), and the type of jackpot or the type of time-saving, i.e., it is a performance control command that specifies a variable display result. In this embodiment, a display result specification command corresponding to each display result is set. For example, each display result is assigned a unique number, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, "00" for "miss", "01" for "miss (time-saving A)" with time-saving type "time-saving A" and "jackpot" with "probable change", etc.).

Command 8D01 (H) is a presentation control command (first variation start designation command) that designates the start of the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a presentation control command (second variation start designation command) that designates the start of the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as the variation start designation command. Note that information indicating whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is to be started may be included in the variation pattern determination result designation command described below.

Command 8FXX (H) is a presentation control command (pattern determination command) that specifies that the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern is terminated and the display result (stop pattern) is derived and displayed, and is also a command that specifies the period (determination period) for which the derived and displayed decorative pattern is displayed. In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, display result determination commands are set that correspond to whether or not the variable display result is a "miss (time reduction)" and to each type of time reduction when the variable display result is a "miss (time reduction)". For example, if the variable display result is not "miss (time saving)", "XX" in the command is set to "00", and if the variable display result is "miss (time saving)", a unique number is assigned according to the time saving type, and that number is set to "XX" in the command (for example, if the time saving type is "time saving A", it is "01", if the time saving type is "time saving B", it is "02", if the time saving type is "time saving C", it is "03", if the time saving type is "time saving D", it is "04", etc.).

Command 95XX (H) is a presentation control command (game state designation command) that designates the game state. In this embodiment, a game state designation command corresponding to each game state is set. For example, if the game state is a normal state (low probability low base), "XX" is set to "00". For example, if the game state is a high probability low base state, "XX" is set to "01". For example, if the game state is a high probability high base state, "XX" is set to "02". For example, if the game state is a low probability high base state, "XX" is set to "03".

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start designation command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game state (start of fanfare). Note that a fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of a jackpot game state to notify the player that a jackpot game state has been reached. Command A100 (H) is an effect control command (small jackpot start designation command) that specifies the start of a small jackpot game state.

Command A2XX(H) is a presentation control command (command to specify when the large prize opening is open) that specifies the opening of the special variable prize ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX(H) is a presentation control command (command to specify after the large prize opening is open) that specifies the closing of the special variable prize ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

Command A601 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot end designation command) that specifies the end of the jackpot game state (start of the ending). Note that an ending is a presentation that is executed at the end of the jackpot game state and notifies the player that the jackpot game state is ending. Command A602 (H) is a presentation control command (small jackpot end designation command) that specifies the end of the small jackpot game state.

Command C1XX (H) is a performance control command (first special chart reserved memory number designation command) that specifies the first special chart reserved memory number. "XX" indicates the first special chart reserved memory number. Command C2XX (H) is a performance control command (second special chart reserved memory number designation command) that specifies the second special chart reserved memory number. "XX" indicates the second special chart reserved memory number. The first special chart reserved memory number designation command and the second special chart reserved memory number designation command are sometimes collectively referred to as the special chart reserved memory number designation command.

Command C4XX (H) is a presentation control command (symbol determination result designation command) that specifies the display result among the determination results at the time of the start winning. Command C5XX (H) is a presentation control command (variation pattern determination result designation command) that specifies the variation pattern among the determination results at the time of the start winning. In this embodiment, in the processing of step S101 described later, when the first start winning or the second start winning occurs, random numbers MR1 to 3 are extracted. For the variable display corresponding to the extracted random numbers MR1 to 3, before the start condition of the variable display is established, it is determined whether the variable display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" or not, and the variation pattern of the variable display based on the random numbers MR1 and MR3 of the extracted random numbers MR1 to 3. The determination at the time of the start winning refers to these determinations, and is performed in the random number value determination processing at the time of winning in step S1213 (see FIG. 13-3). Note that in certain cases, this determination may not be made. A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including no judgment) for the display result, and the number is set to "XX" in the pattern designation command (for example, "00" for "no judgment", "01" for "miss", etc. are set, a unique number is assigned according to the type of time-saving for "miss (time-saving)", and a unique number is assigned according to the type of jackpot for "jackpot"). A unique number is assigned to the judgment result (including no judgment) for the fluctuation pattern, and the number is set to "XX" in the fluctuation pattern designation command (for example, "00" for "no judgment", "11" for "PA1-1", "12" for "PA1-2", etc.).

Figure 13-15 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS021 of Figure 13-13 as the decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process. The decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process is a process for setting transmission of a decorative pattern stop command according to the variable display result and the time-saving type. In the decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS041). If the time-saving flag is set to the OFF state (step 059AKS041; No), it determines whether or not the time-saving start flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS042). If the time-saving start flag is set to the ON state (step 059AKS042; Yes), since the current variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)", the CPU 103 sets transmission of a decorative pattern stop command according to the time-saving type (step 059AKS043) and ends the decorative pattern stop command transmission setting process.

Specifically, in step 059AKS043, as shown in FIG. 13-15(B), a decorative pattern stop command (pattern determination command) that is predetermined according to the time-saving type is set. As shown in the figure, the determination time is 10 seconds for "time-saving A" and "time-saving B", while the determination time is 5 seconds for "time-saving C" and 2 seconds for "time-saving D". The time-saving types of "time-saving A" and "time-saving B" are time-saving types that are determined only when the variable display result of the first special pattern is "miss (time-saving)", and the time-saving types of "time-saving C" and "time-saving D" are time-saving types that are determined only when the variable display result of the second special pattern is "miss (time-saving)". Therefore, the determination time differs between when the variable display result of the first special pattern is "miss (time-saving)" and when the variable display result of the second special pattern is "miss (time-saving)", and the variation of the variable display increases, which can improve the interest in the game. In addition, when the variable display result of the second special symbol is "miss (time shortening)", the fixed period differs depending on the type of time shortening, so that the player's attention can be drawn to the fixed period. In addition, in the feature part 059AK, the processing of step 059AKS043 is performed only when the time shortening state is not in effect, so that the processing of step 059AKS043 is performed only when the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the reserved (remaining reserved) second special symbol remaining after the time shortening ends is "miss (time shortening)", and the fixed time is determined according to the time shortening type of "time shortening C" and "time shortening D" shown in the figure. In other words, in a short period after the time shortening ends (at most after the end of the period of four variable displays of the maximum reserved memory number of the second special symbol), the fixed time is shorter than when the variable display result corresponding to the first special symbol in the normal state is "miss (time shortening)" ("time shortening A" and "time shortening B") as shown in the figure. Therefore, by lengthening the fixed period for the normal state and the variable display of the first special symbol, which is necessary to clearly inform the player that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, it is possible to provide a period during which the player is clearly informed that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state. Also, if the game is to be controlled to the time-saving state again in a short period of time after the time-saving state ends, a long fixed period may reduce interest in the game, so the fixed period is shortened to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

If the time-saving flag is ON in step 059AKS041 of FIG. 13-15 (A) (step 059AKS041; Yes), or if the time-saving start flag is OFF in step 059AKS042 (step 059AKS042; No), the CPU 103 sets the decorative symbol stop command to send command 8F00 (fixed period 0.5 seconds) (step 059AKS044), and ends the decorative symbol stop command sending setting process.

Returning to FIG. 13-13, after executing the processing of step 059AKS021, the CPU 103 sets the fixed period (10 seconds, 5 seconds, 2 seconds, or 0.5 seconds) corresponding to the decorative symbol stop command (symbol fixed command) set in step 059AKS021 as the special symbol fixed display time (step 059AKS022). Note that in the processing of step 059AKS022, a timer initial value determined in advance according to the variable display result and time-saving type may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Then, the special symbol fixed display flag is set to the ON state (step S295), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated. In this way, after the determined special pattern is derived and displayed by the processing of step S292, until the determined special pattern display time set in step 059AKS022 has elapsed, the determined special pattern display flag is determined to be on in step S291 each time the special pattern stop processing is executed in the special pattern process processing in response to the occurrence of a timer interrupt.

When the special symbol confirmation display flag is on in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether the special symbol confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value, which is the stored value of the game control process timer whose timer initial value was set in the process of step S294, is read, and whether the special symbol confirmation display time has elapsed can be determined depending on whether the timer value has become "0". Note that if the game control process timer value is a value other than "0", it can be updated so that 1 is subtracted each time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of a timer interrupt. If the special symbol confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop process is terminated, and the special symbol confirmation display time is waited for to elapse.

When the special chart confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), the special chart confirmation display flag is cleared to the off state (step S297), and then it is determined whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step S298). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step S298; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the jackpot start performance waiting time (step S299). In addition, a setting is made to send a jackpot start designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the jackpot start designation command table prepared in advance to send the jackpot start designation command according to the jackpot type buffer value may be stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer.

Following the processing of step S300, the jackpot flag is cleared to the OFF state (step S301). In addition, settings are made to end the special probability state, the time-saving state, and the remaining reserved period described below (step 059AKS023). For example, the processing of step 059AKS023 may include clearing the special probability flag, the time-saving flag, and the remaining reserved period flag to the OFF state, and clearing the time-saving counter for counting the remaining number of special games executed in the time-saving state. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to "4", which corresponds to the pre-jackpot opening processing (step S303), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the big win flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small win flag is on (step S304; Yes), a predetermined fixed time is set as the small win start presentation waiting time (step S305). Next, a setting is made to send a hit start designation command corresponding to the special chart display result becoming "small win" from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12 (step S306). After that, the small win flag is cleared to the off state (step S307). In addition, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small win release pre-processing (step S308).

If the small hit flag is off in step S304 (step S304; No), it is determined whether the time-saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024). If the time-saving start flag is on (step 059AKS024; Yes), the time-saving start processing is executed (step 059AKS025). Details of the time-saving start processing will be described later. After executing the processing of step 059AKS025, or if the time-saving start flag is off in step 059AKS024 (step 059AKS024; No), the CPU 103 clears the special chart process flag and initializes its value to "0" (step S309). After executing either the processing of step S308 or S309, it is determined whether to end the time-saving state (step 059AKS027). Specifically, in the processing of step 059AKS027, when the time-saving flag is on, the time-saving count value, which is the stored value of the time-saving count counter, is updated, for example by subtracting 1. Then, it is determined whether the updated time-saving count value matches a predetermined time-saving end judgment value (for example, "0"). At this time, if it matches the time-saving end judgment value, it is determined as Yes. On the other hand, if it does not match the time-saving end judgment value, it is determined as No.

When the time-saving state is to be ended (step 059AKS027; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the time-saving end processing (step 059AKS028). Details of the time-saving end processing will be described later. After executing the processing of step 059AKS028, or when the time-saving state is not to be ended in step 059AKS027 (step 059AKS027; No), the CPU 103 judges whether or not it is the remaining reserved period (step 059AKS030). Whether or not it is the remaining reserved period may be judged by checking whether or not the remaining reserved period flag described later is set to the on state. When it is the remaining reserved period, that is, when the remaining reserved period flag is on (step 059AKS030; Yes), the CPU 103 performs the remaining reserved period end judgment processing (step 059AKS031) and then ends the special pattern stop processing. Details of the remaining reserved period end judgment processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it is not the remaining reserved period, i.e., if the remaining reserved period flag is off (step 059AKS030; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop processing.

Figure 13-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 059AKS025 of Figure 13-13 as the time-saving start processing. The time-saving start processing is processing in which the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" and settings are made to perform time-saving control from the next variable display. In the time-saving start processing shown in Figure 13-16, the CPU 103 first clears the time-saving start flag to the OFF state (step 059AKS051) and sets the time-saving in progress flag to the ON state (step 059AKS052). Next, it is determined whether the remaining reserved period flag is ON or not (step 059AKS053). The remaining reservation period flag is a flag indicating that a variable display corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special chart remaining after the time-saving period ends is in progress, and is set to the ON state by the processing of step 059AKS063 (see FIG. 13-17) described later, and is cleared to the OFF state when all the variable displays corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special chart remaining after the time-saving period ends (step 059AKS072 described later), or when the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special chart remaining after the time-saving period ends becomes a "miss (time-saving period)" (step 059AKS055 described later).

When it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 13-16 that the flag is in the OFF state during the remaining reserved period (step 059AKS053; No), the CPU 103 sets up to send a right hit command to instruct the player to hit the ball to the right, which is to launch the game ball into the game area on the right side (step 059AKS054), and ends the time-saving start processing. The right hit command set in the processing of step 059AKS054 is sent to the performance control board 12, and a right hit instruction display is displayed on the performance control board 12 in the manner shown in FIG. 13-33 (F).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 059AKS053 of FIG. 13-16 that the remaining reserved period flag is in the ON state (step 059AKS053; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining reserved period flag to the OFF state (step 059AKS055) and clears various count values (step 059AKS056). In the process of step 059AKS056, the remaining reserved count value and the time-saving end variable count value described later may be cleared to the initial value of "0". The time-saving end variable count value, like the remaining reserved count value, may be provided in a specified area of the RAM 102, and is a count value indicating the number of variable displays that have been performed since the time-saving state ended. Although not shown in the figure, the time-saving end variable count value may be incremented by +1 each time a variable display is performed when the remaining reserved period flag is in the ON state in the special pattern variable process in step S112 of FIG. 6, for example.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS056 in FIG. 13-16, the CPU 103 sets up to send a simple mode right-hit instruction command (step 059AKS057) and ends the processing at the start of the time-saving feature. The simple mode right-hit instruction command set up in the processing of step 059AKS057 is sent to the performance control board 12, and a right-hit instruction display of the mode shown in FIG. 13-35 (O) is displayed on the performance control board 12 side. The simple mode right-hit instruction command set up for sending in step 059AKS057 in FIG. 13-16 differs from the right-hit instruction command set up for sending in the processing of step 059AKS054, and this is because the variable display result during the remaining reserved period is a "miss (time-saving feature)." Specifically, since the game will be controlled to the time-saving state again in a short period of time after the time-saving period ends (at most after the end of the period of four variable displays of the maximum reserved memory number of the second special chart), if the right-hit instruction command set to be sent in the processing of step 059AKS054 is sent in the processing of step 059AKS057, it may be annoyed to the player. Therefore, in the processing of step 059AKS057, a command for displaying the right-hit instruction in a simple manner is sent to prevent the game from being annoyed and reducing the player's interest in the game.

Figure 13-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step 059AKS028 of Figure 13-13 as the time-saving end processing. The time-saving end processing is a processing to end the time-saving control and set the remaining reserved period. In the case of a probability variable state in which the time-saving flag is on and the probability variable flag is on, the time-saving control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot". Alternatively, even in the probability variable state, a determination may be made as to whether or not to end the time-saving control, and the time-saving control may be ended based on the determination result that the time-saving control should be ended. When the time-saving control is ended in this way, the probability variable control may also be ended to return to the normal state, or the probability variable control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot" or until a predetermined number of special game games have been executed.

In the time-saving end processing shown in FIG. 13-17, the CPU 103 first clears the time-saving flag to the off state (step 059AKS061). Next, it is determined whether or not a second special chart is reserved (remaining reservation) (step 059AKS062). In step 059AKS062, it is possible to determine whether or not a second special chart is reserved (remaining reservation) by checking the reservation information corresponding to the second special chart stored in a specified area of the RAM 102.

If there is a reserved second special chart (remaining reservation) (step 059AKS062; Yes), the remaining reservation period flag is set to the on state (step 059AKS063), and the remaining reservation number count value is set according to the number of reserved second special charts (remaining reservations) (step 059AKS064). Specifically, in step 059AKS064, if the number of reserved information corresponding to the second special chart stored in a specified area of RAM 102 is "4", the remaining reservation number count value is set to "4", if it is "3", it is set to "3", if it is "2", it is set to "2", and if it is "1", it is set to "1".

After executing the process of step 059AKS064, the CPU 103 initializes the fluctuation count value after the time-saving period ends by setting it to "0" (step 059AKS065). Since the fluctuation count value after the time-saving period ends is initialized to "0" in step 059AKS056 of FIG. 13-16, if it is "0", the process of step 059AKS065 may be skipped. After executing the process of step 059AKS065, the CPU 103 sets up to send a right-hit erase command to erase the right-hit instruction display (step 059AKS066), and ends the process at the end of the time-saving period. The right-hit erase command set in the process of step 059AKS066 is sent to the performance control board 12, and the process of step 059AKS136 shown in FIG. 13-30 is executed on the performance control board 12 side, and the right-hit instruction display is erased.

If it is determined in step 059AKS062 of FIG. 13-17 that there is no reserved (remaining reservation) for the second special chart (step 059AKS062; No), the CPU 103 sets up to send a left hit instruction command to instruct the player to return to so-called left hit, which fires the game ball into the game area on the left side (step 059AKS067), and ends the time-saving end processing.

Figure 13-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS031 of Figure 13-13 as the remaining reservation period end judgment process. The remaining reservation period end judgment process is a process that judges whether the remaining reservation period has ended, that is, whether all variable displays corresponding to the reservation (remaining reservation) of the second special chart remaining after the time reduction has ended, and ends the remaining reservation period if they have ended. In the remaining reservation period end judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the fluctuation count value after the time reduction ends matches the remaining reservation number count value set in step 059AKS064 of Figure 13-17 (step 059AKS071). If the fluctuation count value after the time reduction ends does not match the remaining reservation number count value (step 059AKS071; No), the CPU 103 ends the remaining reservation period end judgment process as it is.

On the other hand, if the variation count value after the time-saving period ends matches the remaining reserved number count value (step 059AKS071; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the remaining reserved period flag to the off state (step 059AKS072) and clears various count values (step 059AKS073). In the process of step 059AKS073, the remaining reserved count value and the variation count value after the time-saving period end may be cleared to the initial value of "0", similar to the process of step 059AKS056. After executing the process of step 059AKS074, the CPU 103 sets the left hit instruction command to be sent to instruct the player to return to the so-called left hit, which fires the game ball into the game area on the left side of the player (step 059AKS074), and ends the remaining reserved period end judgment process. The left hit instruction command set in the processing of step 059AKS074 is sent to the performance control board 12, and the left hit instruction is displayed on the performance control board 12 as shown in Figure 13-34 (N-2).

Figure 13-19 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end processing executed in step S117 of Figure 6. In the jackpot end processing shown in Figure 13-19, the CPU 103 first judges whether the jackpot end performance waiting time has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the jackpot release post-processing of step S116 shown in Figure 6, when the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7", a timer initial value previously determined corresponding to the jackpot end performance waiting time, which is the execution period of the ending performance, is set in the game control process timer. Then, in the processing of step S321, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the jackpot end performance waiting time has elapsed may be judged depending on whether the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapse judgment value (for example, "0"). If the jackpot end performance waiting time has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the jackpot end processing is terminated as it is.

In contrast, if the waiting time for the jackpot end presentation has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S322) to determine whether the jackpot type was "non-probability change", "probability change", or "sudden probability change". At this time, it is determined whether the determined jackpot type is "non-probability change" (step S323).

If the jackpot type is determined to be "non-probability variable" in step S323 (step S323; Yes), settings are made to start control to change the game state to a time-saving state (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag to the ON state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (e.g., "100") corresponding to the upper limit of the special game that can be executed in the time-saving state to the time-saving count counter. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is determined to be "probability variable" or "sudden probability variable" (step S323; No), settings are made to start control to change the game state to a probability variable state (step S325). For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to the ON state.

In addition, when the jackpot type is judged to be "high probability", settings may be made to control the state to different types of high probability states when the jackpot type is judged to be "sudden probability". As an example, when the jackpot type is judged to be "high probability", both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag are set to the ON state, the initial value of the time-saving count value is not set, and both the high probability control and the time-saving control are set to continue until the special chart display result is "high probability". On the other hand, when the jackpot type is judged to be "sudden probability", both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag are set to the ON state, the initial value of the time-saving count value is set as in the case of being controlled to the time-saving state, and the high probability control is continued until the special chart display result is "high probability", while the time-saving control is set to continue until the special chart game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, "100"). Alternatively, when the jackpot type is determined to be "sudden", if a predetermined sudden probability during time-saving flag is on, settings may be made to start time-saving control together with probability variable control, whereas if the sudden probability during time-saving flag is off, settings may be made to start only probability variable control. Here, the sudden probability during time-saving flag may be set to the on state when it is determined that the jackpot flag is on in step S298 shown in FIG. 13-13, for example, in response to the jackpot type being "sudden" and the time-saving flag being on and time-saving control being performed.

After executing either step S324 or S325, the special chart process flag is cleared and initialized to "0" (step S326), and the jackpot end process is terminated.

Next, the processing in the performance control board 12 of the feature unit 059AK in this embodiment will be described. Figure 13-20 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis processing, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a start winning command (start winning port designation command, special reserved memory number designation command, pattern determination result designation command, variation pattern determination result designation command) has been received from the main board 11 (step S401).

When it is determined that a start winning command has been received (step S401; Yes), the received command is stored in the start winning command buffer (step S402). When the first start winning command or the first special symbol reserved memory number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (first start winning command, first special symbol reserved memory number designation command, symbol determination result designation command, and variable pattern determination result designation command) is stored in the first start winning command buffer provided in a specified area of RAM 122. When the second start winning command or the second special symbol reserved memory number designation command is received as the start winning command, the start winning command (second start winning command, second special symbol reserved memory number designation command, symbol determination result designation command, and variable pattern determination result designation command) is stored in the second start winning command buffer provided in a specified area of RAM 122.

Figure 13-21 (A) is an example of the configuration of the first start winning command buffer. The first start winning command buffer stores various command data constituting the start winning received command received at the first start winning. The first start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area (areas corresponding to each of the reserved display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data in a number corresponding to the maximum number of reserved first special charts (for example, 4). Note that, as shown in the figure, the first start winning command buffer in feature part 059AK in this embodiment is provided with an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display currently being executed is stored as reserved display number "0" (the same applies to the second start winning command buffer).

When a start win occurs at the first start win port, a set of four commands (start win command) is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12: a first start win designation command, a first special symbol reserved memory designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command. In addition to the first start win command buffer, a storage area is reserved so that other information can be stored in association with each reserved memory information.

The performance control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the start winning command from the top of the free area of the first start winning command buffer in the order of reception. The free area of the first start winning command buffer, i.e., the data in the area where no data is stored, is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when a start winning command is received, the performance control CPU 120 stores each performance control command data in the storage area of the first start winning command buffer corresponding to the smallest reserved display number where all storage areas for start winning commands are "0000 (H)" in the order of the first start winning opening designation command, the first special pattern reserved storage designation command, the pattern determination result designation command, and the variation pattern determination result designation command.

Figure 13-21 (B) is an example of the configuration of the second start winning command buffer. The second start winning command buffer stores various command data constituting the start winning received command received at the second start winning. The second start winning command buffer is provided with a storage area (areas corresponding to each of the reserved display numbers 1 to 4) capable of storing various data in a number corresponding to the maximum number of reserved second special charts (for example, 4). As with the first start winning command buffer, the second start winning command buffer in feature unit 059AK in this embodiment is provided with an area in which various command data corresponding to the variable display being executed is stored as reserved display number "0" as shown in the figure.

When a start win occurs at the second start win port, a set of four commands (start win command) is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12: a second start win designation command, a second special symbol reserved memory designation command, a symbol determination result designation command, and a variation pattern determination result designation command. In addition to the second start win command buffer, a storage area is reserved so that other information can be stored in association with each reserved memory information.

The performance control CPU 120 stores the data specifying the start winning command from the top of the free area of the second start winning command buffer in the order of reception. The free area of the second start winning command buffer, i.e., the data in the area where no data is stored, is "0000 (H)". Therefore, when a start winning command is received, the performance control CPU 120 stores each performance control command data in the storage area of the second start winning command buffer corresponding to the smallest reserved display number where all the storage areas of the start winning command are "0000 (H)" in the order of the second start winning opening designation command, the first special pattern reserved storage designation command, the pattern determination result designation command, and the variation pattern determination result designation command.

The second start winning command buffer, like the first start winning command buffer, has a storage area for storing other information corresponding to each of the reserved display numbers, and a storage area for storing the display stage change patterns described below. The example shown in Figure 10-8 (B) shows a case where no performance control command data is stored in any of the storage areas for reserved display numbers "0" to "4".

Returning to the explanation of the flowchart of the command analysis process shown in FIG. 13-20, after executing step S402, or if it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S401; No), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not a game state designation command has been received (step S403). If it is determined that a game state designation command has been received (step S403; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 switches the on/off state of the high probability flag and high base flag based on the content of the received game state designation command (step S404).

The high probability flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (for example, in the performance control flag setting section), and is turned on in response to the occurrence of a high probability state, and is switched between on and off in response to the switching of the high probability flag on the main board 11 side between on and off. The high base flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (for example, in the performance control flag setting section), and is turned on in response to the occurrence of a time-saving state, and is switched between on and off in response to the switching of the time-saving flag on the main board 11 side between on and off. For example, when the game state designation command designates a high probability high base state (for example, when designating that the high probability flag and the time-saving flag are on), the performance control CPU 120 sets both the high probability flag and the high base flag to on (if they are already on, the on state is maintained. The same applies below to the on and off states of both flags). If the game state designation command specifies a high probability low base state (for example, when specifying that the probability variable flag is on and the time-saving flag is off), the high probability flag is set to on and the high base flag is set to off. If the game state designation command specifies a low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when specifying that the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag are off), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are set to off.

After executing step S404, or if it is determined that the start winning command has not been received (step S403; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes other analysis processing (step S405) and ends the command analysis processing.

Figure 13-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of Figure 9 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pending display setting process shown in Figure 13-22, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a performance control command (starting hole winning designation command, winning judgment result command, pending memory number notification command, etc.) transmitted at the time of the start winning has been received (step S1301). In the process of step S1301, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not a command has been received at the time of the start winning by checking whether a starting hole winning designation command, a winning judgment result command, or a pending memory number notification command has been newly stored in the first starting winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer.

If no command is received in step S1301 (step S1301; No), the advance notice setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that a command has been received (step S1301; Yes), the winning time judgment result corresponding to the received winning time judgment result command is identified (step S1302). At this time, it is determined whether or not "winning time judgment limited" has been identified (step S1303). If the winning time judgment result is other than "winning time judgment limited" (step S1303; No), it is determined whether or not the performance control command transmitted at the time of the start winning includes a first starting port winning designation command, i.e., whether or not the received starting port winning command is a first starting port winning designation command (step 059AKS081).

If it is a first start winning designation command (step 059AKS081; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the reserved items stored contain a reserve for which the variable display result is a "jackpot" or "miss (time saving)", or a reserve for which the variable display result is a "miss" and is a fluctuating pattern for a false time saving (step 059AKS082). In the processing of step 059AKS082, by checking the contents of the first start winning buffer shown in FIG. 13-21(A), it is possible to judge whether or not a reserve for which the variable display result is a "jackpot" or "miss (time saving)", or a reserve for which the variable display result is a "miss" and is a fluctuating pattern for a false time saving, is stored.

If the variable display result is a "jackpot" or "miss (time-saving)" hold, or the variable display result is a "miss" hold and the hold is a time-saving false fluctuation pattern, none of these are stored (step 059AKS082; No), the normal hold change determination table shown in Figure 13-23 (A) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS083).

On the other hand, if a hold for which the variable display result is a "jackpot" or "miss (time-saving)", or a hold for which the variable display result is a "miss" and a time-saving false fluctuation pattern is stored (step 059AKS082; Yes), the hold change determination table during time limit shown in FIG. 13-23 (B) is selected as the table to be used (step 059AKS084).

If it is determined in step 059AKS081 that the command is not the first start port entry command (step 059AKS081; No), since it is the second start port entry command and the time-saving state is in progress, the performance control CPU 120 selects the time-saving reserve change determination table for special chart 2 shown in Figure 13-23 (C) as the table to be used (step 059AKS085).

After executing any one of the processes in steps 059AKS083, 059AKS084, or 059AKS085, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a pending display change performance as a pre-reading preview performance and the execution mode according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern, in accordance with the determination ratio indicated in the pending display change determination table selected as the table to be used (step S1304).

The normal time reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23(A) is a table that is selected when the received start port winning command is a first start port winning designation command, and the reserved stored does not include any reserves whose variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss (time saving)", or any reserve whose variable display result is a "miss" and a time saving false fluctuation pattern. As shown in the figure, in the normal time reserve change determination table, the determination ratios are assigned as shown in the figure so that the probability of a jackpot is higher when the variable display result is a "jackpot", when the variable display result is a "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a super reach miss, or the variable display result is a "small hit", when the variable display result is a "miss (time saving)" or a "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a time saving false fluctuation pattern, and in other cases, the probability of a jackpot is higher when the variable display result is executed than when the variable display result is not executed, and the probability of a jackpot is higher in the order of "red" > "green" > "blue" when the variable display result is executed. When the normal hold change determination table is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 13-22, whether or not to execute the hold display change effect and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the normal hold change determination table.

The reserve change determination table during the limit shown in FIG. 13-23(B) is a table that is selected when the received start port winning command is the first start port winning designation command, and the reserved stored contains either a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot" or "miss (time-saving)", or a reserve with a variable display result of "miss" and a time-saving false fluctuation pattern. In such a case, after the variable display executed first ends, that is, before the variable display corresponding to the reserved for the pre-reading prediction is executed, the normal state changes to the time-saving state (which may become a probability variable state), so the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern may differ between the time of pre-reading and the time of executing the variable display corresponding to the reserved for the pre-reading prediction. Therefore, the reserve change determination table during the limit shown in FIG. 13-23(B) restricts the execution of a reserve display change performance in which the probability of a jackpot is a certain value or more (in this example, "green" or more). In the illustrated example, the reserve display change performance in the form of "blue" can be executed, but it may be set to not be executed. For example, if the variable display result is "miss" in the stored hold and a hold that is a time-saving false fluctuation pattern is stored, the display mode of the hold display to be notified may be initially displayed in "blue", and after the variable display corresponding to the hold of the time-saving false fluctuation pattern ends, the display mode of the hold to be notified (the hold displayed in "blue") may be changed to a hold display of "green" or higher. Also, it may change to a state of "green" or higher as an active display. When the hold change determination table during the limit is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 13-22, whether or not to execute the hold display change performance and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the hold change determination table during the limit.

In addition, in the normal reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23(A) and the limit reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23(B), examples are shown in which the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and the like, is the same as a "jackpot", but for example, there may be a unique state (such as "time?") when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" or when the variable display result is a "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a false time-saving one. This increases the variety of reserve display change presentations, making it possible to attract the player's attention.

The reserve change determination table during time-saving for special chart 2 shown in FIG. 13-23(C) is a table that is selected when the received start port winning command is a second start port winning designation command. As shown, unlike the reserve change determination table during normal time shown in FIG. 13-23(A) and the reserve change determination table during limit time shown in FIG. 13-23(B), the reserve change determination table during time-saving for special chart 2 does not assign a determination ratio when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" or when the variable display result is a "miss" and is a time-saving false fluctuation pattern. When the received start port winning command is a second start port winning designation command and the winning time judgment limit is not in effect, the game state is in a time-saving state (high base control is in effect). In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, even if the time-saving pattern (special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the time-saving state, the time-saving control is not newly performed, and further, since the return effect described later is performed to indicate whether or not the remaining reserve will be controlled to the time-saving state, there is no need to execute the reserve display change effect that notifies the time-saving state. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the time-saving reserve change determination table for special pattern 2, a determination ratio is not assigned when the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" or when the variable display result is "miss" and the time-saving false fluctuation pattern. When the time-saving reserve change determination table for special pattern 2 is selected, in step S1304 of FIG. 13-22, the execution of the reserve display change effect and the execution mode are determined according to the determination ratio shown in the time-saving reserve change determination table for special pattern 2.

Returning to FIG. 13-22, after executing the processing of step S1304, or if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning judgment restriction is in effect (step S1303; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 stores data that identifiably indicates the determination result of step S1304 in the reserve display data storage unit in association with the reserve number corresponding to the new starting winning (step S1311). At this time, if it is determined in step S1303 that the winning judgment restriction is in effect, data corresponding to "no execution (white)" in the reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23 should be stored.

Following the processing of step S1311, the pending display update setting at the time of the start winning is performed (step S1313), and then the advance notice setting processing is terminated. For example, when the number of first special reserved patterns is increased by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, a new first reserved display is added so that the first reserved display in the first reserved display unit 5HR is increased by 1. On the other hand, when the number of second special reserved patterns is increased by 1 due to the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port, a new second reserved display is added so that the second reserved display in the second reserved display unit 5HL is increased by 1. The first reserved display and second reserved display added at this time may be the reserved display determined in step S1304 and stored in step S1311.

Figure 13-24 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed in step S171 of Figure 9. When the variable display start setting process is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the time-saving period is in progress (step 059AKS086). In step 059AKS086, it is possible to determine whether or not the time-saving period is in progress by checking whether or not a high base flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the performance control flag setting section) is set to the on state.

If the time-saving period is in progress (step 059AKS086; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the time-saving period to update the number of time-saving periods (step 059AKS086A). The number of time-saving periods is set in the process of step 059AKS133 (see FIG. 13-30) described later and stored in a specified area of the RAM 122. After executing the process of step 059AKS086A, or if it is determined in step 059AKS086 that the time-saving period is not in progress (step 059AKS086; No), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not a left-hit command has been received from the main board 11 (step 059AKS087), and if it has been received (step 059AKS087; Yes), it displays a left-hit command (see M6 in FIG. 13-34 (N-2)) to instruct the player to hit to the left (step 059AKS088). The left hit instruction display may continue for a period of time from when the left hit instruction command is received until, for example, four variable displays are performed, for five seconds each time. If the left hit instruction command is not received (step 059AKS087; No) or if the processing of step 059AKS088 is executed, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a right hit instruction command or a simplified mode right hit instruction command has been received from the main board 11 (step 059AKS089).

When either the right hit command or the simplified right hit command is received (step 059AKS089; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 displays a right hit command corresponding to the respective command (step 059AKS090). Specifically, when a right hit command is received, the right hit command display M3 shown in FIG. 13-33 (F) is displayed, and when a simplified right hit command is received, the right hit command display M3 shown in FIG. 13-35 (O) is displayed. After the right hit command display corresponding to each command is displayed in step 059AKS090, the right hit command display is displayed in a manner that does not interfere with other performances, as shown in FIG. 13-33 (G), in the variable display for each time until the time-saving state ends.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS090, or if it is determined in step 059AKS089 that neither the right hit instruction command nor the simple mode right hit instruction command has been received (step 059AKS089; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command have been received normally (step 059AKS090A). In step 059AKS090A, it can be determined whether the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command have been received normally by checking the contents of a performance control command receiving buffer provided in RAM 122, for example.

If either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command is not received correctly (step 059AKS090A; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes missed opportunity processing (step 059AKS090B).

Figure 13-25 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS090B of Figure 13-24 as the missed-out process. In the missed-out process shown in Figure 13-25, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the variable pattern designation command has been received normally, i.e., whether or not the missed command is a display result designation command (step 059AKS093). If the variable pattern designation command has not been received normally (step 059AKS093; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the missed-out process. In this case, the display does not display the decorative pattern in a variable manner, and waits until a pattern determination designation command is sent from the main board 11 with the previous variable display result unchanged, and stops displaying the decorative pattern according to the display result designation command in accordance with the reception of the pattern determination designation command.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern designation command has been received normally (step 059AKS093; Yes), i.e., if the missed command is a display result designation command, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is a confirmed time-saving fluctuation pattern or a false time-saving fluctuation pattern, i.e., whether it is a PB2-4 or PB2-5 fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS094). If it is a confirmed time-saving fluctuation pattern or a false time-saving fluctuation pattern (step 059AKS094; Yes), since the fluctuation pattern includes a time-saving teasing performance period, the stop symbol setting process described below is performed (step 059AKS095), and the missed-time processing is terminated. In this embodiment, in the characteristic part 059AK, even if the display result designation command is missed, if the variation pattern designation command is received normally, and the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that confirms time-saving or a variation pattern that falsely indicates time-saving, the stop pattern setting process described below is performed, and the time-saving teasing effect can be executed. However, if either the display result designation command or the variation pattern designation command is missed, the execution of the time-saving related effects such as the time-saving teasing effect may be prohibited, such as by stopping and displaying a decorative pattern that is determined in advance when the command is missed.

On the other hand, if the variation pattern is not a time-saving confirmed variation pattern or a time-saving false variation pattern (step 059AKS094; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command as the final stop pattern (step 059AKS096), and ends the missed-time processing. In step 059AKS096, the combination of decorative symbols that can be selected in the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command may be determined to be the combination with the lowest advantage for the player. This can prevent inconsistencies such as a combination of decorative symbols with a high advantage being displayed as a stopped pattern, but actually resulting in a low advantage, and can prevent a decrease in interest in the game. In this case, since the display result designation command has been missed, the performance control board 12 cannot determine whether the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" or not. Therefore, after the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect (such as a reach effect for a super reach) according to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, if the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)," it may display, for example, a decorative pattern of "???" or a swaying display of a predetermined missing pattern until it receives a pattern determination designation command.

Returning to FIG. 13-24, if the display result designation command and the variation pattern designation command are received normally (step 059AKS090A; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss" or not based on the display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11 (step S551). If it is judged that the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss" (step S551; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 judges, for example, whether the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern determination result designation command (command stored in the variation pattern determination result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11 is a non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1, PA1-2) corresponding to the "non-reach" case in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not a reach mode (step S552).

If it is determined in the processing of step S552 that it is a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S552; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of final decorative symbols that will be the final stop symbols that make up the non-reach combination (step S553). The performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating random numbers for determining the decorative symbols of the non-reach combination, which are updated by the random number circuit 124 or a performance random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, for example, and determines the final decorative symbol (decorative symbol of the non-reach combination) by referring to a decorative symbol determination table for non-reach combinations that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121.

If it is determined in the processing of step S552 that the pattern is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern (step S552; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes the stopping pattern setting process (step 059AKS092).

Figure 13-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the stop pattern setting process executed in step 059AKS092 of Figure 13-24. In the stop pattern setting process, the execution settings for the time-saving teasing effect and the return effect are performed, and if the special pattern display result (variable display result) is "miss (time-saving)", the time-saving pattern is processed to be the final stop pattern. Note that the time-saving pattern displayed as a decorative pattern is called the time-saving pattern to distinguish it from the time-saving pattern of the special pattern.

In the stopping pattern setting process in FIG. 13-26, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the special pattern display result is a "miss (time-saving)" or a "miss" with a false time-saving fluctuation pattern based on the display result designation command (the command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11 (step 059AKS101).

If the special chart display result is "miss (time-saving)" or "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a time-saving false (step 059AKS101; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the time is being saved (step 059AKS102). In step 059AKS102, it is sufficient to judge whether or not the time is being saved by checking whether or not the high base flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, the performance control flag setting section) of the RAM 122 is set to the on state. If the time is not being saved (step 059AKS102; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines the losing pattern of the reach combination as the temporary stop pattern (step 059AKS103). Specifically, in the feature section 059AK, if the special chart display result is "miss (time-saving)" or "miss" and the fluctuation pattern is a time-saving false fluctuation pattern, the reach performance of the super reach is executed, and then the time-saving teasing performance is executed. Therefore, in step 059AKS103, the symbol to be displayed as a provisional stop as a result of the reach effect of the super reach is determined to be the losing symbol of the reach combination. In step 059AKS103, for example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decorative symbol of the reach combination, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect, is extracted, and the provisional stop symbol (decorative symbol of the reach combination) is determined by referring to a decorative symbol determination table for the reach combination that is stored in advance in ROM 121 and prepared.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS103, the performance control CPU 120 executes a time-saving promotion performance setting process to set up the time-saving promotion performance (step 059AKS104).

Figure 13-27 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS104 of Figure 13-26 as the time-saving prompting performance setting process. In the time-saving prompting performance setting process shown in Figure 13-27, the performance control CPU 120 determines the time-saving prompting performance pattern as shown in Figure 13-28 according to the time-saving type and the fluctuation pattern specified by the display result designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (step 059AKS113), and ends the time-saving prompting performance setting process. Although not shown in Figure 13-28, when the time-saving prompting performance setting process is executed due to the stop pattern setting process being performed in the missed-out processing in Figure 13-25, if the time-saving prompting performance setting process is executed other than the time-saving false fluctuation pattern, the time-saving type is unknown, so it is sufficient to determine the time-saving prompting performance pattern of the missed-out pattern (for example, the performance pattern of "Success D" with a performance time of 5 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 13-28, when the time-saving type is "Time-saving A" or "Time-saving B", the time-saving promotional performance pattern "Success A" with a performance time of 10 seconds is determined. When the time-saving type is "Time-saving C", the time-saving promotional performance pattern "Success B" with a performance time of 2 seconds is determined. When the time-saving type is "Time-saving D", the time-saving promotional performance pattern "Success C" with a performance time of 1 second is determined. When the time-saving fluctuation pattern is a false time-saving fluctuation pattern, the time-saving promotional performance pattern "Failure" with a performance time of 10 seconds is determined. The performance time corresponds to the time-saving promotional performance period added in step 059AKS013 of FIG. 13-8 (see FIG. 13-9), and the performance control CPU 120 determines the time corresponding to the time-saving promotional performance period as the time-saving promotional performance time based on the display result designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. In the feature part 059AK, the time-saving prompting performance pattern of "success A" and the time-saving prompting performance pattern of "failure" have the same performance time, so for example, the same character is displayed, and in "success A", the time-saving pattern is finally stopped and displayed as a success pattern, while in "failure", the time-saving pattern is not finally stopped and the decorative pattern of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as a failure pattern. Therefore, it is possible to attract the attention of the player as to whether or not the time-saving pattern is successful (whether or not it is stopped and displayed). In addition, in the feature part 059AK, as shown in FIG. 13-12, the rate at which the variable display result becomes "miss (time-saving)" differs depending on the type of reach performance executed, so that the execution rate of the time-saving prompting performance is also different depending on the type of reach performance executed. That is, for the reach performance of the super reach A, which has a high expectation of a jackpot, the variable display result does not become "miss (time-saving)" and the time-saving prompting performance is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special performance from being executed excessively, and to maintain the expectation of a specific display result. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13-12(B), for a time-saving false fluctuation pattern in which the variable display result is not a "miss (time-saving)" even when a time-saving teasing effect is executed, a reach effect with a low expectation of a jackpot, such as a Super Reach C, is executed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving teasing effect is executed varies depending on the type of reach effect executed, and the rate at which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving teasing effect also varies.

Returning to FIG. 13-26, after executing the processing of step 059AKS104, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether the result of the special symbol display is a "miss (time-saving)" or not (step 059AKS105). If the result of the special symbol display is a "miss (time-saving)" (step 059AKS105; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance determines the decorative symbol of the reach combination including the time-saving symbol as the final stop symbol (step 059AKS106), and ends the stop symbol setting process. In step 059AKS106, the time-saving symbol of the type corresponding to the time-saving type may be determined as the final stop symbol (see FIG. 13-32 (D-1), FIG. 13-34 (M-1)).

In step 059AKS101, if the special symbol display result is "miss (time-saving)" or "miss" but not a time-saving false change pattern (step 059AKS101; No), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether the variable display of the decorative symbol to be stopped this time is a variable display corresponding to the first (first) change of the second special symbol performed after the time-saving has ended (step 059AKS107). For example, in step 059AKS107, after the number of time-saving times is reduced by 1 in step 059AKS086A in FIG. 13-24 to "0", the flag at the end of time-saving is set to ON, and whether the variable display performed immediately thereafter is a variable display corresponding to the second special symbol can be judged by whether the command to start changing the second symbol has been received.

If the variable display (change) corresponds to the first (first) second special chart performed after the time-saving feature has ended (step 059AKS107; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes a return performance setting process to execute a return performance indicating whether or not a reserve that results in a "miss (time-saving feature)" special chart display result is stored in the reserve memory corresponding to the variable display of the second special chart stored after the time-saving feature has ended (step 059AKS108).

Figure 13-29 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 059AKS108 of Figure 13-26 as the return effect setting process. In the return effect setting process shown in Figure 13-29, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is a reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that will result in a "miss (time reduction)" special chart display result by checking the contents of the effect control command reception buffer corresponding to the second special chart among the effect control command reception buffers provided in RAM 122 (step 059AKS115).

If there is a reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that results in a "miss (time-saving)" display (step 059AKS115; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets a return success pattern that notifies that there is a reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that results in a "miss (time-saving)" display, i.e., that the time-saving pattern will be stopped again in one of the remaining reserves (step 059AKS116), and ends the return performance setting process. On the other hand, if there is no reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that results in a "miss (time-saving)" display (step 059AKS115; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets a return failure pattern that notifies that there is no reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special chart that results in a "miss (time-saving)" display, i.e., that the time-saving pattern will not be stopped again in one of the remaining reserves (step 059AKS117), and ends the return performance setting process. In feature part 059AK, the return effect for both the successful return pattern and the failed return pattern both execute a common effect (an effect that teases whether or not the time-saving state will be entered again), and as a result, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed is different.

Returning to FIG. 13-26, after executing the processing of step 059AKS108, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the pattern of the return performance set in step 059AKS108 is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109). If it is a return success pattern (step 059AKS109; Yes), a decorative pattern of a reach combination including a time-saving return pattern is determined as the final stop pattern (step 059AKS110), and the stop pattern setting process is terminated. The time-saving return pattern is a pattern different from the time-saving pattern determined as the final stop pattern in step 059AKS106 according to the time-saving type (see FIG. 13-34 (K-1)). On the other hand, if it is not a successful return pattern (step 059AKS109; No), if it is determined in step 059AKS102 that the time-saving mode is in progress (step 059AKS102; Yes), if it is determined in step 059AKS105 that the special chart display result is not a "miss (time-saving mode)" (step 059AKS105; No), or if it is determined in step 059AKS107 that the variable display does not correspond to the first (first) change in the second special chart that occurred after the time-saving mode ended (step 059AKS107; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of confirmed decorative patterns that will be the final stopping patterns that make up the reach combination (step 059AKS111). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the decorative pattern of the reach combination, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the performance random counter, and determines the final decorative pattern (the decorative pattern of the reach combination) by, for example, referring to a decorative pattern determination table for the reach combination that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. In this way, even if the special pattern display result is determined to be a "miss (time-saving)" in step 059AKS105 during the stopping pattern setting process, if the time-saving is in progress (step 059AKS102; Yes), the final stopping pattern of the decorative pattern becomes the decorative pattern of the reach combination through the processing of step 059AKS111.

Returning to FIG. 13-24, after executing the process of step 059AKS092, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs settings for executing performances during variable display, including performances that change the display mode of the active display and performances during variable display, including mini-games and variable display operations of decorative patterns, based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined in response to the variation pattern (step S559), and then determines the performance control pattern to be one of multiple patterns prepared in advance (step S560). The CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects one of multiple prepared performance control patterns (performance control patterns during special pattern variation) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern determination result designation command, for example, and sets it as the pattern to be used. In addition, when it is determined that a time-saving promotion performance or a return performance is to be executed, the CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern corresponding to the time-saving promotion performance or the return performance, and sets it as the pattern to be used. Note that, if it is determined that the variation pattern designation command has not been received normally in the missed-out processing of step 059AKS090B, it is not necessary to select a performance control pattern. In this case, the decorative pattern is not changed and the previous variable display result remains the same, but the system waits until a pattern determination command is sent from the main board 11, and when the pattern determination command is received, the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result command is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variable pattern designation command was not received correctly in the missed-out processing of step 059AKS090B, a performance control pattern dedicated to missed-out times may be selected in step S560.

Following the processing of step S560, the performance control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (such as the performance control timer setting section) in response to, for example, the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern determination result designation command or the performance time when the time-saving promotion performance is executed (step S561). Specifically, in step S561, if the execution setting of the time-saving promotion performance is set in the time-saving promotion performance setting process of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 13-26, the initial value of the performance control process timer is set by adding the performance time of the time-saving promotion performance to the time indicated by the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern determination result designation command. After executing step S561, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to start the fluctuation of the decorative pattern, etc. on the display screen of the image display device 5 (step S562). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 can start changing the decorative patterns in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the image display device 5, for example, by transmitting a display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (special pattern change performance control pattern) determined in the processing of step S560 to the VDP of the display control unit 123.

After executing the processing of step S562, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "2", which corresponds to the performance processing during variable display (step S563), and then ends the variable display start setting processing.

Figure 13-30 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of Figure 9. When the variable display performance process shown in Figure 13-30 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display time has elapsed based on the timer value of the performance control process timer, etc. (step S801). The performance control CPU 120 may, for example, update the timer value of the performance control process timer (e.g., subtract 1), and determine that the variable display time has elapsed when an end code is read out from the performance control pattern corresponding to the updated performance control process timer value.

When it is determined in the processing of step S801 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S801; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the time-saving count display period in which the number of time-saving times is displayed (step 059AKS121). The time-saving count display period is the period in which the number of time-saving times updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 13-24 is displayed, and may be predetermined in the performance control pattern determined in step S560. When it is determined that it is the time-saving count display period (step 059AKS121; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs time-saving count display control to display the number of time-saving times updated in step 059AKS086A of FIG. 13-24 as the remaining number of time-saving times (step 059AKS122).

After executing the processing of step 059AKS122, or if it is determined in step 059AKS121 that it is not the time-saving count display period (step 059AKS121; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it is a reach performance period for executing a reach performance (step 059AKS123). The reach performance period may be predetermined, for example, in a performance control pattern determined according to a fluctuation pattern. If it is determined that it is a reach performance period (step 059AKS123; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute a reach performance (step 059AKS124).

After executing the process of step 059AKS124, or if it is determined in step 059AKS123 that it is not the reach performance period (step 059AKS123; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it is the pattern temporary stop timing, which is the timing to temporarily stop and display the decorative pattern (step 059AKS125). The pattern temporary stop timing may be predetermined in the performance control pattern determined when the temporary stop pattern of the reach combination is determined in the stop pattern setting process of FIG. 13-26 (step 059AKS103). If it is determined that it is the pattern temporary stop timing (step 059AKS125; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs the decorative pattern temporary stop display (step 059AKS126) and causes the decorative pattern of the reach combination determined in step 059AKS103 to be temporarily stopped and displayed.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS126, or if it is determined in step 059AKS125 that it is not the timing for the temporary stop of the pattern (step 059AKS125; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a time-saving prompting performance period for executing a time-saving prompting performance (step 059AKS127). The time-saving prompting performance period may be predetermined, for example, in a performance control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the time-saving prompting performance setting processing of FIG. 13-27. If it is determined that it is a time-saving prompting performance period (step 059AKS127; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs time-saving prompting performance control for executing a time-saving prompting performance (step 059AKS128).

After executing the processing of step 059AKS128, or if it is determined in step 059AKS126 that it is not a time-saving teasing performance period (step 059AKS126; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it is a return performance period for executing a return performance (step 059AKS129). The return performance period may be predetermined, for example, in a performance control pattern determined according to the pattern set in the return performance setting process of FIG. 13-29. If it is determined that it is a return performance period (step 059AKS129; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs return performance control to execute a return performance (step 059AKS130).

After executing the processing of step 059AKS130, or if it is determined that it is not the return performance period (step 059AKS129; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute performances during variable display, including performances that change the display mode of the active display, mini-games, and other performances during variable display, including variable display operations of decorative patterns, based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variable display pattern (step S808), and ends the performance processing during variable display.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the pattern determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received normally (step S809). At this time, if the pattern determination command has not been received normally (step 809; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137). If the special chart display result (variable display result) is not a "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the performance processing during variable display.

On the other hand, if the special chart display result (variable display result) is "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS137; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the time reduction count to "XXX" as the special time reduction count (step 059AKS138), performs special time reduction count notification control to display "??? times" as the time reduction count notification (059AKS139), and then ends the variable display performance processing. Note that if the pattern determination command is not received correctly, the performance notifying the time reduction count may not be executed. Similarly, even if the command is received correctly, for example, if an inconsistency occurs such as a mismatch between the content indicated by the pattern determination command and the content indicated by the display result designation command, the special time reduction count notification control to display "??? times" as the time reduction count notification may not be executed, or the performance notifying the time reduction count may not be executed.

If the pattern determination command is received normally in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to derive and display the final stop pattern (determined decorative pattern) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern, for example by transmitting a specified display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123 (step S810). After executing the processing of step 810, the performance control CPU 120 sets the determined pattern display time according to the received pattern determination command (step 059AKS131). In step 059AKS131, the determined time indicated by commands 8F00 to 8F04 sent and set in step 059AKS043 or step 059AKS044 shown in FIG. 13-15 may be set.

After executing the processing of step 059AKS131, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss (time reduction)" or not (step 059AKS132). If the special chart display result (variable display result) is a "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the number of time reductions (see FIG. 13-15 (B)) specified by the received pattern determination command (step 059AKS133), and performs time reduction number notification control to display the number of time reductions (notify the number of time reductions) (step 059AKS134).

After executing the process of step 059AKS134, or if it is determined in step 059AKS132 that the special chart display result (variable display result) is not "miss (time reduction)" (step 059AKS132; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a right-hit erase command has been received from the main board 11 (step 059AKS135), and if it has been received (step 059AKS135; Yes), it erases the right-hit instruction display (step 059AKS136). After executing the process of step 059AKS136, or if it is determined in step 059AKS135 that a right-hit erase command has not been received (step 059AKS135; No), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "3", which corresponds to the special chart hit waiting process (step S812), and ends the performance process during variable display.

Figure 13-31 is a timing chart showing the timing of each of the timings during variable display when the time-saving pattern is displayed stationary and in other cases. Figures 13-31 (A) to (C) all show examples of cases where the variable display result is a "miss" (including miss (time-saving)). Specifically, Figure 13-31 (A) shows an example of a case where a time-saving pattern (time-saving type "time-saving A") is displayed stationary as the final decorative pattern, Figure 13-31 (B) shows an example of a case where a time-saving teasing performance is not executed and a time-saving pattern is not displayed stationary as the final decorative pattern, and Figure 13-31 (C) shows an example of a time-saving false variable pattern. In addition, in the illustrated examples, for ease of understanding, all of Figures 13-31 (A) to (C) show examples in which Super Reach C is executed, and Figures 13-31 (A) and (B) show an example in which the PB2-1 fluctuation pattern is selected, while Figure 13-31 (C) shows an example in which the PB2-5 fluctuation pattern is selected.

As shown in FIG. 13-31(A), when the time-saving symbol is displayed as the final stop symbol of the decorative symbols, when the variable display starts, the game enters a reach state, and then the reach effect of the Super Reach C is executed. Then, when the symbol temporary stop timing is reached, the decorative symbols of the reach combination are displayed as temporary stops (in this example, the 757 decorative symbols). Then, the time-saving teasing effect is executed. The time-saving teasing effect period L4 is 10 seconds, similar to the time-saving teasing effect period L5 shown in FIG. 13-31(C) (see FIG. 13-9 and FIG. 13-10). After the time-saving teasing effect ends, when the symbol confirmation command is received, the time-saving symbol is displayed as the final stop symbol (in this example, the 7:7 decorative symbol combination), and the variation ends after the confirmation symbol display period L1 has elapsed. The confirmation symbol display period L1 is 10 seconds (see FIG. 13-15(B)).

As shown in Figure 13-31 (B), if the time-saving teasing effect is not executed and the time-saving pattern is not displayed as the final decorative pattern, the variable display starts, the game enters a reach state, and then the reach effect of Super Reach C is executed. After that, when the pattern confirmation command is received (767 in this example), the variation ends after the fixed pattern display period L2 has elapsed. Note that the fixed pattern display period L2 is 0.5 seconds (see Figure 13-15 (A)), and is the same as the fixed pattern display period L3 shown in Figure 13-31 (C).

As shown in FIG. 13-31(C), when the variable display starts in the case of the time-saving false fluctuation pattern, the state becomes reach, and then the reach performance of the super reach C is executed. Then, when the timing for the pattern to temporarily stop is reached, the decorative pattern of the reach combination is temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in the figure (in this example, the decorative pattern of 757). Then, the time-saving teasing performance is performed. The time-saving teasing performance period L5 is 10 seconds, similar to the time-saving teasing performance period L4 shown in FIG. 13-31(A) (see FIG. 13-9 and FIG. 13-10). After the time-saving teasing performance ends, when the pattern confirmation command is received, the losing pattern of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern (in this example, 767). Then, after the fixed pattern display period L3 has elapsed, the fluctuation ends. Note that the fixed pattern display period L3 is 0.5 seconds (see FIG. 13-15(A)), and is the same as the fixed pattern display period L2 shown in FIG. 13-31(B).

Next, we will explain examples of the effects that occur when the time-saving symbol is displayed in a stopped state or when a time-saving promotion effect is executed, with reference to Figures 13-32 to 13-35.

As shown in FIG. 13-32(A), when the game state is normal after the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed, when the timing for the symbols to be temporarily stopped is reached, the decorative symbols of the reach combination are temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 13-32(B-1). In the illustrated example, a "7" is displayed as the decorative symbol 5La, a "5" is displayed as the decorative symbol 5Ca, and a "7" is displayed as the decorative symbol 5Ra in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. As shown in the figure, the "5" symbol as the decorative symbol 5Ca may be displayed while shaking in a manner that makes it visible that it is temporarily stopped. In addition, this is not limited to the decorative symbol 5Ca in each of the "middle" decorative symbol display areas 5C, and all decorative symbols may be displayed while shaking. On the other hand, when the game state is in the time-saving state, since the determination is No in step 059AKS102 in FIG. 13-26, the processing of step 059AKS111 is performed without the decorative symbol of the reach combination being temporarily stopped, and as shown in FIG. 13-32 (B-2), the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stopping symbol. Note that in the illustrated example, the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result (the illustrated example shows an example of the special symbol display result of "1", which is the time-saving type of time-saving A), while the decorative symbol shows an example in which the time-saving symbol is not stopped and displayed. Note that, as shown in FIG. 13-32 (B-2), after the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stopping symbol, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the fixed symbol display period.

When the time-saving teasing performance period starts from the state shown in FIG. 13-32 (B-1), the time-saving teasing performance is executed as shown in FIG. 13-32 (C). In the illustrated example, the message M1 "Maybe it's time-saving!?" is displayed to tease whether or not the time-saving pattern will be displayed in a static state, but other methods may also be used to tease whether or not the time-saving pattern will be displayed in a static state, for example, depending on whether or not two characters battle and win.

When the pattern determination command is received, the final stop pattern is displayed as shown in FIG. 13-32 (D-1) or (D-2). FIG. 13-32 (D-1) shows an example in which the variable display result is "miss (time reduction)", the pattern determination command of 8F01 shown in FIG. 13-15 (B) is received as the pattern determination command, and the time-saving pattern 5Cb of the time-saving type "time reduction A" is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern, and the special pattern display result is also an example in which the special pattern display result is a special pattern showing the number "1", which is the time-saving pattern of the time-saving type "time reduction A". Note that in the illustrated example, the display mode of the active display AHA changes to a "green" display mode before the time-saving pattern 5Cb is stopped and displayed, but for example, the display mode may change immediately after the start of the time-saving teasing performance, or may change during the reach performance of the super reach. On the other hand, in the case of a time-saving false fluctuation pattern, the symbol determination command of 8F00 shown in FIG. 13-15(A) is received, and as shown in FIG. 13-32(D-2), the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed as the final stopping symbol. As a special symbol display result, a special symbol showing the symbol "-" which is the losing symbol is displayed as a special symbol display result as shown in the figure. Then, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the determined symbol display period. In the example shown in the figure, the display mode of the active display AHA changes to a "blue" display mode before the losing symbol of the reach combination is stopped and displayed, but for example, the display mode may change immediately after the start of the time-saving teasing performance, or may change during the reach performance of the super reach. In addition, for the active change performance that changes the display mode of the active display, the display mode of the active display may be changed so that the ratio of the time-saving symbols to be stopped and displayed differs even in the reach performance of the same type of super reach, depending on which display mode the display mode of the active display changes to. In addition, the destination of the change in the display mode in the active change performance may be the same as the determination ratio in the normal reserved change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23(A). Also, unlike the normal reserved change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23(A), when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" and when the variable display result is a false time-saving fluctuation pattern, the ratio of the display mode to "green" or "red" may be higher when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)".

In the state shown in FIG. 13-32 (D-1), the process of step 059AKS134 in FIG. 13-30 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 13-33 (E), the time-saving count display M2 is performed as the time-saving count notification control. In this case, since the pattern determination command 8F01 shown in FIG. 13-15 (B) is received as the pattern determination command, "Time-saving 100 times!" is displayed as the time-saving count display M2. Note that, when the process of step 059AKS139 in FIG. 13-30 is executed, "Time-saving ??? times" is displayed as the special time-saving count notification control, and the notification of the time-saving count (time-saving count) may be limited. Then, when 10 seconds, which is the determined pattern display period specified by the pattern determination command 8F01, has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 13-33 (F), the time-saving state is controlled and a new variable display (variable display corresponding to the reserved display HL1) is started. At that time, the reserved displays HL3 and HL2 shift to the right. In addition, by processing step 059AKS122 in FIG. 13-30, the time-saving count display M4 of "99 time-saving times remaining" is displayed as shown in FIG. 13-33(F). In addition, in step 059AKS090 in FIG. 13-24, the right-hit instruction display M3 in the manner shown in FIG. 13-33(F) is displayed.

After that, multiple variable displays will be performed in the time-saving state. Figure 13-33 (G) shows an example of the 81st variable display after the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed. In the time-saving state, since it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole, a variable display corresponding to the second special pattern will be performed and a reservation corresponding to the second special pattern will be stored. In the example shown in Figure 13-33 (G), the maximum number of reservation memories corresponding to the second special pattern are stored, which is four, and four reservation displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed. Also, an example is shown in which the time-saving number display M4 of "19 times remaining" is displayed. Note that the right-hit instruction display in the manner shown in Figure 13-33 (F) ends with the first variable display after the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed, and from the second time onwards, as shown in Figure 13-33 (G), it is displayed as a right-hit instruction display M3 in a manner that does not interfere with other performances.

Then, when the 100th variable display (100th fluctuation in the time-saving state) is completed after the time-saving symbol is stopped, the time-saving state ends. Figure 13-33 (H) shows an example in which the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols constituting a non-reach combination, are stopped and displayed at the 100th variable display after the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed. After the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final stop symbols, are stopped and displayed, the fluctuation ends 0.5 seconds after the fixed symbol display period specified by the symbol determination command of 8F00, and the time-saving state ends. When the time-saving state ends, a right-hit erase command is received from the main board 11, so the processing of step 059AKS136 shown in Figure 13-30 is performed, and the right-hit instruction display M3 is erased as shown in Figure 13-33 (H). In this state, as shown in the figure, the maximum number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special chart is four, and four reserved displays HR1 to HR4 are displayed, and the remaining reserved period is the period from the start of the variable display corresponding to reserved display HR1 to the end of the variable display corresponding to HR4).

Next, when the time-saving state ends and the normal state is restored, as shown in FIG. 13-33 (I), the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR1 starts. Note that the illustrated example shows an example in which the variable display result is a "miss" (an example that is not a "miss (time-saving)"). In the characteristic part 059AK of this embodiment, although it is in the normal state, the rate at which the special display result is a "miss (time-saving)" in the variable display corresponding to the reserved second special chart stored at the end of the time-saving state is high (see FIG. 13-5 (A) and (B)), so there is a high rate of being controlled to the time-saving state again. Therefore, although it is in the normal state during the remaining reserved period, the left-hit instruction display is not performed as shown in the figure, and the player is prevented from being confused by the instruction displays of the right-hit instruction display and the left-hit instruction display being displayed in succession. Note that the left-hit instruction display is performed in the first variable display performed after the remaining reserved period ends, as shown in FIG. 13-34 (N-2).

The variable display is the first variable display in the second special chart performed after the time-saving has ended, and since the execution setting of the return performance is performed in the processing of step 059AKS108 in FIG. 13-26, when the return performance period begins, the return performance is performed as shown in FIG. 13-34 (J). In the return performance, for example, depending on whether or not a specified mission is cleared, a performance may be performed that indicates whether or not a reserve in which the special chart display result is "miss (time-saving)" is stored (whether or not the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve HR2 to HR4 is "miss (time-saving)"), that is, whether or not the time-saving return pattern is stopped. In the case of a return success pattern, the specified mission is cleared and the time-saving return pattern is stopped, while in the case of a return failure pattern, the specified mission ends in failure, the time-saving return pattern is not stopped, and the combination of decorative patterns that make up the reach is stopped as the final stop. In addition, there may be multiple types of specified missions, and the success rate may differ depending on the type of the mission. If the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR1 is a "miss (time-saving)", the return effect is not executed because the result is determined as Yes in step 059AKS101 of FIG. 13-26, but the return effect may be executed. In this case, the time-saving teaser effect may be executed after the return effect.

When a hold for which the special display result is "miss (time-saving)" is stored, i.e., when it is a successful return pattern, the processing of step 059AKS110 in FIG. 13-26 stops and displays a combination of decorative patterns including the time-saving return pattern 5Cc as the final stop pattern, as shown in FIG. 13-34 (K-1), and notifies the user that there is a hold for which the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" among the stored holds. Note that this example shows the case where the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to hold display HR4 is "miss (time-saving)" (more specifically, the time-saving type of "time-saving D").

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-34 (L-1), a variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR2 is executed. At this time, as shown in the figure, the small time-saving return symbol M5, which allows the player to visually confirm that the time-saving return symbol 5Cc has stopped being displayed, is displayed in a manner that does not interfere with other effects. This provides the player with a sense of security, as it becomes visible that the time-saving symbol is stopped being displayed while there is still reserved time.

Then, in the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR4, since the variable display result of the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HR4 is "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving type is "time-saving D"), the pattern determination command 8F04 shown in FIG. 13-15 (B) is received as a pattern determination command, and the time-saving pattern 5Cb for the time-saving type of "time-saving D" is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern, as shown in FIG. 13-34 (M-1). As for the special pattern display result, unlike FIG. 13-32 (D-1), a special pattern showing the number "8" corresponding to the time-saving pattern for the time-saving type of "time-saving D" is displayed as the special pattern display result. Note that the illustrated example shows an example in which the display mode of the active display AHA changes to the display mode of "green" before the time-saving pattern 5Cb is stopped and displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 13-34 (M-1), the processing of step 059AKS134 of FIG. 13-30 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 13-35 (N-1), the time-saving count display M2 is performed as the time-saving count notification control. In this case, since the pattern determination command of 8F04 shown in FIG. 13-15 (B) is received as the pattern determination command, "Time-saving count 20 times!" is displayed as the time-saving count display M2. Then, when 2 seconds, which is the determined pattern display period specified by the pattern determination command of 8F04, has elapsed, the fluctuation ends, and as shown in FIG. 13-35 (O), the time-saving state is controlled and a new variable display (variable display corresponding to the reserved display HL3) is started. Also, as shown in FIG. 13-30, the processing of step 059AKS122 causes the time-saving count display M4 of "Time-saving count remaining 19 times" to be displayed as shown in FIG. 13-35 (O). Also, in step 059AKS090 of FIG. 13-24, as shown in FIG. 13-35(O), a simplified right-hit instruction display M3, which is less noticeable than the display shown in FIG. 13-33(F), is displayed.

On the other hand, if there is no reserved symbol stored that results in a "miss (time-saving)" special symbol display result, i.e., if it is a return failure pattern, the processing of step 059AKS111 in FIG. 13-26 causes the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra of the reach combination to be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbols, as shown in FIG. 13-34 (K-2), and the variation ends 0.5 seconds after the determined symbol display period specified by the symbol determination command of 8F00. Next, as shown in FIG. 13-34 (L-2), a variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol HR2 is executed. At this time, since it was a return performance of a return failure pattern, unlike FIG. 13-34 (L-1), the time-saving return small symbol M5 is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-34 (M-2), the decorative symbols 5La, 5Ca, and 5Ra, which are the final symbols that make up the non-reach combination, are displayed stopped, and 0.5 seconds after the determined symbol display period specified by the symbol determination command of 8F00, the fluctuation ends and the remaining reserved period ends. With the remaining reserved period ending, a left-hit instruction command is sent from the main board 11 in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 13-18.

When the variable display corresponding to the reserved display HL3 is started, the processing of step 059AKS088 in FIG. 13-24 displays the left-hit instruction display M6 of "Return to left-hit!" as shown in FIG. 13-34 (N-2). In this way, the left-hit instruction display is displayed in the next variable display executed after the variable display corresponding to the reserved (remaining reserved) second special chart remaining after the time-saving feature ends.

Figure 13-36 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing in the information output processing performed in the information output processing of step S23 in Figure 5. The processing in the information output processing shown in Figure 13-36 performs processing to output signals such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information, etc., which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. When the processing in the information output processing shown in Figure 13-36 is started, the CPU 103 outputs a signal indicating the special chart display result and the normal chart display result as a display signal output processing (step S1801). After executing the processing of step S1801, the CPU 103 executes a drive signal output processing (step S1802) and outputs a drive signal for the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82.

Then, the CPU 103 executes an external information output process (step S1803), and ends the process in the information output process. In step S1803, various signals are output, such as a jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot is occurring, a jackpot signal 2 indicating that a jackpot is occurring or that the time-saving state is in progress (special prize is in progress), a jackpot signal 3 indicating that the time-saving state is in progress, and a pattern confirmation signal indicating that the variation has ended.

Figure 13-37 is a timing chart showing the output timing of various signals output in the external information output process in step S1803 of Figure 13-36. Specifically, Figure 13-37 (A) shows the output timing of various signals when the time-saving state is entered due to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and Figure 13-37 (B) shows the output timing of various signals when the time-saving state is entered due to the stopping of the time-saving pattern.

As shown in FIG. 13-37(A), when the time-saving state is entered due to the end of the jackpot gaming state, first, a pattern confirmation signal indicating the jackpot pattern has stopped is output, and as a result (when the output of the pattern confirmation signal is stopped), jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 are output at the same timing. Then, in line with the end of the jackpot gaming state, jackpot signal 1 stops being output, but since the time-saving state is entered at that timing, jackpot signal 3 is output. Then, as time passes, a pattern confirmation signal indicating a losing pattern has stopped is output, and if a pattern confirmation signal indicating a jackpot pattern has stopped is output again without the time-saving state ending, jackpot signal 1 is output and jackpot signal 3 stops being output. Note that since this is a jackpot during the time-saving state, the output of jackpot signal 2 continues as shown in the figure. Then, in line with the end of the jackpot gaming state, jackpot signal 1 stops being output, but since the time-saving state is entered at that timing, jackpot signal 3 is output. Then, as time passes, when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time-saving times is completed, a pattern confirmation signal indicating the stop of a losing pattern is output, and the time-saving state ends when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops, so the output of jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same time.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13-37(B), when the time-saving state is entered by the stopping of the time-saving pattern, first a pattern confirmation signal indicating the time-saving pattern stopping is output, and as a result (when the output of the pattern confirmation signal is stopped), jackpot signal 2 and jackpot signal 3 are output at the same time. Then, as time passes, a pattern confirmation signal indicating a losing pattern stopping is output, and when a pattern confirmation signal indicating a jackpot pattern stopping is output without the time-saving state ending, jackpot signal 1 is output at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops, and the output of jackpot signal 3 is stopped. Then, in line with the end of the jackpot game state, the output of jackpot signal 1 stops, but at that timing the time-saving state is entered again, so jackpot signal 3 is output. Note that, as shown in the figure, jackpot signal 2 continues to be output. Then, as time passes, when the final variable display of the predetermined number of time-saving times ends, a pattern confirmation signal indicating a losing pattern stop is output, and the time-saving state ends at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops, so the output of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing. In this way, since the output of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at the same timing, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a discrepancy and prevent confusion, and it is possible to suitably identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state with an external device. After that, when the pattern confirmation signal indicating the time-saving pattern stop is output again, the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are output at the same timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 with characteristic part 059AK in this embodiment can achieve the following effects.

In processing step S1240 shown in FIG. 13-4, the CPU 103 can determine "Miss (time-shortened)" as the special chart display result regardless of whether the game state is in the time-shortened state or not, and if "Miss (time-shortened)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special chart display result, if the game state is normal, the game state is controlled to the time-shortened state (travel-specific state) in the next special chart game (variable display), whereas if the game state is in the time-shortened state, no control is performed regarding the game state based on the derived display of "Miss (time-shortened)" (no new time-shortened control is performed). In addition, when "Miss (time-saving)" is derived and displayed as the special display result, the performance control CPU 120 stops and displays the time-saving pattern as the final stopping pattern of the decorative patterns in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 13-26 in the normal state, while in the time-saving state, stops and displays the final stopping pattern that constitutes the reach combination in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 13-26. This allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and can increase interest in the game.

As shown in Fig. 13-32 (B-2) and (D-1), the special display result for "miss (time-saving)" (special display result) is a common display result (special display result showing the number "1" corresponding to the time-saving type "time-saving A") when the game state is normal and when the game state is time-saving, while the variable display result of the decorative pattern is, when the game state is normal, step 059AKS106 in Fig. 13-26 displays the time-saving pattern as the final stopping pattern for the decorative pattern, while when the game state is time-saving, step 059AKS111 in Fig. 13-26 displays the final stopping pattern that constitutes the reach combination. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

In addition, in the processing of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 13-26, the execution setting of the time-saving prompting effect, which prompts whether or not the time-saving pattern indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled from the next variable display is displayed in a stopped state, is performed, so that the performance control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving prompting effect. The performance control CPU 120 executes the processing of step 059AKS104 when the game state is the normal state, and does not execute the processing of step 059AKS104 when the game state is the time-saving state. Therefore, the time-saving prompting effect is not executed when the game state is the time-saving state (special state). This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

In addition, when "Miss (time-saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special display result, if the game is in a normal state, the CPU 103 transmits a decorative pattern stop command with the fixed time shown in FIG. 13-15(B) in the processing of step 059AKS043 as shown in FIG. 13-15, while if the answer is Yes in step 059AKS041, it transmits a decorative pattern stop command with a fixed time of 0.5 seconds. In other words, when "Miss (time-saving)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special display result, the time from when the variable display result is displayed to when it is fixed (fixed time) differs between the normal state and the special state. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

In addition, in the processing of step S1240 shown in FIG. 13-4, the CPU 103 can determine "Miss (time-shortened)" as the special chart display result regardless of whether the game state is in the time-shortened state or not, and if "Miss (time-shortened)" (special display result) is derived and displayed as the special chart display result, in the normal state, the next special chart game (variable display) is controlled to the time-shortened state (travel-specific state), while in the time-shortened state, no control is performed regarding the game state based on the derived display of "Miss (time-shortened)" (no new time-shortened control is performed). And, as shown in FIG. 13-5, between the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, determination data is assigned so that there is a higher probability that the special chart display result will be determined to be "Miss (time-shortened)" and controlled to the time-shortened state from the next variable display in the second special chart display result determination table. In addition, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a return performance based on whether or not a "miss (time-saving)" reservation is stored among the reservations stored at the end of the time-saving state by processing step 059AKS108 in FIG. 13-26. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can display a right-hit instruction by processing step 059AKS090 in FIG. 13-24, and does not display a left-hit instruction until it receives a left-hit instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 in FIG. 13-18, that is, until all the variable displays corresponding to the reservations (remaining reservations) of the second special chart stored at the end of the time-saving state are completed. This allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, and can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, by receiving a left hit instruction command in the normal state, the performance control CPU 120 can display a left hit instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 13-24. The left hit instruction command is then transmitted in step 059AKS074 of FIG. 13-18, that is, when all variable displays corresponding to the reserved second special charts stored at the time of the end of the time-saving state are completed. After receiving the left hit instruction command, that is, in the variable display that is performed after the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reserved charts are completed, the performance control CPU 120 displays a left hit instruction display in step 059AKS088 of FIG. 13-24. This allows for an appropriate launch notification, allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

The CPU 103 also transmits different right-hit instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining reserved period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 13-16. Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays a right-hit instruction in a manner corresponding to the received command in step 059AKS090 in FIG. 13-24. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed and losing interest in the game.

In the return performance, for example, depending on whether a specified mission is cleared, the performance control CPU 120 indicates whether a reserve is stored that will result in a "miss (time-saving)" special chart display result (whether the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserves HR2 to HR4 will be "miss (time-saving)"), i.e., whether the time-saving return pattern will be stopped or not. There are return performances for successful return patterns and return performances for unsuccessful return patterns, and both execute a common performance (for example, a performance that aims to clear a specified mission to see whether the time-saving state will be entered again), and as a result, the combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed differs depending on whether the specified mission is cleared. This makes it possible to attract the player's attention after the common performance is executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13-7, when the variable display result of the remaining reserved is "miss (time-saving)", the CPU 103 determines the time-saving type to be "time-saving C" or "time-saving D". Then, in the processing of step 059AKS113 of FIG. 13-27, the performance control CPU 120 determines the time-saving promotion performance pattern to execute different patterns of time-saving promotion performance depending on the time-saving type, as shown in FIG. 13-28. That is, different patterns of time-saving promotion performance are executed for the time-saving promotion performance executed when the variable display result corresponding to the first special chart in the normal state is "miss (time-saving)" and the time-saving promotion performance executed when the variable display result corresponding to the second special chart of the remaining reserved is "miss (time-saving)". This allows different patterns of performance to be executed depending on the situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Also, the CPU 103 transmits a right-hit erase command in the variable display of the time-saving end round by processing step 059AKS066 in FIG. 13-17. Then, at the end of the variable display of the time-saving end round, the performance control CPU 120 erases the right-hit instruction display by processing step 059AKS136 in FIG. 13-30 based on the command. Therefore, the right-hit instruction display is erased during the remaining reserved period. Also, the CPU 103 transmits different right-hit instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining reserved period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 13-16. Then, on the side of the performance control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time-saving state (the variable display performed next to the variable display in which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed), a right-hit instruction display in a manner corresponding to the received command is performed in step 059AKS090 in FIG. 13-24. This allows for optimal firing notification and allows the game to proceed smoothly.

The CPU 103 can also output various signals, such as jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot is occurring, jackpot signal 2 indicating that a jackpot is occurring or that a time-saving state is occurring (special prize is occurring), jackpot signal 3 indicating that a time-saving state is occurring, and a pattern confirmation signal indicating that the variation has ended, to, for example, a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 by processing step S1803 in FIG. 13-36. When the time-saving state is entered due to the time-saving pattern stopping, a pattern confirmation signal indicating that the time-saving pattern has stopped is output, as shown in FIG. 13-37 (B), and a jackpot signal is output at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal is stopped. This allows the external device to conveniently identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state.

As shown in FIG. 13-37(B), the CPU 103 stops outputting the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 at the same time that the output of the symbol determination signal corresponding to the end of the time-saving state stops. This allows the external device to conveniently identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state.

Also, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern according to the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 13-12. As shown in the figure, when the variable display result is "miss (time-saving)" (special display result) (when the time-saving start flag is on and the miss variation pattern determination table is selected), no determination value is assigned to the super reach A with the highest jackpot expectation, and the determination value is assigned so that the rate of "miss (time-saving)" varies depending on the type of super reach executed. Then, the CPU 103 transmits different right-hit instruction commands depending on whether or not it is the remaining reserved period, as in the processing of steps 059AKS054 and 059AKS057 in FIG. 13-16. Then, on the side of the performance control CPU 120, in the first variable display controlled to the time-saving state (the variable display performed next to the variable display in which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed), a right-hit instruction display in a manner corresponding to the received command is performed in step 059AKS090 in FIG. 13-24. This allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

As shown in Figures 13-11 and 11-12, when the reach effect of Super Reach B or Super Reach C is executed, a decision value is assigned to result in multiple variable display results, such as a jackpot, a miss (time reduction), or a simple miss. This increases the variety of performance results, enhancing the interest in the game.

The CPU 103 also transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result designation command indicating the determined special chart display result (variable display result), and the performance control CPU 120 performs a performance based on these commands. For example, even if the performance control CPU 120 determines that the variation pattern is a variation pattern for performing a reach performance of Super Reach B based on the received variation pattern designation command and determines No in step S552 of FIG. 13-24, whether or not to perform the processing of step 059AKS104 or step 059AKS106 is different depending on whether or not it determines Yes in 059AKS101 of FIG. 13-26 based on the display result designation command. In other words, even if a variation pattern command with a common performance content, such as performing a reach performance of Super Reach B or Super Reach C, is received, a different performance is performed depending on the content of the display result designation command. This increases the variety of performance results and improves the interest in the game.

In addition, in the processing of step 059AKS104 in FIG. 13-26, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the time-saving prompting effect by setting the execution of a time-saving prompting effect (special effect) that prompts whether or not a time-saving pattern, which indicates that the time-saving state will be controlled from the next variable display, will be displayed in a stopped state. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the time-saving prompting effect after executing a reach effect that is common whether or not the time-saving prompting effect is executed. This executes a special effect, which can increase interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-12, since the rate at which the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" varies depending on the type of reach effect executed, the execution rate of time-saving teasing effects also differs depending on the type of reach effect executed. This makes it possible to prevent special effects from being executed excessively, and maintain the expectation of a specific display result.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13-12(B), for a time-saving false variable pattern in which the variable display result does not become a "miss (time-saving)" even when a time-saving teasing effect is executed, a reach effect with a low expectation of a jackpot, such as a Super Reach C, is executed. Therefore, the rate at which the time-saving teasing effect is executed varies depending on the type of reach effect executed, and the rate at which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving teasing effect also varies. This makes it possible to prevent the special effect from being executed excessively, and to maintain the expectation of a specific display result.

The performance control CPU 120 also changes the display mode of the active display so that the rate at which time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed varies even for the same type of Super Reach reach performance, depending on which display mode the active display is changed to. This makes it possible to prevent special performances from being executed excessively, and to maintain the expectation of a specific display result.

The CPU 103 also transmits a variation pattern designation command indicating the determined variation pattern and a display result designation command indicating the determined special chart display result (variable display result), and the performance control CPU 120 performs a performance based on these commands. For example, even if the contents of the received display result designation command are different, the performance control CPU 120 executes a common Super Reach B reach performance regardless of the special chart display result (variable display result) if the received variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern that performs a Super Reach B reach performance. This allows the performance to be executed optimally.

As shown in FIG. 13-7, the number of times the time is reduced by controlling the time-saving state varies depending on the type of time-saving, and as shown in FIG. 13-12, the proportion of super reach effects that are executed varies depending on the type of time-saving. As shown in FIG. 13-28, the pattern of time-saving teasing effects that are executed varies depending on the type of time-saving. This makes it possible to attract the player's attention, as the number of times the time is reduced afterwards varies depending on the effect that is executed.

The CPU 103 also transmits a display result designation command in step S268 of FIG. 13-8, and sets up the transmission of a decorative symbol stop command in step 059AKS021 of FIG. 13-15. The performance control CPU 120 performs the stop symbol setting process in FIG. 13-26 to set up the execution of the performance based on the contents of the received display result designation command, and sets the number of time-saving times specified by the received symbol determination command in the process of step 059AKS133 of FIG. 13-30. This allows for optimal performance control.

In addition, in the processing of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 13-24, the presentation control CPU 120 checks the contents of the presentation control command receiving buffer provided in RAM 122 to determine whether the display result specification command and the variation pattern specification command have been received normally, and if they have not been received normally, executes the missed-out processing shown in FIG. 13-25, and if either the display result specification command or the variation pattern specification command has been missed, prohibits the execution of time-saving related presentations such as time-saving teasing presentations, such as by stopping the display of a decorative pattern that is predetermined for a missed opportunity. This makes it possible to execute presentations appropriately while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

On the other hand, if the CPU 120 for controlling the effects determines that the command was not received normally in the process of step 059AKS090A in FIG. 13-24, it can execute effects related to the time-saving state, such as time-saving teasing effects, by executing the stop symbol setting process in step 059AKS095 in FIG. 13-25 if it determines that the command was not received normally and the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command is a fluctuation pattern that confirms time-saving or a fluctuation pattern that falsely indicates time-saving. This makes it possible to execute effects that are suitable for the time-saving state, such as time-saving teasing effects, by preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The presentation control CPU 120 also determines the number of time-saving times based on the received symbol determination command in the process of step 059AKS133 in FIG. 13-30. If the symbol determination command is not received correctly, the process of step 059AKS139 performs special time-saving number notification control to display "??? times" as a notification of the number of time-saving times, thereby restricting the execution of the time-saving number notification. This makes it possible to execute presentations in an optimal manner while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a reserve display change presentation in the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 13-22. If the reserve memory currently stored in step 059AKS082 contains a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserve with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserve with a "miss" and a "false time-saving" variation pattern, the reserve change determination table at the time of limit shown in FIG. 13-23(B) is selected and a reserve display change presentation is executed. In other words, if the reserve memory currently stored contains a reserve with a variable display result of "miss (time-saving)", the execution of the reserve display change presentation is restricted. This allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in step 059AKS082, if the currently stored reserved memory contains a reserved with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserved with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserved with a "miss" and a variable pattern of "fake time-saving", the reserved display change determination table during limit shown in FIG. 13-23(B) is selected and the reserved display change presentation is executed. Therefore, even if the currently stored reserved memory contains a reserved with a variable display result of "jackpot", the reserved display change determination table during limit shown in FIG. 13-23(B) is selected to restrict the execution of the reserved display change presentation, just as in the case where the currently stored reserved memory contains a reserved with a variable display result of "miss (time-saving)". This makes it possible to suppress the deviation in presentation due to state transitions and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if the currently stored reserved memory in step 059AKS082 contains a reserved memory with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserved memory with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserved memory with a "miss" and a "fake time-saving" variation pattern, the reserved display change determination table during limit shown in FIG. 13-23(B) is selected and the reserved display change presentation is executed, so that the execution of the reserved display change presentation is also restricted if the currently stored reserved memory contains a reserved memory with a variable display result of "miss" and a "fake time-saving" variation pattern. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when a presentation related to a state transition is performed.

As shown in FIG. 13-23(B), when the hold display change presentation is restricted, the presentation control CPU 120 does not execute the hold display change presentation, or if it does execute it, executes a hold display change presentation with a "blue" display state. In other words, it does not execute a hold display change presentation that indicates a higher expectation level than the "green" display state. This makes it possible to suppress deviations in presentation due to state transitions and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-23(B), when the hold display change effect is restricted, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute hold display change effects that change the display state to "green" or "red." This restricts the execution of certain types of advance notice effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without giving the player unnecessary expectations.

(Modification of characteristic part 059AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-5, an example was shown in which the time-saving pattern as a result of the special pattern display is a part of the "miss", but this is just one example. For example, as shown in FIG. 13-38, a part of the small win pattern may be a time-saving pattern. In this case, the time-saving control is performed after the end of the small win game state, and a right-hit instruction display or the like may be performed in the first variable display performed after the end of the small win game state. Also, as in the above embodiment, even if a small win pattern that is a time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed again in the special pattern game in the time-saving state, the time-saving state is not controlled anew, and the performance control CPU 120 may simply stop and display a combination of decorative patterns that constitute a small win, rather than a small win pattern including a time-saving pattern.

In the above embodiment, when all the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reservations have been completed, a left hit instruction command is sent in the processing of step 059AKS074 in FIG. 13-18, and the CPU 120 for controlling the performance displays a left hit instruction display in the first variable display that is displayed after the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reservations have been completed. In addition to this, for example, the left hit instruction display may have a first mode that is noticeable to the player and a second mode that is not noticeable to the player, and the second mode of the left hit instruction display may be displayed in the first variable display that is displayed after the variable displays corresponding to the remaining reservations have been completed. The left hit instruction display is displayed for 5 seconds each time from the time the left hit instruction command is received until, for example, four variable displays are displayed, but it may change from the second mode to the first mode over time. In addition, the left hit instruction display is not limited to a simple display, and may include sound or the lighting of a lamp (i.e., it may be a left hit notification that notifies the player of a left hit). For example, in the first mode, the other output sounds are muted and a sound announcing a left hit is output, while in the second mode, the sound announcing a left hit is output without muting the other output sounds.

In the above embodiment, the return effect is performed when the variable display (change) corresponding to the first (first) second special chart performed after the time-saving period ends, but this is just one example. The execution timing of the return effect is not limited to the first variable display after the time-saving period ends, and for example, depending on which reserved memory corresponding to the variable display of the second special chart stored after the time-saving period ends becomes a "miss (time-saving)", the timing of one of the first to third variable displays performed after the time-saving period ends may be determined by lottery as the execution timing of the return effect. In addition, the return effect may be performed multiple times over multiple variable displays until a successful pattern is achieved, such as a pattern in which the return effect of a return failure pattern is switched to a return success pattern after the execution of a return effect of a return failure pattern, or a return effect of a return success pattern is performed in the next variable display after the execution of a return effect of a return failure pattern.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the pattern of the time-saving teasing effect differs depending on the type of time-saving effect, that is, the pattern of the time-saving teasing effect differs when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve is a "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving type C or D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during normal state is a "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving type A or B), but this is just one example. The pattern of the time-saving teasing effect may be the same when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve is a "miss (time-saving)" and when the variable display result of the first special chart during normal state is a "miss (time-saving)".

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-15, an example was shown in which the time from when the variable display result is displayed until it is confirmed (confirmation time) is different between when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is a "miss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving C or D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is a "miss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B), but this is just one example. The confirmation time may be the same between when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reservation is a "miss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving C or D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is a "miss (time saving)" (time saving type of time saving A or B). This makes it possible to suppress an increase in control data.

For example, the confirmation time when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve is "miss (time-saving)" may be the same as when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is "miss (time-saving)." In this way, by lengthening the period between the normal state and the time-saving state, the player can be clearly notified that the time-saving state will be entered.

In addition, examples have been shown (Fig. 13-35 (N-1), Fig. 13-33 (E)) in which the number of time-saving times is notified in a common manner at the determined time when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve is a "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving types C and D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is a "miss (time-saving)" (time-saving types A and B), but these may be in different manners.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the right-hit instruction display is erased after the time-saving state ends, and the right-hit instruction display is not displayed during the remaining reserved period, but this is just one example. The right-hit instruction display is not limited to a simple display, and may include sound or the lighting of a lamp (i.e., it is sufficient as long as it is a right-hit notification that notifies of a right hit), and during the remaining reserved period, no display or sound output is made on the image display device 5, and for example, the right-hit lamp indicating a right hit may be lit.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-37(B), when the last variable display of the predetermined number of time-saving times ends, a pattern confirmation signal indicating a losing pattern stop is output, and the time-saving state ends at the timing when the output of the pattern confirmation signal stops, so the output of the jackpot signal 3 is stopped at that timing, but this is just one example. For example, since the variable display result corresponding to the reserved (remaining reserved) of the second special pattern stored at the time of the time-saving end has a high probability of being a "miss (time-saving)," even if the time-saving state ends, the output of the jackpot signal 3 may not be stopped until the variable display corresponding to the remaining reserved ends. The same applies to the jackpot signal 2. This allows the external device to appropriately identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a time-saving teasing effect is performed after the reach effect of a super reach, and an example is shown in which it is suggested whether or not the time-saving pattern will stop, but this is just one example. For example, the results of the reach effect may be displayed as a big win (including a small win), the time-saving pattern stopping, or a miss. This increases the variety of the results of the reach effect execution, improving interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a time-saving teasing performance period is added to the variable pattern when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)". In addition, for example, a variable display result of "revival jackpot" can be provided, and the same variable pattern as when the variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" can be selected, and the revival performance period executed after the reach performance can be added (for example, 20 seconds), and the symbols that constitute the jackpot (special symbols and corresponding decorative symbols) can be stopped and displayed after the revival performance. This increases the variety of performances and improves the interest in the game. Also, when the variable display result is a "revival jackpot", a process of adding the revival performance period can be executed after step S262 in FIG. 13-8, and the variety of performances can be increased with simple processing.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a super reach reach effect is used to tease whether the variable display result will be a jackpot, and then a time-saving teasing effect is used to tease whether a time-saving pattern will be displayed in a stopped state. However, in addition to this, for example, in the time-saving teasing effect, in addition to whether a time-saving pattern will be displayed in a stopped state, it is also possible to notify that there will be an advantage greater than the time saving effect, such as whether a jackpot pattern will be displayed in a stopped state. This makes it possible to maintain anticipation of a specific display result.

In the above embodiment, if the pattern determination command is not received normally in step S809 and step 059AKS137 in FIG. 13-30 and the special pattern display result (variable display result) is a pattern determination command for "miss (time reduction)", an example was shown in which the notification of the number of time reductions is restricted by performing special time reduction number notification control to display "??? times" as a notification of the number of time reductions in step 059AKS139. However, for example, even if special time reduction number notification control is performed, the player may be able to specify the number of time reductions to some extent by changing the background image according to the remaining number of time reductions. Specifically, the main board 11 may transmit a background designation command according to the remaining number of time reductions, and the performance control board 12 may display a background image specified by the received background designation command. This allows the player to specify the number of time reductions to some extent from the background image, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, each time the variable display is executed, the main board 11 may transmit a time-saving number designation command indicating the remaining number of time-saving times, and the performance control board 12 may notify the remaining number of time-saving times in response to the time-saving number designation command. This allows the player to identify the remaining number of time-saving times even when special time-saving number notification control is performed, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. Also, for example, if the number of time-saving times is 100, a special variation pattern may be transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when 50 times remain, and the performance control board 12 may notify the remaining number of time-saving times of 50 times in response to receiving the special variation pattern. This allows the player to identify the remaining number of time-saving times even when special time-saving number notification control is performed, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, when the currently stored reserve memory in step 059AKS082 of FIG. 13-22 contains a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserve with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserve with a "miss" and a "fake time-saving" variation pattern, an example is shown in which the reserve change decision table during limit shown in FIG. 13-23(B) is selected and the reserve display change presentation is executed; that is, when the currently stored reserve memory contains a reserve with a variable display result of "miss (time-saving)" or a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", an example is shown in which the common reserve change decision table during limit shown in FIG. 13-23(B) is selected and the execution of the reserve display change presentation is restricted, but this is just one example. When the currently stored reserve memory contains a reserve with a variable display result of "miss (time-saving)" and a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", different reserve change decision tables during limit may be selected to restrict the execution of the reserve display change presentation. For example, one may execute a pre-reading preview of the reserved display change performance, and the other may execute a pre-reading preview of the dialogue preview. In this case, it is sufficient to execute a type of performance with a low expectancy for both. Also, if a reserved display whose variable display result is a "miss (time-saving)" is stored in the currently stored reserved memory, the reserved display change performance may not be executed, and if a reserved display whose variable display result is a "jackpot" is stored, the execution or non-execution of the reserved change performance may be determined based on the reserved change determination table shown in FIG. 13-23 (B) such that the display state is not "green" or higher.

In the above embodiment, when the reserve memory currently stored in step 059AKS082 of FIG. 13-22 contains a reserve with a variable display result of "jackpot", a reserve with a "miss (time-saving)", or a reserve with a "miss" and a "fake time-saving" variation pattern, the reserve change determination table during limit shown in FIG. 13-23(B) is selected, and an example is shown in which the reserve display change performance with an expectation level of "green" or higher is not executed, but this is just one example. For example, in addition to the reserve display change performance, multiple types of pre-reading preview performances such as a dialogue preview and a pre-reading zone preview may be executed as the pre-reading preview performance, and if the judgment is Yes in step 059AKS082 of FIG. 13-22, the pre-reading preview performance of the pre-reading zone preview type may not be executed. This prevents the player's attention from being distracted from the reserve stored before the pre-reading preview target.

In the above embodiment, the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B are made of 7-segment LEDs, and the special patterns are represented by numbers "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-", but this is just one example. The first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B may be made of eight LEDs, as shown in FIG. 13-39, for example, and the special patterns may be represented by a combination of lighting of these eight LEDs. Specifically, as shown in the figure, when the variable display result is a "big win" or a "small win", it may be represented by lighting three of the eight LEDs, and when the variable display result is a "miss (time reduction)" or a "miss", it may be represented by lighting two LEDs.

In the above embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 13-34(L-1), the time-saving pattern 5Cb of the time-saving type "time-saving D" is displayed as the final stop pattern in the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 13-34(M-1), but this is just one example. For example, as shown in FIG. 13-40, after the state shown in FIG. 13-40(L-1) (similar to FIG. 13-34(L-1)), a time-saving return small pattern M5 is displayed to visually confirm that the time-saving return pattern 5Cc has stopped, and since it has already been notified that the time-saving pattern will stop during the remaining reserved period, as shown in FIG. 13-40(M-3), the variable display of the decorative pattern may be reduced and displayed (reduced pattern M8), and the result display M7, which is the result of whether the time-saving pattern has stopped or not, may be displayed large in the center of the image display device 5. This adds a sense of excitement to the game and improves the interest in the game. In addition, since it has already been notified that the time-saving symbol will stop during the remaining reserved period, the execution of the active change effect that changes the display mode of the active display may be restricted during the remaining reserved period. Restrictions may include not executing it at all, executing it in a mode with low expectations, or executing it in an inconspicuous mode, such as making the display smaller or transparent.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 059AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 059AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A performance execution means (such as a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the variable display,
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special display result of "miss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result, the normal state is controlled to the special state based on the special display result (for example, executing the processing of step 059AKS025, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, when the answer is Yes in step 059AKS006, the process of step 059AKS006A is not executed, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the performance execution means is capable of executing different performances in the normal state and in the special state (for example, executing the process of step 059AKS092, etc.),
It is characterized by:

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
As the variable display, variable display of identification information is performed, and variable display of performance identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, variable display of the first special chart and the second special chart or variable display of a decorative pattern, etc.),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the identification information common to the normal state and the special state is displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-32 (B-2) and (D-1), when the game state is in the normal state and when the time-saving state, the special display result as "miss (time-saving)" (special display result) is a common display result (special display result showing the number "1" which is the time-saving pattern of the time-saving type of "time-saving A")), and the performance identification information different to the normal state and the special state is displayed (for example, for the variable display result of the decorative pattern, when the game state is in the normal state, in step 059AKS106 of FIG. 13-26, the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern of the decorative pattern, while when the time-saving state is in the time-saving state, in step 059AKS111 of FIG. 13-26, the final stop pattern constituting the reach combination is stopped and displayed),
This may be done.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When the effect execution means is in the normal state, it is capable of executing a special effect suggesting that the special display result will be displayed as the variable display result (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 judges No in step 059AKS102, it is capable of executing the processing of step 059AKS104), and when the effect execution means is in the special state, it does not execute the special effect (for example, when the effect control CPU 120 judges Yes in step 059AKS102, it does not execute the processing of step 059AKS104),
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent a decline in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result, the time from when the variable display result is displayed until it is confirmed differs between when the normal state is in effect and when the special state is in effect (for example, when the normal state is in effect, a decorative pattern stop command with the confirmation time shown in FIG. 13-15(B) is transmitted in the processing of step 059AKS043, whereas when it is determined as Yes in step 059AKS041, a decorative pattern stop command with a confirmation time of 0.5 seconds is transmitted, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent a decline in interest in the game when a special display result is displayed in a special state.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 060AK)
The feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 060AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 060AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A performance execution means (such as a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the variable display,
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, a special display result of "miss (time reduction)") is displayed as the variable display result, the normal state is controlled to the special state based on the special display result (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
When the special display result is displayed as the variable display result in the special state, control based on the special display result is not performed (for example, when the determination is Yes in step 059AKS006, the processing of step 059AKS006A is not executed, etc.),
As the variable display, a first identification information and a second identification information are variable displayed, and a performance identification information is variable displayed in response to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the variable display result of the second identification information has a higher probability of displaying the special display result than the variable display result of the first identification information (for example, between the first special chart display result determination table and the second special chart display result determination table, determination data is assigned such that the probability that the special chart display result is determined to be "miss (time-saving)" and that the next variable display will be controlled to the time-saving state is higher, etc.).
The performance execution means includes:
A different effect can be executed depending on whether or not the information related to the variable display stored at the time of the end of the special state includes information that the variable display result is the special display result (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the process of step 059AKS108, etc.),
During control in the special state, a notification is made to launch the game medium to a specific path in the game area (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS090), and when the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state includes information whose variable display result is the special display result and when the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state does not include information whose variable display result is the special display result, a notification is not made to launch the game medium to a normal path different from the specific path until the variable display corresponding to the information regarding the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state is completed (for example, when a right-hit instruction display is possible by the processing of step 059AKS090, a left-hit instruction display is not performed until a left-hit instruction command transmitted in step 059AKS074 is received, i.e., until all the variable displays corresponding to the reservation of the second special chart stored at the end of the time-saving state are completed).
It is characterized by:

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance execution means includes:
In a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, a notification is made that the game medium should be launched along the normal path (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS088, etc.),
At the end of the special state, a notification is made in the variable display of the first identification information that is executed first after the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored in memory has ended, to notify the player that the gaming medium should be released along the normal path (e.g., in the variable display executed after the left hit instruction command is received, i.e., after the variable display corresponding to the remaining reserve has ended, a left hit instruction display is displayed in step 059AKS088).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal firing notification and allows the game to proceed smoothly.

(3) The gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above,
The presentation execution means displays different notification modes for informing the player that the game medium should be launched along the specific path during control of the special state between a case where the special display result is displayed as a result of the variable display of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and a case where the special display result is displayed as a result of the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state (for example, a right-hit instruction display is displayed in a manner corresponding to the command received in step 059AKS090).
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent players from feeling annoyed and losing interest in the game.

(4) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The effect execution means executes a common effect and then executes a different effect in the variable display corresponding to the information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, depending on whether the information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state includes information whose variable display result is the special display result or not (for example, the return effect includes a return effect for a successful return pattern and a return effect for a failed return pattern, both of which execute a common effect (for example, an effect aimed at clearing a specified mission), and as a result, the combination of decorative patterns displayed in a stopped state differs depending on whether the specified mission is cleared or not).
This may be done.

This configuration makes it possible to attract the player's attention after the common performance is executed.

(5) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The performance execution means performs different performances when controlled in the special state between a case where the special display result is displayed as a variable display result of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and a case where the special display result is displayed as a variable display result corresponding to information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state (for example, the pattern of the time-saving promotion performance performed according to the time-saving type is different as shown in FIG. 13-28 ).
This may be done.

This configuration allows different patterns of presentation to be executed depending on the situation, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The display time of the special display result is common when the special display result is displayed as a result of the variable display of the first identification information in a normal state different from the advantageous state and the special state, and when the special display result is displayed as a result of the variable display corresponding to the information related to the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state (for example, the determination time is common when the variable display result corresponding to the remaining reserve is “miss (time reduction)” (time reduction type of time reduction C or D) and when the variable display result of the first special chart during the normal state is “miss (time reduction)” (time reduction type of time reduction A or B)).
This may be done.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the amount of control data from increasing.

(7) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The performance execution means includes:
During the execution of the variable display corresponding to the information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state, no notification is made that the game medium should be released along the specific path (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS136),
In the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed, a notification is made that the game medium should be shot along the specific path (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS090).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal firing notification and allows the game to proceed smoothly.

(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
A first signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state;
A second signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state;
A third signal output means capable of outputting a third signal in response to being controlled to the special state (e.g., a CPU 103 outputting a big win signal 3, etc.);
A fourth signal output means (such as the CPU 103 that outputs a symbol determination signal) capable of outputting a fourth signal in response to the end of the variable display,
When the special display result is displayed as a variable display result, the fourth signal is output by the fourth signal output means at the end of the variable display, and the third signal is output by the third signal output means (for example, when a time-saving state is entered due to the stop of a time-saving pattern, as shown in FIG. 13-37(B), a pattern determination signal indicating the stop of the time-saving pattern is output, and a jackpot signal is output at the timing when the output of the pattern determination signal is stopped, etc.).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the external device can conveniently identify the time-saving state and consecutive win state.

(9) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
A first signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 1) capable of outputting a first signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state;
A second signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 2) capable of outputting a second signal in response to being controlled to the advantageous state or the special state;
and a third signal output means (e.g., a CPU 103 that outputs a big win signal 3) capable of outputting a third signal in response to being controlled to the special state,
The third signal output means continues to output the third signal until the variable display corresponding to the information on the variable display of the second identification information stored at the end of the special state ends (e.g., even if the time-saving state ends, the output of the big win signal 3 is not stopped until the variable display corresponding to the remaining reservation ends),
This may be done.

With this configuration, the external device can conveniently identify the time-saving state and consecutive win state.

(10) The gaming machine according to (8) or (9) above,
The second signal and the third signal are stopped from being output at the same time (for example, at the timing when the output of the symbol determination signal corresponding to the end of the time-saving state is stopped, the output of the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 3 are stopped at the same timing, etc.).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the external device can conveniently identify the time-saving state and consecutive win state.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 061AK)
The feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 061AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 061AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A performance execution means (such as a performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S172) capable of executing a performance corresponding to the variable display,
When a special display result (such as a special display result of "miss (time reduction)") different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, executes the processing of step 059AKS025, etc.),
The performance execution means includes:
A plurality of types of common specific effects can be executed when the variable display result is the specific display result and when the variable display result is the special display result (for example, a plurality of types of reach effects can be executed, etc.),
The rate at which the special display result is obtained varies depending on which of the multiple types of specific effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-12, the rate at which the result is a "miss (time reduction)" varies depending on the type of super reach),
During control in the special state, a notification is made that the gaming medium should be launched along a specific path in the gaming area, and a notification is started in the first variable display executed after the special display result is displayed that the gaming medium should be launched along the specific path (for example, a right-hit instruction display is made in a manner corresponding to the command received in step 059AKS090).
It is characterized by:

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of types of common specific effects in cases where the variable display result becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result (for example, as shown in Figs. 13-11 and 11-12, when a reach effect such as Super Reach B or Super Reach C is executed, a decision value is assigned to result in a plurality of variable display results, such as a jackpot, a miss (time reduction), or a simple miss).
This may be done.

This configuration increases the variety of presentation results and improves the enjoyment of the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
As the variable display, variable display of identification information is performed, and variable display of performance identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern, etc.),
A determination means for determining the variable display result (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S110, etc.);
a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a determination result of the determination means;
a command transmission means (e.g., the CPU 103 that transmits a variable display pattern designation command and a display result designation command in step S268) that transmits a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a common variable display pattern in cases where the variable display result determined by the determination means becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result (for example, it is capable of determining a variable display pattern that performs a super reach B or a super reach C regardless of the variable display result),
The presentation identification information is variably displayed based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, by executing the processes of steps S171 and S172).
When the effect execution means receives a variable display pattern command indicating the common variable display pattern, the effect execution means executes different effects depending on the type of the received variable display result command (for example, even if the result of the determination in step S552 is No, different effects are executed depending on whether the result of the determination in 059AKS101 is Yes or No).
This may be done.

This configuration increases the variety of presentation results and improves the enjoyment of the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect (for example, a time-saving teasing effect can be executed after executing a reach effect of a super reach, etc.),
This may be done.

With this configuration, special effects can be implemented to increase the interest in the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect, and whether or not the special effect will be executed varies depending on the type of the specific effect (for example, the rate at which a time-saving teasing effect is executed varies depending on the type of reach effect to be executed, etc.),
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent special effects from being executed excessively, and can maintain anticipation of a specific display result.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect that suggests whether or not the special display result will occur after executing the specific effect, and the rate at which the special display result will occur when the special effect is executed varies depending on the type of the specific effect (for example, the rate at which a time-saving hinting effect is executed varies depending on the type of reach effect executed, and the rate at which a time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the execution of the time-saving hinting effect also varies).
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent special effects from being executed excessively, and can maintain anticipation of a specific display result.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
The performance execution means includes:
It is possible to further execute a predetermined effect (such as an effect that changes the display mode of the active display) different from the specific effect,
Depending on the execution mode of the predetermined performance, the rate at which the special display result is obtained when the specific performance is executed varies (for example, depending on which display mode the active display changes to, the rate at which the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed varies even in the same type of reach performance of the super reach, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent special effects from being executed excessively, and can maintain anticipation of a specific display result.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect suggesting whether or not the special display result will be obtained after executing the specific effect, and is capable of executing an effect notifying the specific display result after executing the special effect (for example, in a time-saving teasing effect, in addition to whether or not a time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed, it is notified that the advantage will be greater than or equal to time-saving, such as whether or not a jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed).
This may be done.

This configuration helps maintain the expectation of a specific display result.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above,
As the variable display, variable display of identification information is performed, and variable display of performance identification information is performed corresponding to the variable display of the identification information (for example, variable display of a decorative pattern, etc.),
A determination means for determining the variable display result (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S110, etc.);
a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a determination result of the determination means;
a command transmission means (e.g., the CPU 103 that transmits a variable display pattern designation command and a display result designation command in step S268) that transmits a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a common variable display pattern in cases where the variable display result determined by the determination means becomes the specific display result, the special display result, and a predetermined display result different from the specific display result and the special display result (for example, it is capable of determining a variable display pattern that performs a super reach B or a super reach C regardless of the variable display result),
In the variable display of the identification information, a variable display time of the identification information is set based on the variable display result determined by the determination means and the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process of step 059AKS013, etc.),
In the variable display of the performance identification information, a variable display time of the performance identification information is specified based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step S561, etc.),
When the types of the received variable display result commands are different, the performance execution means can execute a common performance if the received variable display pattern command is a variable display pattern command that indicates the common variable display pattern (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a reach performance of Super Reach B even when the content indicated by the display result designation command is different).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal performance.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9),
There are multiple types of special display results (for example, "Time-saving A" to "Time-saving D"),
The state control means can control the special state to a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, can control the time-saving state to a time-saving number of times depending on the time-saving type),
The effect execution means is capable of executing different types of effects in the variable display that becomes the special display result according to the type of the special display result (for example, the execution rate of Super Reach C is higher for the time-saving type "time-saving B" than for the time-saving type "time-saving A", and the pattern of the time-saving teasing effect executed according to the time-saving type is different, etc.).
This may be done.

With this configuration, the number of times the time is reduced varies depending on the performance that is executed, which can attract the player's attention.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (10),
There are multiple types of special display results (for example, "Time-saving A" to "Time-saving D"),
The state control means can control the special state to a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, can control the time-saving state to a time-saving number of times depending on the time-saving type),
A first command indicating the number of times a variable display is executed during control in the special state can be transmitted, and a second command different from the first command can be transmitted after the first command is transmitted (for example, CPU 103 transmitting a display result designation command in step S268 and setting the transmission of a decorative pattern stop command in step S059AKS021, etc.).
The performance execution means determines the performance during the variable display based on the received first command, and specifies the number of times of the variable display to be executed during control in the special state based on the received second command (for example, executes a performance according to the content of the display result designation command, and sets the number of times of time reduction specified by the received pattern determination command in step 059AKS133, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal performance control.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above,
A determination means for determining the variable display result (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S110, etc.);
a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
a command transmission means (e.g., the CPU 103 that transmits a variable display pattern designation command and a display result designation command in step S268) that transmits a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The performance execution means executes a performance based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmission means, and when either one of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command cannot be normally received, restricts the execution of the performance related to the special state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the process of step 059AKS090B, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal presentation while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (12) above,
A determination means for determining the variable display result (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S110, etc.);
a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S111) for determining a variable display pattern of the identification information based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
a command transmission means (e.g., the CPU 103 that transmits a variable display pattern designation command and a display result designation command in step S268) that transmits a variable display result command indicating the variable display result determined by the determination means and a variable display pattern command indicating the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means,
The performance execution means includes:
Executing a performance based on the contents of the variable display result command and the variable display pattern command transmitted by the command transmitting means (for example, executing the process of step S171, etc.);
In the case where the variable display pattern command is normally received but the variable display result is not normally received, if the received variable display pattern command is a specific variable display pattern, a performance related to the special state can be executed (for example, the processing of step 059AKS095 can be executed, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal presentation while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (13) above,
There are multiple types of special display results,
The state control means can control the special state to a different period depending on the type of the special display result (for example, can control the time-saving state to a time-saving number of times depending on the time-saving type),
A first command indicating the number of times a variable display is executed during control in the special state can be transmitted, and a second command different from the first command can be transmitted after the first command is transmitted (for example, CPU 103 transmitting a display result designation command in step S268 and setting the transmission of a decorative pattern stop command in step S059AKS021, etc.).
The performance execution means determines a performance during the variable display based on the received first command, notifies the number of variable displays to be executed during control in the special state based on the received second command, and limits the notification of the number of variable displays to be executed during control in the special state if the second command is not normally received (e.g., performance control CPU 120 executing the process of step 059AKS139, etc.).
This may be done.

This configuration allows for optimal presentation while preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 062AK)
Feature portion 059AK includes the following feature portion 062AK.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 062AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a specific display result is displayed as a variable display result,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) for controlling the progress of a game;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 that executes a performance based on a performance control command, etc.) capable of executing a performance based on information from the game control means,
The game control means includes:
A determination means for determining whether to enter the advantageous state (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step S110, etc.);
A determination means (e.g., the CPU 103 executing the process of step S213) for determining that the advantageous state will be achieved before the determination of the determination means;
A state control means (e.g., the CPU 103 that executes the process of step 059AKS025) that can control to a special state where variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
and an information transmitting means (e.g., a CPU 103 that transmits a performance control command) capable of transmitting to the performance executing means a plurality of types of information including determination result information that can specify that the advantageous state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved;
When a special display result different from the specific display result is displayed as the variable display result in the normal state, the state control means controls from the normal state to the special state based on the special display result (for example, by executing the processing of step 059AKS025),
The determination means is capable of determining that the special state will be entered before the state control means controls the special state (for example, by executing the process of step 059AKS001),
The information transmission means is capable of transmitting special information that can specify that the special state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the special state will be entered (for example, a display result designation command for "miss (time reduction)" can be transmitted, etc.),
The performance execution means includes:
When the determination result information is received, a pre-reading effect can be executed based on the determination result information (for example, the process of step S161 can be executed),
When the determination result information is received after the special information is received, the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the determination result information is restricted (for example, when the determination is Yes in step S059AKS082, the processing of steps S059AKS084 and S1304 is executed, etc.).
It is characterized by:

This configuration allows control according to the game state when the special display result is displayed, improving game enjoyment.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The performance execution means includes:
When new judgment result information is received after receiving the judgment result information indicating that the game is controlled to the advantageous state, the execution of the pre-reading performance based on the newly received judgment result information is further restricted (for example, when a reserve in which the variable display result is "jackpot" is stored in the currently stored reserve memory, the determination is made as Yes in step 059AKS082, etc.),
During the restriction of the look-ahead performance, the look-ahead performance can be executed in a manner similar to the look-ahead performance that can be executed when the determination result information is received after the special information is received (for example, by executing the processes of steps S059AKS084 and S1304),
This may be done.

This configuration can reduce misalignment of presentation due to state transitions and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The performance execution means includes:
When the determination result information is newly received after the determination result information indicating that a suggestive performance suggesting whether or not the game will be controlled to the special state is to be executed is received, the execution of the look-ahead performance based on the newly received determination result information is further restricted (for example, when a hold for executing a time-saving teasing performance is stored in the currently stored hold memory, the determination is made as Yes in step 059AKS082, etc.),
During the restriction of the look-ahead performance, the look-ahead performance can be executed in a manner similar to the look-ahead performance that can be executed when the determination result information is received after the special information is received (for example, by executing the processes of steps S059AKS084 and S1304),
This may be done.

This configuration can prevent a decline in interest in the game when a state transition effect is performed.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The performance execution means does not execute the pre-reading performance in a manner indicating that the degree of advantage controlled to the advantageous state is equal to or greater than a specific degree of advantage during the restriction of the pre-reading performance (for example, does not execute a pending display change performance of "green" or greater as shown in FIG. 13-23(B) ),
This may be done.

This configuration can reduce misalignment of presentation due to state transitions and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
The performance execution means does not execute a specific type of the look-ahead performance during the restriction of the look-ahead performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 13-23(B), when the hold display change performance is restricted, does not execute a hold display change performance of a type that changes to a display mode such as "green" or "red");
This may be done.

This configuration limits the execution of certain types of preview effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game without giving the player unnecessary expectations.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 063AK)
The following describes the characteristic feature 063AK according to this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, the game area 2 formed on the surface of the game board is provided with a left game area 063AK1 on the left side of the top of the image display device 5, and a right game area 063AK2 on the right side of the top of the image display device 5. The left game area 063AK1 and the right game area 063AK2 may be divided, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 or the nail arrangement PL inside the game area 2. When a game ball (game medium) is launched from a ball launching device and shot into the game area 2 and guided to the left game area 063AK1, it is impossible or difficult to guide it to the right game area 063AK2 by being guided along the nail arrangement PL, for example. Also, when a game ball is launched from a ball launching device and shot into the game area 2 and guided to the right game area 063AK2, it is impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area 063AK1 by being guided along the nail arrangement PL, for example.

The left play area 063AK1 is provided with a general winning port 10 and a winning ball device 6A. On the other hand, the right play area 063AK2 is provided with a variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) and a special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means). The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the variable winning ball device 6B.

The general winning opening 10 is kept in a constant open state by a specified ball receiving member so that game balls can always enter. When a game ball enters (enters) the general winning opening 10, a specified number of game balls (for example, 10) are paid out as prize balls.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning port that is always kept in a constant open state where a game ball can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning port, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first start condition, which is a condition for executing the first special game, can be established. The variable winning ball device 6B forms a second start winning port that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see Figure 2). When a game ball enters the second start winning port, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started.

As shown in FIG. 14-2, the special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a large winning opening door 063AK3 that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2) for the large winning opening door (for special electric device), and has a large winning opening 063AK4 that changes between an open state (first state) where it is easy for game balls to win and a closed state (second state) where it is impossible or difficult for game balls to win, by the large winning opening door 063AK3. FIG. 14-2 shows the state in which the large winning opening door 063AK3 has closed the large winning opening 064AK4.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door 063AK3 closes the large winning opening 063AK4, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to win in the large winning opening 063AK4. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the on state, the large winning opening door 063AK3 opens the large winning opening 063AK4, making it easy for the game ball to win in the large winning opening 063AK4. When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 063AK4, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening 063AK4, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters, for example, the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10.

The special variable winning ball device 7 controls the large winning hole 063AK4 to be open in a predetermined manner when the large winning pattern (specific display result) is derived (stopped) as a fixed special pattern in the special game, the variable display result becomes "large winning", and the large winning game state (advantageous state) is controlled. The open state continues until the timing of the passage of a predetermined period (29 seconds in this embodiment) or the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning hole 063AK4 reaches a predetermined number (9 in this embodiment), whichever comes first. A cycle in which the large winning hole 063AK4 is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the large winning game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times in this embodiment) is reached.

In addition, the large prize opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to an open state in a predetermined manner when a small prize pattern (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in a special game, the display result of the variable display becomes a "small prize", and the small prize game state is controlled. Specifically, in the small prize game state, the large prize opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is repeatedly opened and closed. For example, in the small prize game state, an open state of 0.1 seconds and a closed state of 1.0 seconds are repeatedly performed. The action of repeatedly opening and closing the large prize opening 063AK4 is also called opening and closing the large prize opening. The opening and closing of the large prize opening ends when one of the following conditions is met: the 0.1 second open state is repeated a predetermined maximum number of times (10 times in this embodiment), or game balls enter the large prize opening 063AK4 up to a predetermined maximum number of winning balls (10 in this embodiment).

In the characteristic section 063AK, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the player is made to perform a game method (hereinafter referred to as "left hit") in which the game ball is shot into the left game area 063AK1, aiming to win in the general winning port 10 or the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A, while in the time-saving state (low probability high base state), the player is made to perform a game method (hereinafter referred to as "right hit") in which the game ball is shot into the right game area 063AK2, aiming to win in the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B.

In addition, the feature section 063AK is configured so that when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state, the player can aim to win in the big win opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 by hitting the ball to the right.

Feature 063AK performs a right-hit promotion effect to encourage the player to hit to the right during periods when the game is controlled to the time-saving state, big win game state, or small win game state, in which right-hitting is advantageous.

A game ball that enters the large prize opening 063AK4 formed in the special variable prize ball device 7 passes through (enters) the large prize opening switch 063AK5, is detected by the large prize opening switch 063AK5, and then falls into the recess 063AK6. The game ball that falls into the recess 063AK6 is guided rearward by a guide piece (not shown) and passes through the passage opening 063AK7. Behind the passage opening 063AK7, there is a distribution section supply path 063AK8 that extends downward to the left, and a discharge path 063AK9 that extends downward to the right.

In the big win game state, all game balls that enter the big win opening 063AK4 are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in the small win game state, only one game ball among the game balls that enter the big win opening 063AK4 flows down through the distribution section supply path 063AK8 to the distribution section 063AK18 described below, and all game balls other than that one game ball are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9.

Figures 14-3(a) to 14-3(c) show the configuration of the special variable winning ball device 7 with respect to the characteristic part 063AK, as seen from the arrow I-I in Figure 14-2. As shown in Figure 14-3(a), the special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a roughly L-shaped rotating piece 063AK10 and a distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 that moves the plunger 063AK11 left and right by switching between an on state and an off state. The rotating piece 063AK10 has a connecting protrusion 063AK13 connected to the plunger 063AK11, and rotates around the rotation axis 063AK14 by switching between the on state and the off state of the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12.

As shown in FIG. 14-3(a), when the sorting section supply solenoid 063AK12 is in the on state, the curved surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10 faces forward. Also, the bottom surface of the sorting section supply path 063AK8 is located lower than the bottom surface of the discharge path 063AK9 (it is located below). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-3(a), the game ball A1 that first passes through the passage opening 063AK7 falls into the sorting section supply path 063AK8 and its movement is restricted by the curved surface 063AK15 of the rotating piece 063AK10. As a result, the game ball A1 is held by the rotating piece 063AK10. The game ball A2, which passed through 063AK7 following the game ball A1, is blocked by the game ball A1 and cannot enter the distribution section supply path 063AK8, so changes direction to the right as shown in FIG. 14-3(b). The game ball A2 continues to flow down the discharge path 063AK9. The discharge path 063AK9 is provided with a discharge count switch 063AK16, and the game balls that have passed through the discharge path 063AK9 are detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16. The game balls that have passed through the discharge path 063AK9 are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. When the sorting section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled from the on state to the off state while the rotating piece 063AK10 is holding the game ball A1, the plunger 063AK11 pops out from the main body of the sorting section supply solenoid 063AK12, as shown in FIG. 14-3(c). This causes the rotating piece 063AK10 to rotate about the pivot 063AK14, flicking the game ball A1 toward the sorting section supply path 063AK8. The flicked game ball A1 flows down the sorting section supply path 063AK8.

As shown in FIG. 14-4(a), the game ball A3 that flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8 passes through the distribution section passing switch 063AK17, and after being detected by the distribution section passing switch 063AK17, enters the distribution section 063AK18.

The distribution unit 063AK18 is provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and guides the game balls that flow down through the distribution unit supply path 063AK8, and causes them to pass through either the jackpot area 063AK19 (specific area), the time-saving area 063AK20 (special area), or the loss area 063AK21.

The jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 are all areas (components) that are configured to allow game balls to pass through, and are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7. The jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21 are provided below the distribution section 063AK18.

The game ball that enters the jackpot area 063AK19 passes through the jackpot area passage switch 063AK22, is detected by the jackpot area passage switch 063AK22, and is then discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the jackpot area discharge path (not shown). The game ball that is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the jackpot area discharge path is detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special game, a small win symbol is derived and displayed, and the game is controlled to a small win game state. When the large win opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, the game ball that entered the large win opening 063AK4 passes through the large win area 063AK19, and the game is controlled to a large win game state after the small win game state ends.

The game ball that enters the time-saving area 063AK20 passes through the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23, is detected by the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23, and is then discharged through a time-saving area discharge path (not shown) to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7. The game ball that is discharged through the time-saving area discharge path to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 is detected by a time-saving area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the normal state, the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game, and the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. Based on this, a time-saving transition control is performed to control the game to a time-saving state (special state) in which variable display is easier to execute than in the normal state for a predetermined period after the end of the small win game state. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game, and the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. In this case, the time-saving transition control is not performed based on the passage of the game ball. In other words, if the game is already in the time-saving state, even if a game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the game is configured so that the time-saving transition control is not performed to extend the period during which the game is in the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, in the normal state, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special game and the small winning game state is controlled and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball that entered the large winning opening 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to a closed state and the small winning game state ends, and when the next variable display is started, time-saving transition control based on the passage is performed and the game is controlled from the normal state to the time-saving state. In other words, when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, it is configured not to be controlled to the time-saving state until the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to a closed state. With this configuration, after one game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, another game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 or the miss area 063AK21, which can cause inconsistency between the control of the game state and the presentation after the end of the small win game state, confusing the player and reducing his interest in the game. In other words, with this configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate control according to the state.

The game ball that enters the losing area 063AK21 passes through the losing area passage switch 063AK24, is detected by the losing area passage switch 063AK24, and is then discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the losing area discharge path (not shown). The game ball that is discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the losing area discharge path is detected by the losing area discharge count switch (not shown).

In the special game, when the small win symbol is derived and displayed and the game is controlled to a small win game state, and the large win opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball that entered the large win opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21, after the small win game state ends, no control is performed to change the game state based on the passage.

The jackpot area light-emitting section 063AK25 is provided at the top and bottom of the jackpot area 063AK19. The time-saving area light-emitting section 063AK26 is provided at the top and bottom of the time-saving area 063AK20. The loss area light-emitting section 063AK27 is provided at the top and bottom of the loss area 063AK21. The jackpot area light-emitting section 063AK25, the time-saving area light-emitting section 063AK26, and the loss area light-emitting section 063AK27 are configured to be visible to the player, and are equipped with light-emitting elements such as LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and are configured to be able to emit light. Details will be described later, but in the feature section 063AK, a performance is performed in which the jackpot area light-emitting section 063AK25, the time-saving area light-emitting section 063AK26, and the loss area light-emitting section 063AK27 are illuminated in a predetermined manner. FIG. 14-4(a) shows a state in which the jackpot area light-emitting section 063AK25, the time-saving area light-emitting section 063AK26, and the loss area light-emitting section 063AK27 are all turned off.

The distribution unit 063AK18 is equipped with a distribution member 063AK28. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a left inclined surface 063AK29 facing diagonally upward to the right, and a right inclined surface 063AK30 facing diagonally upward to the left. A game ball that enters the distribution unit 063AK18 is guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through either the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, or the loss region 063AK21.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-4(b), the distribution unit 063AK18 is provided with a jackpot area entrance 063AK31, a time-saving area entrance 063AK32, and a miss area entrance 063AK33. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time-saving area entrance 063AK32, and the miss area entrance 063AK33 are all configured to allow game balls to pass through, and are arranged in the left-right direction. The jackpot area entrance 063AK31 is connected to the jackpot area 063AK19, and a game ball that passes through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. The time-saving area entrance 063AK32 is connected to the time-saving area 063AK20, and a game ball that passes through the time-saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. The loss area entrance 063AK33 is connected to the loss area 063AK21, and a game ball that passes through the loss area entrance 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is disposed above the jackpot area entrance 063AK31, the time-saving area entrance 063AK32, and the loss area entrance 063AK33. The distribution member 063AK28 is formed with a passage opening 063AK34 through which the game balls can pass. In the following, for ease of understanding, the P coordinate axis shown in FIG. 14-4(b) is set. The P coordinate axis is set parallel to the left-right direction. The distribution member 063AK28 is driven by a distribution member motor (not shown), and moves back and forth along the left-right direction between position P6 as the left end position shown in FIG. 14-4(b) and position P3 as the right end position. FIG. 14-4(b) shows a state in which the distribution member 063AK28 is located at position P0 as the center position (origin position).

When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at position P0 shown in Fig. 14-4(b), as shown in Fig. 14-5(a), the game ball A4 that enters the distribution unit 063AK18 passes through the passage opening 063AK34 formed in the distribution member 063AK28 and passes through the time-saving area entrance 063AK32. The game ball A4 that passes through the time-saving area entrance 063AK32 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. When the distribution member 063AK28 is located at position P3 shown in Fig. 14-4(b), as shown in Fig. 14-5(b), the game ball A5 that enters the distribution unit 063AK18 hits the left inclined surface 063AK29 formed on the distribution member 063AK28, moves left along the inclination direction, and passes through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 formed on the left side of the distribution unit 063AK18. The game ball A5 that passes through the jackpot area entrance 063AK31 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19. When the sorting member 063AK28 is located at position P6 shown in FIG. 14-4(b), as shown in FIG. 14-5(c), the game ball A6 that enters the sorting section 063AK18 hits the right-side inclined surface 063AK30 formed on the sorting member 063AK28, moves to the right along the inclination direction, and passes through the loss area entrance 063AK33 formed on the right side of the sorting section 063AK18. The game ball A6 that passes through the loss area entrance 063AK33 passes through the loss area 063AK21.

The distribution member 063AK28 is configured to be capable of executing operations according to the distribution member operation pattern shown in FIG. 14-6. FIG. 14-6 shows the change in the position of the distribution member 063AK28 over time when the distribution member 063AK28 is operating according to the distribution member operation pattern, and the change in the area through which the game balls pass over time. When the distribution member 063AK28 is not operating according to the distribution member operation pattern, it is stopped at position P0 shown in FIG. 14-4 (b).

As shown in FIG. 14-6, when the distributing member 063AK28 starts to operate according to the distributing member operation pattern, it stops at position P0 for a predetermined center waiting time, then moves to the right from position P0 at a constant speed, passes position P1 to the right of position P0 shown in FIG. 14-4(b), passes position P2 to the right of position P1 shown in FIG. 14-4(b), and reaches position P3 shown in FIG. 14-4(b). The time required for the distributing member 063AK28 to reach position P3 from position P0 may be predetermined as the center-right movement time. Having reached position P3, the distributing member 063AK28 stops at position P3 for a predetermined right-end waiting time. Next, the distributing member 063AK28 moves to the left from position P3 at a constant speed, passes position P2, passes position P1, and reaches position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach position P0 from position P3 may be predetermined as a right-center movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached position P0 stops at position P0 for a center waiting time. Next, the distribution member 063AK28 moves leftward from position P0 at a constant speed, passes position P4 on the left side of position P0 shown in FIG. 14-4(b), passes position P5 on the left side of position P4 shown in FIG. 14-4(b), and reaches position P6 shown in FIG. 14-4(b). The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach position P6 from position P0 may be predetermined as a center-left movement time. The distribution member 063AK28 that has reached position P6 stops at position P6 for a predetermined left-end waiting time. The distribution member 063AK28 then moves from position P6 to the right at a constant speed, passing through position P5, then through position P4, and reaches position P0. The time required for the distribution member 063AK28 to reach the central position P0 from position P6 may be predetermined as the left-center movement time. Once the distribution member 063AK28 has reached position P0, it repeats the above-described operation again. In this way, the distribution member 063AK28 moves back and forth in the left-right direction between positions P3 and P6 by operating according to the distribution member operation pattern.

When the distribution member 063AK28 is operating according to the distribution member operation pattern, as shown in FIG. 14-6, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passes through either the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, or the miss region 063AK21, depending on the change in the position of the distribution member 063AK28. Specifically, the period during which the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P2 and P3 is the jackpot region passing period during which the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passes through the jackpot region 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. The period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P0 and P1 and the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P0 and P4 are time-saving region passing periods during which the game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 are guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and pass through the time-saving region 063AK20. The period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P5 and P6 is a loss region passing period during which the game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 are guided by the distribution member 063AK28 and pass through the loss region 063AK21. The period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P1 and P2, and the period when the distribution member 063AK28 is located between positions P4 and P5 are uncertain passing area periods during which it is not certain whether the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 063AK18 will enter the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 as a result of being guided by the distribution member 063AK28.

In this embodiment, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game and the game is controlled to a small win game state, a small win start effect (small win fanfare effect) that notifies the player that control to the small win game state has begun is executable, and the distribution member 063AK28 is configured to start operating according to the distribution member operation pattern in response to the start of the small win start effect. As shown in FIG. 14-6, the small win start effect begins in response to the passage of a predetermined special win confirmation display time after the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game, and ends in response to the passage of the small win start effect time.

In this embodiment, in the small win game state, as shown in FIG. 14-6, the opening and closing of the large prize opening begins in response to the end of the small win start performance. As described above, the opening and closing of the large prize opening ends when one of the following conditions is met: the 0.1 second open state is repeated up to the specified upper limit of opening times, or game balls enter the large prize opening 063AK4 up to the specified upper limit of winning balls.

In this embodiment, in the small win game state, as shown in FIG. 14-6, when the small win start performance ends and the opening and closing of the large prize opening begins, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the ON state, and the rotating piece 063AK10 is in a state where it can hold the game ball that has entered the distribution section supply path 063AK8. After being controlled to the ON state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state in response to the passage of a predetermined game ball holding time having elapsed. As a result, the rotating piece 063AK10 flicks the game ball it has been holding toward the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the flicked game ball flows down the distribution section supply path 063AK8 and enters the distribution section 063AK18. With this configuration, in this embodiment, only one of the game balls that entered the large winning port 063AK4 in the small winning game state flows down to the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8, and the other game balls are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the big winning game state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is not controlled to the on state. With this configuration, in this embodiment, all game balls that entered the large winning port 063AK4 in the big winning game state are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. In the example shown in FIG. 14-6, at time t0, when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the on state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the off state, and the game ball that was deflected by the rotating piece 063AK10 enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 14-6, the time t0 when the game ball entered the distribution section 063AK18 is included in the jackpot area passing period. Therefore, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t0 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28.

The game ball holding time is set to be longer than the time required to open and close the large prize opening a predetermined maximum number of times during a small win game state. In other words, the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 after the large prize opening has been opened and closed.

As shown in FIG. 14-6, the timing at which the gaming ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 (time t0 in the example shown in FIG. 14-6) is specified by the special chart confirmation display time, the small win start presentation time, and the gaming ball holding time.

In this embodiment, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, the special chart confirmation display time and game ball holding time are set to the same time regardless of the type of small win, while the small win start performance time is set to one of several types of time depending on the type of small win. With this configuration, the timing at which the game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 is configured to differ depending on the type of small win.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, the small win start presentation time is set to one of the predetermined first to third specific times shown in FIG. 14-7 depending on the type of small win. As shown in FIG. 14-7, the second specific time (e.g., 12 seconds) is longer than the first specific time (e.g., 11 seconds), and the third specific time (e.g., 13 seconds) is longer than the second specific time.

As shown in FIG. 14-7, when the small win start performance time is set to the first specific time, the small win start performance starts in response to the lapse of the special chart fixed display time after the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the special chart game, and then the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the ON state at the timing when the small win start performance ends in response to the lapse of the first specific time. After that, at time t1 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state, and the game ball that has been deflected by the rotating piece 063AK10 enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 14-7, since time t1 is included in the loss area passing period, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t1 passes through the loss area 063AK21 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. In other words, if the small win start performance time is set to the first specific time, a game ball that enters the large winning hole 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the loss area 063AK21.

When the small win start performance time is set to the second specific time, the small win start performance starts in response to the lapse of the special chart confirmation display time after the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the special chart game, and then the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the ON state at the timing when the small win start performance ends in response to the lapse of the second specific time. After that, at time t2 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state, and the game ball that has been deflected by the rotating piece 063AK10 enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 14-7, since time t2 is included in the time-saving area passing period, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t2 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. In other words, if the small win start performance time is set to the second specific time, a game ball that enters the large winning hole 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20.

When the small win start performance time is set to the third specific time, the small win start performance starts in response to the lapse of the special chart fixed display time after the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the special chart game, and then the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the ON state at the timing when the small win start performance ends in response to the lapse of the third specific time. After that, at time t3 when the game ball holding time has elapsed since the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 was controlled to the ON state, the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 is controlled to the OFF state, and the game ball that has been deflected by the rotating piece 063AK10 enters the distribution section 063AK18. As shown in FIG. 14-7, since time t3 is included in the jackpot area passing period, the game ball that entered the distribution section 063AK18 at time t3 passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. In other words, if the small win start performance time is set to the third specific time, a game ball that enters the big win hole 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the big win area 063AK19.

As described above, depending on whether the small win start performance time is set to the first specific time to the third specific time, the game ball that enters the large winning hole 063AK4 in the small win game state passes through the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21. In the feature section 063AK, by setting the small win start performance time to one of the first specific time to the third specific time depending on the type of small win, the game ball that enters the large winning hole 063AK4 in the small win game state passes through the area that corresponds to the type of small win among the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21.

In feature section 063AK, when a variable display (hereinafter referred to as "small win variation") is executed in which a small win pattern is derived and displayed in a special chart game and the display result of the variable display becomes "small win", as a performance corresponding to the small win variation, as shown in FIG. 14-8(a), in addition to the right hit promotion performance and small win start performance described above, a time-saving suggestion performance, a passing encouragement performance, and a passing notification performance can be executed.

In this embodiment, as a right-hit promotion effect, a right-hit promotion image showing an arrow pointing to the right is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As described above, the right-hit promotion effect is executed during the period controlled to the time-saving state and the big win game state, and is also executed during the period controlled to the small win game state, as shown in FIG. 14-8(a).

In addition, in this embodiment, as a small win start effect, an effect is executed in which a right arrow image and a small win start image are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The right arrow image has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right, and is an effect image showing the message "Aim right!". The small win start image shows the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7 and shows the message "Put the ball here!", and is an effect image that encourages the player to win the game ball into the special variable winning ball device 7. As described above, the small win start effect is started in response to the small win pattern being derived and displayed in the special chart game and control to the small win game state being started, and then ends in response to the small win start effect time having elapsed.

The time-saving suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state, and is configured to be executable during the execution of a small win variation. As described above, in the normal state, the game ball that entered the large winning port 063AK4 in the small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, and the game is controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the small win game state. In response to this, in the feature part 063AK, in the normal state, when a small win variation is executed, a time-saving suggestion effect is configured to be executable during the execution of the small win variation as an effect that suggests that a small win pattern will be derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game. With this configuration, in the normal state, a variety of effects can be executed in the variable display when a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game, and interest in the game can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 14-8(a), when a normal reach effect, which is a reach effect of a normal reach, a super reach effect, which is a reach effect of a super reach, and a time-saving suggestion effect are executed in a small win fluctuation, the time-saving suggestion effect starts after a reach is established, a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach effect is executed, and then ends when a small win pattern is derived and displayed in the special chart game and the small win fluctuation ends. Details of the time-saving suggestion effect are explained below with reference to FIG. 14-9(a) and FIG. 14-9(b).

As shown in FIG. 14-9(a), when the time-saving suggestion performance starts, a predetermined losing pattern (in this embodiment, "767") is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner different from the derived display in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5. Next, a re-variable display of the decorative pattern is executed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and then a time-saving suggestion pattern suggesting that the time will be controlled to the time-saving state shown in FIG. 14-9(b) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. The time-saving suggestion pattern is a combination of decorative patterns in which a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a decorative pattern showing the message "Chance" is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. Returning to FIG. 14-9(a), after the time-saving suggestion symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols are re-variably displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, and the time-saving suggestion performance ends when the small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game and the small win variation ends.

Returning to FIG. 14-8(a), the passing teasing effect is an effect suggesting that the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small prize game state will pass through either the large prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21 (an effect that suggests passing through the large prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21). The passing teasing effect is started in response to the end of the small prize start effect and the start of the opening and closing of the large prize opening, and ends in response to the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small prize game state passing through either the large prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21.

The passing notification effect is an effect that notifies the player whether a game ball that entered the large winning opening 063AK4 in a small winning game state has passed through the big winning area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21. In this embodiment, the passing notification effect is executed as a small winning end effect (small winning ending effect) that notifies the player that control to the small winning game state is ending. The passing notification effect is started in response to a game ball that entered the large winning opening 063AK4 in a small winning game state passing through the big winning area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21, and then ends in response to the passage of a predetermined passing notification effect time.

In this embodiment, the passing notification display time is set to any one of the predetermined first to third special times depending on whether the game ball that entered the big winning port 063AK4 in the small winning game state passed through the big winning area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21, the passing notification display time is set to the first special time (for example, 5 seconds). Also, in the time-saving state, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the passing notification display time is set to the first special time in the same manner as when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21, in response to the fact that the time-saving transition control is not performed based on the passing. In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the passing notification display time is set to the second special time (for example, 20 seconds). When the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19, the passing notification performance time is set to the third special time (e.g., 10 seconds). With this configuration, it is possible to perform appropriate control depending on the situation.

As shown in FIG. 14-8(b), in feature section 063AK, the presence or absence of the time-saving suggestion effect, the passing teasing effect, and the passing notification effect, or the performance mode, are configured to differ depending on whether a small win fluctuation is executed in the normal state or when a small win fluctuation is executed in the time-saving state.

Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-8(b), when a small hit variation is executed in the normal state, the time-saving suggestion effect can be executed during the small hit variation, whereas when a small hit variation is executed in the time-saving state, the time-saving suggestion effect is not executed during the small hit variation. In other words, in the feature part 063AK, it is configured to be possible to execute different effects during the small hit variation when a small hit variation is executed in the normal state and a small hit pattern is derived and displayed, and when a small hit variation is executed in the time-saving state and a small hit pattern is derived and displayed.

In the characteristic section 063AK, when in the normal state, a time-saving indication effect can be executed when a small win variation is executed, so that the player can have a sense of anticipation that the time-saving transition control will be performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the feature part 063AK, when the time-saving state is reached, the time-saving indication effect is not executed when a small win variation is executed. This prevents the player from having expectations that the time-saving state will be entered based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, even though time-saving transition control based on the game ball's passage through the time-saving area 063AK20 is not executed, and thus prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In this way, in feature unit 063AK, when a small win variation is executed in the normal state and a small win pattern is derived and displayed, and when a small win variation is executed in the time-saving state and a small win pattern is derived and displayed, different effects can be executed during the execution of the small win variation, so that suitable effects can be executed depending on the state.

In the characteristic part 063AK, as shown in FIG. 14-8(b), when a small win variation is executed in the normal state, when the small win variation is ended and the game state is controlled to the small win game state and the large prize opening is performed, a normal time passing prompting effect (special effect) is executed as a passing prompting effect, which is an effect that suggests passing through the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21. On the other hand, when a small win variation is executed in the time-saving state, when the game state is controlled to the small win game state and the large prize opening is performed, a time-saving time passing prompting effect (special effect) is executed as a passing prompting effect, which is an effect that suggests passing through the big win area 063AK19 and the miss area 063AK21, without suggesting passing through the time-saving area 063AK29.

In this embodiment, the normal time passing teasing effect is an effect that suggests that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the loss area 063AK21. In contrast, in this embodiment, the time-saving time passing teasing effect is an effect that suggests that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19 and the loss area 063AK21 without suggesting that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20.

In the characteristic section 063AK, when the small win game state is entered after the small win fluctuation ends in the normal state and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, a normal time passing incentive is executed, so that the player feels a sense of anticipation for the time-saving state being entered based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, and interest in the game can be increased.

On the other hand, in the characteristic part 063AK, when the game is controlled to a small win game state after the small win fluctuation ends in the time-saving state and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, a time-saving time passage stimulation effect is executed, thereby preventing the player from having expectations that the game ball will be controlled to the time-saving state based on its passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, even though no control based on the game ball's passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 is performed, and thus preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In this way, in the characteristic section 063AK, when the small win fluctuation is ended in the normal state and the small win game state is controlled to the open state and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, the normal time passing prompting effect is executed, while when the small win fluctuation is ended in the time-saving state and the small win game state is controlled to the open state and the time-saving time passing prompting effect is executed, so that an appropriate effect can be performed according to the state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-10(a), the normal time passing prompting image AK1 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, the jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the loss area light emitting unit 063AK27 of the special variable winning ball device 7 are illuminated, and a normal time passing prompting sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, indicating the message, "Is it a jackpot? Is it a time saving? Is it a loss?".

The normal passing teaser image AK1 includes a jackpot area passing teaser image AK2 that displays the message "jackpot" and suggests that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, a time-saving area passing teaser image AK3 that displays the message "time-saving" and suggests that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20, and a miss area passing teaser image AK4 that displays the message "miss" and suggests that the game ball will pass through the miss area 063AK21.

In the characteristic part 063AK, the display mode of the normal time passing teasing image AK1 is configured to suggest the expectation (proportion) of being controlled to a big win game state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19 in the small win game state, the expectation of being controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state, and the expectation of the game ball passing through the miss area 063AK21 in the small win game state. With this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display mode of the normal time passing teasing image AK1 and increase the interest in the game. Specifically, in this embodiment, in the normal time passing teasing image AK1, the big win area passing teasing image AK2 is displayed in a display area according to the expectation that the game ball will pass through the big win area 063AK19 in the small win game state (the expectation that the game state will be controlled to the big win game state after the small win game state ends), the time-saving area passing teasing image AK3 is displayed in a display area according to the expectation that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state (the expectation that the game state will be controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends), and the miss area passing teasing image AK4 is displayed in a display area according to the expectation that the game ball will pass through the miss area 063AK21 in the small win game state.

As described later, in this embodiment, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game (special symbol game using the second special symbol), the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state at a higher rate than when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol game (special symbol game using the first special symbol), and the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game state. Correspondingly, in this embodiment, in the normal state, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol game and the game is controlled to the small win game state, the normal time passing prompting image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 14-10(a) in the normal time passing prompting performance, while when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the second special symbol game and the game is controlled to the small win game state, the normal time passing prompting image AK1 is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. 14-10(b) in the normal time passing prompting performance. In the display mode shown in FIG. 14-10(b), the display area of the time-saving area passing prompting image AK2 is larger than that in the display mode shown in FIG. 14-10(a). The normal time passing prompting effect shown in FIG. 14-10(b), which is executed when the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the second special chart game and the game is controlled to a small win game state, is the same as the normal time passing prompting effect shown in FIG. 14-10(a), which is executed when the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the first special chart game and the game is controlled to a small win game state, except that the display mode of the normal time passing prompting image AK1 is different.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14-10(c), the time-saving time passage teasing effect is performed by displaying a time-saving time passage teasing image AK5 on the screen of the image display device 5, illuminating the jackpot area light-emitting unit 063AK25 and the miss area light-emitting unit 063AK27 without illuminating the time-saving area light-emitting unit 063AK26 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and outputting a time-saving time passage teasing sound showing the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a miss?" from the speakers 8L and 8R. The time-saving time passage teasing image AK5 includes a jackpot area passage teasing image AK2 and a miss area passage teasing image AK4, but does not include a time-saving area passage teasing image AK3.

Returning to FIG. 14-8(b), in the normal state, when a game ball that entered the large winning opening 063AK4 in a small win game state passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, a normal-time jackpot area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect, notifying the player that the game ball has passed through the jackpot area 063AK19 and will be controlled to the jackpot game state after the small win game state ends. In this embodiment, as the normal-time jackpot area passing notification effect, a normal-time jackpot area passing notification image showing the message "V" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, a time-saving area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the time-saving area 063AK20 and will be controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends. In this embodiment, as the time-saving area passing notification effect, a time-saving area passing notification image showing the message "Lucky!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, when a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 063AK4 passes through the loss area 063AK21 during a small win game state, a loss area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect to notify the player that the game ball has passed through the loss area 063AK21 and that no control to change the game state will be performed after the small win game state ends. In this embodiment, as the loss area passing notification effect, a performance is executed in which a loss area passing notification image showing the message "Too bad!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In contrast, in the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 14-8(b), when a game ball that entered the large prize entry port 063AK4 in a small win game state passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, a time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect different from the normal jackpot area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect, notifying the player that the game ball has passed through the jackpot area 063AK19 and will be controlled to the jackpot game state after the small win game state ends. In this embodiment, as the time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect, a time-saving jackpot area passing notification image showing the message "BONUS!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the time-saving state, when a game ball that entered the large winning hole 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the above-mentioned loss area passing notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect in response to the fact that time-saving transition control based on the passing is not performed.

In the time-saving state, when a game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 during a small win game state passes through the loss area 063AK21, a loss area passage notification effect is executed as a passing notification effect.

As shown in FIG. 14-8(a) and FIG. 14-8(b), in the feature portion 063AK, a small winning pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to an open state and then the large winning opening 063AK is controlled to a closed state, different effects can be executed when the game ball passes through the large winning area 063AK19 and when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to the effects executed when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to a closed state, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 063AK, as shown in FIG. 14-8(b), in the normal state, a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game, and when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, a time-saving area passing notification effect is executed, so that the player is made aware that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends based on the game ball having passed through the time-saving area 063AK20, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

On the other hand, in the characteristic part 063AK, when a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game during the time-saving state, and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, a notification of passing through a losing area is executed. This prevents the player from having expectations that the game ball will be controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, even though no time-saving transition control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

In this way, the feature unit 063AK is configured to be able to execute different effects depending on whether a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game in the normal state and the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state, or whether a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special game in the time-saving state and the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state and the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, thereby allowing suitable control to be performed depending on the state when the small win pattern is derived and displayed.

More specifically, the characteristic part 063AK is configured to be able to execute the same miss area passing notification effect when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state and when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21 in the time-saving state and does not pass through either the big win area 063AK19 or the time-saving area 063AK20. With this configuration, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state, even though no control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-8(b), the feature section 063AK is configured to be able to execute a time-saving jackpot area passage notification effect that differs from the normal time jackpot area passage notification effect executed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time-saving state. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to the effect executed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this embodiment, as described later, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the second special game that is likely to be executed in the time-saving state, and the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state, a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the first special game that is likely to be executed in the normal state, and the game ball is controlled to a "jackpot A" that is more advantageous to the player than a "jackpot B" after the end of the small win game state at a higher rate than when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in the open state. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to whether the time-saving jackpot area passing notification effect or the normal jackpot area passing notification effect is executed when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Figure 14-11 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S110 of the special symbol process processing as normal processing of the special symbol for feature part 063AK.

When the normal special symbol processing starts, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 063AKS101). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 063AKS101, the second reserved memory count value stored in the second reserved memory count counter in the RAM 102 may be read, and it may be judged whether the read value is "0" or not.

In this embodiment, for example, a second special symbol reservation memory unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has entered the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a second start winning has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates the reserved number with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) in the second start winning port, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition by the game ball's entry, as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In this way, the reserved data stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved memory information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a specific mode (for example, a reach effect, etc.).

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; No), the CPU 103 reads out numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern as reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to the reserved number "1" (step 063AKS102). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 063AKS102, for example, the second reserved memory count value is updated by subtracting 1 from the second special chart reserved memory count, and the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries (step 063AKS103). Also, in the processing of step 063AKS103, the total reserved memory count value stored in the total reserved memory counter in RAM 102 may be updated to subtract 1 from the total reserved memory count value. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the variable special chart designation buffer, to "2" (step 063AKS104).

When the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 063AKS101 (step 063AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 063AKS114). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 063AKS114, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in RAM 102 is read and it is determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 063AKS114 is executed when it is determined in step 063AKS101 that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0", and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern (special pattern 2) is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (special pattern 1).

Note that the special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and for example, the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

In this embodiment, for example, a first special symbol reservation memory unit is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has entered the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a first start winning has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates the reserved number with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball's entry, as reserved data until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). In this way, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special symbol game using the first special symbol is reserved, and serves as reserved memory information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is decided to control to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be a specific mode (for example, a reach effect, etc.).

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; No), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 063AKS115). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer or the like.

Following the processing of step 063AKS115, for example, the first reserved memory count value is updated by subtracting 1 from the first special pattern reserved memory count, and the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special pattern reserved memory unit (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries (step 063AKS116). Also, in the processing of step 063AKS116, the total reserved memory count value stored in the total reserved memory counter in RAM 102 may be updated to subtract 1 from the total reserved memory count value. After that, the CPU 103 updates the variable special pattern designation buffer value to "1" (step 063AKS117).

After executing either the process of step 063AKS104 or 063AKS117, the CPU 103 selects and sets the special symbol display result determination table corresponding to the variable special symbol designation buffer value as the table to be used for determining whether the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is a "big hit," "small hit," or "miss" (step 063AKS105). For example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "1," the first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(a) is set as the table to be used. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is "2," the second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(b) is set as the table to be used.

The first special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(a) is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to a big hit game state or whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to a small hit game state, before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. The second special symbol display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(b) is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to a big hit game state or whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to a small hit game state, before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the first special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(a) and the second special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(b), the numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display results of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss".

In the first special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(a) and the second special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(b), the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is determination data assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the special chart display result as a "big win" to a big win game state, or whether or not to control the special chart display result as a "small win" to a small win game state.

In addition, in the second special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(b), a larger number of determination values are assigned to the special chart display result of "small win" compared to the first special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(a). In other words, in the first special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(a) and the second special chart display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(b), determination data is assigned so that there is a higher probability that the special chart display result will be determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state in the second special chart display result determination table.

Returning to FIG. 14-11, following the processing of step 063AKS105, the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result stored in the variable random number buffer with the determination value assigned to "jackpot" in the special chart display result determination table selected in step 063AKS105 to determine whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS106).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS106, the CPU 103 judges whether or not it has been determined in step 063AKS106 that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS107). If it is determined that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS107; Yes), the jackpot flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to an ON state (step 063AKS108). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-13(b) as a table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of multiple types (step 063AKS109). The CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the jackpot type determination table set in step 063AKS109 to determine the jackpot type as either "jackpot A" or "jackpot B" shown in FIG. 14-13(a) depending on whether the special pattern ("variable special pattern") variably displayed in the special pattern game is the first special pattern or the second special pattern (whether the variable special pattern buffer value is "1" or "2") (step 063AKS110).

Both "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" shown in Figure 14-13 (a) are "non-probable jackpots" that are not controlled to a probable variable state after the jackpot gaming state ends. When controlled to "jackpot A", the game is controlled to a time-saving state for the period until the variable display is executed five times after the jackpot gaming state ends. When controlled to "jackpot B", the game is controlled to a time-saving state for the period until the variable display is executed once after the jackpot gaming state ends. "Jackpot A", which is controlled to a time-saving state for a longer period after the jackpot gaming state ends than "jackpot B", is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B". In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-13(b), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, the jackpot type is determined to be either "jackpot A" or "jackpot B", while when the variable special chart is the second special chart, the jackpot type is determined to be "jackpot A" and not "jackpot B". With this configuration, when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed in the second special chart game, it is controlled to "jackpot A", which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B", at a higher rate than when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed in the first special chart game.

Returning to FIG. 14-11, after executing the processing of step 063AKS110, the CPU 103 stores the determined jackpot type by, for example, setting a jackpot type buffer value, which is the stored value of a jackpot type buffer provided in the RAM 102, corresponding to the jackpot type determined in step 063AK110 (step 063AKS111). As an example, if the jackpot type is "jackpot A", the jackpot type buffer value can be set to "0", and if it is "jackpot B", the value can be set to "1".

In step 063AKS107, if it is determined that the variable display result was not determined to be a "big hit" in step 063AKS106 (step 063AKS107; No), the CPU 103 compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result stored in the variable random number buffer with the determination value assigned to "small hit" in the special chart display result determination table selected in step 063AKS105 to determine whether or not the special chart display result is a "small hit" (step 063AKS118).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS118, the CPU 103 judges whether or not it has been determined in step 063AKS118 that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 063AKS119). Then, when it is determined that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 063AKS119; Yes), the small win flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to an ON state (step 063AKS120). After that, the CPU 103 selects and sets the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 14-14(b) as a table to be used for determining the small win type as one of multiple types (step 063AKS121). The CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the small win type determination table set in step 063AKS121 to determine the small win type as one of "small win A" to "small win E" shown in FIG. 14-14(a) depending on whether the variable special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart (whether the variable special chart buffer value is "1" or "2") (step 063AKS122).

As shown in FIG. 14-14(a), "small hit A" and "small hit B" are types of small hits in which a game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to be in an open state in a small hit game state, passes through the large winning area 063AK19 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start presentation time is set to the third specific time described above. As described above, when the small hit start presentation time is set to the third specific time, the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the large winning area 063AK19. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the large winning area 063AK19. If a game ball that entered the large prize entry port 063AK4 during the small prize game state of "small prize A" passes through the large prize area 063AK19, the game state will be controlled to the large prize game state of "large prize A" after the small prize game state ends. In contrast, if a game ball that entered the large prize entry port 063AK4 during the small prize game state of "small prize B" passes through the large prize area 063AK19, the game state will be controlled to the large prize game state of "large prize B" after the small prize game state ends.

"Small hit C" and "Small hit D" are small hit types in which a game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to be in an open state in a small hit game state, passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start performance time is set to the above-mentioned second specific time. As described above, when the small hit start performance time is set to the second specific time, the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. Therefore, when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20. When a game ball that entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 during the small win game state of "small win C," the game is controlled to the time-saving state for a period until the variable display is executed five times after the small win game state ends. In contrast, when a game ball that entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 during the small win game state of "small win D," the game is controlled to the time-saving state for a period until the variable display is executed one time after the small win game state ends.

"Small win E" is a type of small win in which a game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to be open in a small win game state, passes through the miss area 063AK21 by being guided by the distribution member 063AK28. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the small win type is "small win E", the small win start presentation time is set to the first specific time described above. As described above, when the small win start presentation time is set to the first specific time, the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the miss area 063AK21. Therefore, when the small win type is "small win E", the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4 passes through the miss area 063AK21.

In the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 14-14(b), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, the small win type is determined to be "small win A" which is controlled to be "big win A" which is more advantageous to the player than "big win B" when the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 at a higher rate than when the variable special chart is the first special chart. With this configuration, when the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the second special chart game and the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state, the small win pattern is derived and displayed in the first special chart game, and the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state, and the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 at a higher rate than when the game ball passes through the big win area 063AK19 when the big prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state, and the game state ends with the small win state, the small win pattern is determined to be "big win A" which is more advantageous to the player than "big win B".

In the small hit type determination table shown in FIG. 14-14(b), the sum of the percentage at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit A" and the percentage at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit B" corresponds to the expectation that the game state will be controlled to a large hit game state after the end of the small hit game state based on the game ball passing through the large hit area 063AK19 in the small hit game state. Also, the sum of the percentage at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the percentage at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D" corresponds to the expectation that the game state will be controlled to a time-saving state after the end of the small hit game state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state. Also, the percentage at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit E" corresponds to the expectation that the game state will not be changed after the end of the small hit game state based on the game ball passing through the miss area 063AK21 in the small hit game state.

As shown in FIG. 14-14(b), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, the ratio (15%) at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the ratio (15%) at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D" are combined (30%), which is greater than the ratio (15%) at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the ratio (10%) at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D" when the variable special chart is the first special chart, which is greater than the ratio (25%) at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit C" and the ratio (10%) at which the small hit type is determined to be "small hit D". In other words, in the feature part 063AK, when the small hit pattern is derived and displayed in the second special chart game, the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small hit game state at a higher ratio than when the small hit pattern is derived and displayed in the first special chart game, and is controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small hit game state. This configuration allows the player to focus on whether a small win symbol is derived and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the second special game, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 14-11, after executing the processing of step 063AKS122, the CPU 103 stores the determined small hit type by, for example, setting a small hit type buffer value, which is the stored value of a small hit type buffer provided in the RAM 102, corresponding to the small hit type determined in step 063AK122 (step 063AKS123). As an example, if the small hit type is "small hit A", the small hit type buffer value can be set to "0", if it is "small hit B", it can be set to "1", if it is "small hit C", it can be set to "2", if it is "small hit D", it can be set to "3", and if it is "small hit E", it can be set to "4".

In step 063AKS119, if it is determined that the special symbol display result has not been determined to be a "small win" in step 063AKS118 (step 063AKS119; No), or after executing the processing of step 063AKS111 or step 063AKS123, the CPU 103 determines the determined special symbol (step 063AKS112) in response to the result of a prior determination of whether or not to control the game state to a big win or a small win, or the result of determining the type of big win if the game state is a big win.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS112, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "1", which is a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting processing (step 063AKS113), and then ends the normal processing of the special symbol. If the first special symbol reserved memory count is "0" in step 063AKS114 (step 063AKS114; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a predetermined demo display setting (step 063AKS124), and then ends the normal processing of the special symbol.

In this embodiment, in the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of the special pattern process processing, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PA1-1 to PB5-3 shown in Figure 14-15.

As shown in FIG. 14-15, in this embodiment, there are preset variation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the variable display result being a "miss," variation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 corresponding to the variable display result being a "big hit," and variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the variable display result being a "small hit."

In this embodiment, there are three types of super reaches: Super Reach A, Super Reach B, and Super Reach C. The variation patterns shown in Figure 14-15 include variation patterns PA2-1, PA3-1, PA4-1, PA5-1 in which normal reach performance is executed, as well as variation patterns PB2-1, PB3-1, PB4-1, PB5-1 in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed, variation patterns PB2-2, PB3-2, PB4-2, PB5-2 in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed, and variation patterns PB2-3, PB3-3, PB4-3, PB5-3 in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed. In this embodiment, the reach performance of Super Reach A is performed by displaying a character image of character A on the screen of the image display device 5, the reach performance of Super Reach B is performed by displaying a character image of character B on the screen of the image display device 5, and the reach performance of Super Reach C is performed by displaying a character image of character C on the screen of the image display device 5.

Furthermore, the variation patterns PA4-1 to PB5-3 corresponding to the variable display result being a "small win" include variation patterns PA4-1, PB4-1 to PB4-3 in which a time-saving suggestion effect is executed, and variation patterns PA5-1, PB5-1 to PB5-3 in which a time-saving suggestion effect is not executed.

Figure 14-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S111 of the special pattern process processing as a variation pattern setting process for feature part 063AK.

When the fluctuation pattern setting process starts, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot flag is on or not (step 063AK201). If it is determined that the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS201; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-17 to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA3-1 to PB3-3 that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is "jackpot" (step 063AK202).

As shown in FIG. 14-17, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PB3-1, in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation pattern PA3-1, in which the normal reach performance is executed, fluctuation pattern PB3-2, in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation pattern PB3-1, and fluctuation pattern PB3-3, in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation pattern PB3-2. With this configuration, the jackpot expectation rate is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed, higher when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed, and higher when the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed than when the normal reach performance is executed.

Returning to FIG. 14-16, if it is determined in step 063AK201 that the big win flag is not on (step 063AKS201; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the small win flag is on or not (step 063AKS207). If it is determined that the small win flag is not on (step 063AK207; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-18 to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PB2-3 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" (step 063AKS208).

As shown in FIG. 14-18, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PB2-1, in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed at a lower rate than fluctuation pattern PA2-1, in which the normal reach performance is executed, fluctuation pattern PB2-2, in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed at a lower rate than fluctuation pattern PB2-1, and fluctuation pattern PB2-3, in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation pattern PB2-2.

Returning to FIG. 14-16, if it is determined in step 063AKS207 that the small win flag is on (step 063AKS207; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time-saving flag provided in the RAM 102 is set to the on state (step 063AKS209). The time-saving flag is a flag that indicates that the reel is being controlled to the time-saving state.

If it is determined that the time-saving flag is not set to the on state (step 063AKS209; No), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for normal state shown in FIG. 14-19(a) to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA4-1 to PB4-3 in which the time-saving suggestion performance is executed, corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "small hit", depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" (step 063AKS210). Whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" can be determined based on the small hit type buffer value. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 063AKS209; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a random number lottery using the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 14-19(b) to determine the fluctuation pattern to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA5-1 to PB5-3 in which the variable display result is a "small hit" and the time-saving suggestion effect is not executed, depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" (step 063AKS211). With this configuration, when a small hit fluctuation is executed in the normal state, the time-saving suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of the small hit fluctuation, while when a small hit fluctuation is executed in the time-saving state, the time-saving suggestion effect is not executed during the execution of the small hit fluctuation.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in Figure 14-19 (a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in Figure 14-19 (b), when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" in which the game ball passes through the large hit area 063AK19, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation patterns PB4-2, PB5-2 in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation patterns PB4-1, PB5-1 in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed, and is determined to be fluctuation patterns PB4-3, PB5-3 in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation patterns PB4-2, PB5-2. With this configuration, the expectation of the game ball passing through the jackpot area 063AK19 (expectation of passing through the jackpot area) is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed, and is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to which of the reach performances from Super Reach A to Super Reach C will be executed, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In both the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the normal state shown in Figure 14-19 (a) and the time-saving fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state shown in Figure 14-19 (b), when the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" in which the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation patterns PB4-2, PB5-2 in which the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation patterns PB4-3, PB5-3 in which the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed, and is determined to be fluctuation patterns PB4-1, PB5-1 in which the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed at a higher rate than fluctuation patterns PB4-2, PB5-2. With this configuration, the expectation of the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 (expectation of passing through the time-saving area) is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach C is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed, and is higher when the reach performance of Super Reach B is executed than when the reach performance of Super Reach A is executed. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to which reach performance of Super Reach A to Super Reach C will be executed, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 14-16, after executing the processing of step 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern (step 063AKS203). The special symbol variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the determined special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. By setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern, the CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is derived. The special symbol variation time is set, for example, by setting a timer value corresponding to the special symbol variation time in a game control process timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Following the processing of step 063AKS203, the CPU 103 performs a setting to start the variation of the special pattern so that either the special pattern game using the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A or the special pattern game using the second special pattern in the second special pattern display device 4B, in which the start condition is satisfied, is started (step 063AKS204). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", a setting is performed to transmit a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", a setting is performed to transmit a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern in the second special pattern display device 4B. This starts the special pattern game. Note that when the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special pattern, it may control the first reserved indicator 25A to cause the first reserved indicator 25A to perform a display that can identify the first special pattern reserved memory number that has been subtracted by one (for example, by reducing the number of lit LEDs by one). In addition, when the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special chart, it may control the second reserved display 25B to cause the second reserved display 25B to display an indication that identifies the second special chart reserved memory number that has been reduced by one (for example, by reducing the number of lit LEDs by one).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS204, the CPU 103 sets up the transmission of a command (change start command) at the start of the change in the special pattern in order to notify the performance control board 12 of the special pattern display results, the change pattern determination results, etc. (step 063AKS205). For example, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 performs transmission setting to sequentially transmit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as variation start commands, a first variation start designation command, a variation pattern designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in steps 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211), a display result designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a first special chart reserved memory number designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the first special chart reserved memory number count value reduced by 1, i.e., the number of first special chart reserved memories when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special chart game). On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 performs transmission setting to sequentially transmit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 as variation start commands, a second variation start designation command, a variation pattern designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in steps 063AKS202, 063AKS208, 063AKS210 or 063AKS211), a display result designation command (a command including EXT data indicating the determined variable display result), and a second special chart reserved memory number designation command (the second special chart reserved memory number count value reduced by 1, i.e., a command including EXT data indicating the number of second special chart reserved memories when one reserved memory is consumed by the start of execution of the special chart game). In this embodiment, in the display result designation command (variable display result notification command), different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss", a "big hit", or a "small hit", the determination result of which of multiple types of big hits the big hit type will be when the variable display result is a "big hit" (big hit type determination result), and the determination result of which of multiple types of small hits the small hit type will be when the variable display result is a "small hit" (small hit type determination result).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS205, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to "2", which corresponds to the special pattern variation processing (step 063AKS206), and then ends the normal special pattern processing.

Figure 14-20 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S113 of the special symbol process processing as the special symbol stop processing for feature part 063AK.

When the special symbol stop process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special symbol confirmation display flag, for example, provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is ON (step 063AKS301). Here, the special symbol confirmation display flag is set to the ON state by the process of step 063AKS305 described later in response to the derivation and display of a confirmed special symbol that is a variable display result in the special symbol game.

When the special pattern confirmation display flag is off (step 063AKS301; No), the CPU 103 performs settings to derive and display the confirmed special pattern (step 063AKS302) and performs settings to send a decorative pattern stop command to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS303). The decorative pattern stop command is also called a pattern confirmation command, and is a command that specifies that the variable display (variation) of the decorative pattern is terminated and the display result (stopped pattern) is derived and displayed.

After executing the process of step 063AKS303, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the special pattern confirmation display time (step 063AKS304). In the process of step 063AKS304, the special pattern confirmation display time timer value, which is the stored value of the special pattern confirmation display time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined special pattern confirmation display time. Thereafter, the CPU 103 sets the special pattern confirmation display in progress flag to the on state (step 063AKS305), and then ends the special pattern stop process.

In step 063AKS301, when the special pattern confirmation display in progress flag is on (step 063AKS301; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the special pattern confirmation display time has elapsed (step 063AKS306). For example, in the processing of step 063AKS306, the special pattern confirmation display time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the special pattern confirmation display time has elapsed can be determined depending on whether the updated special pattern confirmation display time timer value is "0". If the special pattern confirmation display time has not elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; No), the special pattern stop processing is terminated, and the process waits until the special pattern confirmation display time has elapsed.

When the special chart confirmation display time has elapsed in step 063AKS306 (step 063AKS306; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the special chart confirmation display flag to an off state (step 063AKS307), and then determines whether the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS308). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 063AKS308; Yes), a predetermined time is set as the jackpot start performance waiting time (step 063AKS309). The jackpot start performance waiting time corresponds to the jackpot start performance time during which the jackpot start performance (jackpot fanfare performance) is executed. In the process of step 063AK309, the jackpot start performance waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start performance waiting time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is set to a value corresponding to a predetermined jackpot start performance time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS309, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a jackpot start command (jackpot fanfare command) corresponding to the jackpot from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS310).

After executing the process of step 063AKS310, the CPU 103 clears the jackpot flag to the OFF state (step 063AKS311) and clears the time-saving flag to the OFF state (step 063AKS312). After that, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state (a presentation control command that designates the current game state in pachinko game 1) from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12 (step 063AKS313).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the opening count value, which is the stored value of the opening counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value (in this embodiment, "15") corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot game state (in this embodiment, 15 times) (step 063AKS314).

After executing the process of step 063AKS314, the CPU 103 clears the time-saving count counter (063AKS315). The time-saving count counter is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and counts the number of time-saving times, which is the remaining number of times of the variable display controlled in the time-saving state. In the process of step 063AKS315, the time-saving count counter is cleared, and the time-saving count value, which is the stored value of the time-saving count counter, is set to the initial value of "0". After that, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "4", which is the value corresponding to the process before the opening of the jackpot (step 063AKS316), and then ends the special symbol stop process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS308 that the big win flag is not on (step 063AKS308; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the small win flag is on or not (step 063AKS317). If it is determined that the small win flag is not on (step 063AKS317; No), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special symbol (step 063AKS318).

When it is determined in step 063AKS317 that the small hit flag is on (step 063AKS317; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the small hit start performance waiting time to one of the above-mentioned first to third specific times (step 063AKS319). The small hit start performance waiting time corresponds to the small hit start performance time. Specifically, in step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 determines the small hit start performance waiting time to one of the first to third specific times depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" by referring to the small hit start performance waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 14-21, and sets the small hit start performance waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the small hit start performance waiting time timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start performance waiting time. The small hit type may be determined based on the small hit type buffer value.

As shown in FIG. 14-21, in this embodiment, when the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start presentation time is set to the third specific time, and the small hit start presentation waiting time is also determined to the third specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start presentation time is set to the second specific time, and the small hit start presentation waiting time is also determined to the second specific time. When the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start presentation time is set to the first specific time, and the small hit start presentation waiting time is also determined to the first specific time.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS319, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a hit start designation command (small hit fanfare command) corresponding to a small hit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS320).

After executing the process of step 063AKS320, the CPU 103 controls the distribution member 063AK28 to start operating according to the distribution member operation pattern (step 063AKS321). After that, the CPU 103 clears the small win flag to the off state (step 063AKS322), and sets the opening count value to a value (in this embodiment, "10") corresponding to the upper limit opening number (in this embodiment, 10 times) of the large prize opening opening and closing in the small win game state (step 063AKS323). After executing the process of step 063AKS323, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "8", which is a value corresponding to the small win pre-opening process (step 063AKS324).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS318 or step 063AKS324, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving flag is on or not (step 063AKS325). If it is determined that the time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS325; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop processing.

When it is determined that the time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS325; Yes), the CPU 103 updates the time-saving count value by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS326), and determines whether the updated time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS327). When it is determined that the time-saving count value is not "0" (step 063AKS327; No), the CPU 103 ends the special symbol stop process.

If it is determined that the time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS327; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time-saving flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS328), performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state (step 063AKS329), and ends the special symbol stop processing.

Figure 14-22 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S118 of the special pattern process processing as pre-processing for the small win release for feature part 063AK.

When the small win release pre-processing starts, the CPU 103 first determines whether the small win start performance waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS401). In the processing of step 063AKS401, the small win start performance waiting time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the small win start performance waiting time has elapsed is determined depending on whether the updated small win start performance waiting time timer value is "0". If it is determined that the small win start performance waiting time has not elapsed (step 063AKS401; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win release pre-processing.

In step 063AKS401, if it is determined that the waiting time for the small win start performance has elapsed (step 063AKS401; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 to the on state (step 063AKS402). After that, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the game ball holding time (step 063AKS403). In step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 sets the game ball holding time timer value, which is the stored value of the game ball holding time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the predetermined game ball holding time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS403, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "9", which is a value corresponding to the small win opening processing (step 063AKS404), and ends the small win opening pre-processing.

Figure 14-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S119 of the special symbol process processing as processing during the opening of a small win for feature part 063AK.

When the small win opening process starts, the CPU 103 first determines whether the opening count value is "0" (step 063AKS501). If it is determined that the opening count value is not "0" (step 063AKS501; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small win game state is equal to or greater than a predetermined upper limit number of winning balls in the small win game state (10 balls in this embodiment) (step 063AKS502). In step 063AKS502, the CPU 103 determines whether the number of game balls detected by the large prize opening switch 063AK5 (the number of times game balls have been detected by the large prize opening switch 063AK5) is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of winning balls.

In step 063AKS502, if it is determined that the number of game balls entering the large prize opening 063AK4 is less than the upper limit number of winning balls (step 063AKS502; No), the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to open the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503). If it is determined that it is time to open the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door to the on state, thereby controlling the large prize opening 063AK4 to an open state (step 063AKS504), and performs settings for sending a command to specify that the large prize opening is open (step 063AKS505). After performing the processing of step 063AKS505, the CPU 103 updates the opening count value by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS506).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS506, or when it is determined in step 063AKS503 that it is not the timing to open the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS503; No), the CPU 103 determines whether it is the timing to close the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507). When it is determined that it is not the timing to close the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win opening processing. When it is determined that it is the timing to close the large prize opening 063AK4 (step 063AKS507; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door to the off state, thereby controlling the large prize opening 063AK4 to the closed state (step 063AKS508). After executing the processing of step 063AKS508, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a designated command after the large prize opening is opened (step 063AKS509), and ends the processing during the opening of the small prize.

If it is determined in step 063AKS501 that the opening count value is "0" (step 063AKS501; Yes), or if it is determined in step 063AKS502 that the number of game balls that have entered the large winning port 063AK4 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of winning balls (step 063AKS502; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510). In step 063AKS510, the CPU 103 updates the game ball holding time timer value by subtracting 1, and determines whether the game ball holding time has elapsed depending on whether the updated game ball holding time timer value is "0". If it is determined that the game ball holding time has not elapsed (step 063AKS510; No), the CPU 103 ends the small winning opening process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS510 that the game ball holding time has elapsed (step 063AKS510; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution section supply solenoid 063AK12 to the off state (step 063AKS511).

After executing the process of step 063AKS511, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small prize game state passed through any of the big prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512). In step 063AKS512, the CPU 103 judges whether or not the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 in the small prize game state passed through any of the big prize area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21 depending on whether or not any of the big prize area passing flag, the time-saving area passing flag, or the miss area passing flag, all of which are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, is on.

When it is determined that the game ball has not passed through any of the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 has been turned on (whether the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 has detected the game ball) (step 063AKS518). When it is determined that the jackpot area passing switch 063AK22 has been turned on (step 063AKS518; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot area passing flag to the on state (step 063AKS519) and ends the small jackpot opening process.

In step 063AKS518, if it is determined that the big win area passage switch 063AK22 is not on (step 063AKS518; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23 is on (whether the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23 detects a game ball) (step 063AKS520). If it is determined that the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23 is on (step 063AKS520; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS521). If it is determined that the time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS521; No), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving area passage flag to the on state (step 063AKS522) and ends the small win opening process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS520 that the time-saving area passage switch 063AK23 is not on (step 063AKS520; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the miss area passage switch 063AK24 is on (whether or not the miss area passage switch 063AK24 has detected a game ball) (step 063AKS523). If it is determined that the miss area passage switch 063AK24 is not on (step 063AKS523; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win opening process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS523 that the miss area passage switch 063AK24 is on (step 063AKS523; Yes), or if it is determined in step 063AKS521 that the time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes), the CPU 103 sets the miss area passage flag to the on state (step 063AKS524) and ends the small win opening process.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if it is determined that the time-saving area passage switch 063AK24 is on (step 063AKS520; Yes), when it is determined that the time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS521; Yes), the time-saving area passage flag is not set to the on state, and the failure area passage flag is set to the on state.

In step 063AKS512, if it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through either the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20 or the miss area 063AK21 (step 063AKS512; Yes), the CPU 103 determines whether all gaming balls that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 during the small prize game state have been discharged outside the special variable prize ball device 7 (step 063AKS513). In step 063AKS513, the CPU 103 determines whether all of the game balls that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 have been discharged outside the special variable prize ball device 7, depending on whether the total of the number of game balls detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16 (the number of times game balls are detected by the discharge count switch 063AK16), the number of game balls detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch (the number of times game balls are detected by the jackpot area discharge count switch), the number of game balls detected by the time-saving area discharge count switch (the number of times game balls are detected by the time-saving area discharge count switch), and the number of game balls detected by the loss area discharge count switch (the number of times game balls are detected by the loss area discharge count switch) matches the number of game balls detected by the large prize opening switch 063AK5.

If it is determined in step 063AKS513 that all game balls that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 have not been discharged outside the special variable prize ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; No), the CPU 103 ends the small prize opening process. On the other hand, if it is determined that all game balls that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 have been discharged outside the special variable prize ball device 7 (step 063AKS513; Yes), the CPU 103 controls the distribution member 063AK28 to end operation according to the distribution member operation pattern (step 063AKS514).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS514, the CPU 103 performs settings to send a hit end designation command (small hit ending command) corresponding to the small hit from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS515).

In step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 transmits a performance control command as a hit end designation command corresponding to a small hit, indicating whether the game state will be controlled to a big hit game state or a time-saving game state after the end of the small hit game state, the type of big hit if the game state is controlled to a big hit game state after the end of the small hit game state, and the number of variable displays that will be controlled to the time-saving game state if the game state is controlled to the time-saving game state after the end of the small hit game state.

Specifically, in step 063AK515, the CPU 103 refers to the hit end designation command determination table shown in FIG. 14-24 to select one of small hit end designation commands 1 to 5 as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit, depending on the state of the big hit area passing flag, the time-saving area passing flag, and the miss area passing flag, and the type of small hit, and makes settings to send the selected command.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-24, when the big win area passing flag is set to the ON state and the small win type is "small win A", a small win end designation command 1 is selected, which indicates that the game state will be controlled to the big win A big win game state after the small win game state ends. When the big win area passing flag is set to the ON state and the small win type is "small win B", a small win end designation command 2 is selected, which indicates that the game state will be controlled to the big win B big win game state after the small win game state ends. When the time-saving area passing flag is set to the ON state and the small win type is "small win C", a small win end designation command 3 is selected, which indicates that the game state will be controlled to the time-saving state for the period until the variable display is executed five times after the small win game state ends. When the time-saving area passing flag is set to the ON state and the small win type is "small win D", a small win end designation command 4 is transmitted, which indicates that the game state will be controlled to the time-saving state for the period until the variable display is executed once after the small win game state ends. If the failure zone passing flag is set to the on state, regardless of the type of small win, a small win end command 5 is sent indicating that no control to change the game state will be performed after the small win game state ends.

Returning to FIG. 14-23, after executing the processing of step 063AKS515, the CPU 103 sets the passing notification effect waiting time to one of the above-mentioned first to third special times (step 063AKS516). The passing notification effect waiting time corresponds to the passing notification effect time. In step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 determines the passing notification effect waiting time to one of the first to third special times according to the state of the jackpot area passing flag, the time-saving area passing flag, and the miss area passing flag by referring to the passing notification effect waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 14-25, and sets the passing notification effect waiting time timer value, which is the stored value of the passing notification effect waiting time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, to a value corresponding to the determined passing notification effect waiting time.

As shown in FIG. 14-25, in this embodiment, when the jackpot area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the third special time, when the time-saving area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the second special time, and when the loss area passing flag is set to the on state, the passing notification effect waiting time is set to the first special time.

Returning to FIG. 14-23, after executing the processing of step 063AKS516, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "10", which corresponds to the small win end processing (step 063AKS517), and ends the small win open processing.

Figure 14-26 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S120 of the special pattern process processing as a small win end processing for feature part 063AK.

When the small win end process starts, the CPU 103 first determines whether the passing notification effect waiting time has elapsed (step 063AKS601). In step 063AKS601, the CPU 103 updates the passing notification effect waiting time timer value by subtracting 1, and determines whether the passing notification effect waiting time has elapsed depending on whether the updated passing notification effect waiting time timer value is "0". If it is determined that the passing notification effect waiting time has not elapsed (step 063KS601; No), the CPU 103 ends the small win end process.

When it is determined that the waiting time for the passing notification effect has elapsed (step 063AKS617), the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot area passing flag is on or not (step 063AKS602). When it is determined that the jackpot area passing flag is on (step 063AKS602; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the jackpot area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS603).

After executing the process of step 063AKS603, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type buffer value according to the small jackpot type (step 063AKS604). Specifically, in step 063AKS604, if the small jackpot type is "small jackpot A" that is controlled to the jackpot game state of "jackpot A" after the small jackpot game state ends, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0" corresponding to "jackpot A", while if the small jackpot type is "small jackpot B" that is controlled to the jackpot game state of "jackpot B" after the small jackpot game state ends, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "1" corresponding to "jackpot B". The small jackpot type may be identified based on the small jackpot type buffer value.

After executing the process of step 063AKS604, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start performance waiting time (step 063AKS605), and sets the main board 11 to send a jackpot start designation command corresponding to the jackpot to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS606). After executing the process of step 063AKS606, the CPU 103 clears the time-saving flag to the off state (step 063AKS607), and sets the main board 11 to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS608). Next, the CPU 103 sets the opening count value to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of rounds in the jackpot game state (step 063AKS609), and clears the time-saving count counter (063AKS610). After that, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special chart process flag to "4", which corresponds to the pre-big win release processing (step 063AKS611), and then ends the small win end processing.

If it is determined in step 063AKS602 that the jackpot area passing flag is not on (step 063AKS602; No), the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving area passing flag is on or not (step 063AKS612). If it is determined that the time-saving area passing flag is on (step 063AKS612; Yes), the CPU 103 clears the time-saving area passing flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS613).

After executing the process of step 063AKS613, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag to the ON state (step 063AKS614) and sets the time-saving count value according to the small win type (step 063AKS615). Specifically, in step 063AKS615, if the small win type is "small win C" in which the time-saving state is controlled for the period until the variable display is executed five times after the small win game state ends, the time-saving count value is set to "5", while if the small win type is "small win D" in which the time-saving state is controlled for the period until the variable display is executed once after the small win game state ends, the time-saving count value is set to "1". The small win type may be specified based on the small win type buffer value. After executing the process of step 063AKS615, the CPU 103 performs a setting for transmitting a game state designation command indicating the time-saving state from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 (step 063AKS616).

If it is determined in step 063AKS612 that the time-saving area passage flag is not on (step 063AKS612; No), the CPU 103 clears the failure area passage flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS617).

After performing the processing of step 063AKS616 or step 063AKS617, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern (step 063AKS618), and then ends the small win end processing.

As described above, in this embodiment, the small win end process is started in response to the end of the small win open process in which the large prize opening is opened, and when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 (step 063AKS612; Yes), the time-saving flag is set to the ON state in the small win end process (step 063AKS614). With this configuration, when the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, it is configured not to be controlled to the time-saving state until the large prize opening 063AK4 is controlled to the closed state.

In the feature section 063AK, in the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4, the above-mentioned processes are executed as processes in the special symbol process processing of step S25, and in the information output processing of step S23, the process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13-36 is executed as in the feature section 059AK. With this configuration, in the information output processing of step S23, in the feature section 063AK, in addition to the jackpot signal 1 indicating that a jackpot is occurring, and the jackpot signal 2 indicating that a jackpot is occurring or that a time-saving state is occurring (that a special prize is occurring), the jackpot signal 3 indicating that a time-saving state is occurring is output to an external device such as a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1, as in the feature section 059AK.

With this configuration, the external device can suitably identify the time-saving state or consecutive win state in both cases, whether the time-saving state is controlled based on the end of a big win game state, or the time-saving state is controlled after the end of a small win game state based on the game ball that entered the big win port 063AK4 during a small win game state passing through the time-saving area 063AK4 in the normal state.

Figure 14-27 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the performance control process as variable display start setting processing for feature part 063AK.

When the variable display start setting process is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the sub-side time-saving flag provided in a specified area of the RAM 122 is on or not (step 063AKS701). The sub-side time-saving flag is a flag indicating that the display is controlled to a time-saving state. If the sub-side time-saving flag is determined to be on (step 063AKS701; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 updates the sub-side time-saving count value, which is the stored value of the sub-side time-saving count counter provided in a specified area of the RAM 122, by subtracting 1 (step 063AKS702). The sub-side time-saving count counter counts the number of time-saving times (the remaining number of times the variable display is controlled to a time-saving state).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS702, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to execute a time-saving count notification performance that notifies the number of time-saving times (step 063AKS703). In this embodiment, as the time-saving count notification performance, a performance is configured to be executed in which a time-saving count notification image indicating the number of time-saving times is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the time-saving count notification performance, the time-saving count notification image is displayed in a display mode indicating the current number of time-saving times based on the sub-side time-saving count value. In this embodiment, the time-saving count notification performance is executed when a variable display is being executed in the time-saving state.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS703, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not the right-hit promotion performance flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 is on (step 063AKS704). If it is judged that the right-hit promotion performance flag is not on (step 063AKS704; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets the right-hit promotion performance flag to the on state (step 063AKS705) and performs control to start the right-hit promotion performance (step 063AKS706).

After executing the process of step 063AKS706, the presentation control CPU 120 performs settings to execute a time-saving entry presentation that notifies the player that control to the time-saving state has started (control from the normal state to the time-saving state) (step 063AKS707). In this embodiment, as the time-saving entry presentation, a presentation is executed in which a first time-saving entry image showing the message "Time-saving!" and a second time-saving entry image showing the message "Aim to the right and put the ball in the electric chute!" are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The second time-saving entry image is a presentation image that encourages the player to place a game ball in the variable winning ball device 6B. In this embodiment, the time-saving entry presentation is executed when the variable display is executed for the first time after control from the normal state to the time-saving state.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS707, or if it is determined in step 063AKS701 that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS701; No), or if it is determined in step 063AKS704 that the right-hit promotion performance flag is on (step 063AKS704; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the special chart display result is a "jackpot" or not based on the display result designation command sent from the main board 11 (step 063AKS708). If it is determined that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" (step 063AKS708; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines the combination of decorative patterns that will be a jackpot combination as the final stop pattern that will be the final decorative pattern, which is the variable display result of the decorative patterns (step 063AKS709). In step 063AKS709, the performance control CPU 120 determines the decorative symbol of the jackpot combination as the confirmed decorative symbol, for example by performing a random number lottery with reference to a decorative symbol determination table for the jackpot combination that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121.

In step 063AKS708, if it is determined that the special chart display result is not a "big win" (step 063AKS708; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the special chart display result is a "small win" or not based on the display result designation command sent from the main board 11 (step 063AKS710). If it is determined that the special chart display result is not a "small win" (step 063AKS710; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns that will be a losing combination as the confirmed decorative pattern (step 063AKS711). In step 063AKS711, the performance control CPU 120 determines the decorative patterns of the losing combination as the confirmed decorative pattern, for example, by performing a random number lottery with reference to a decorative pattern determination table for losing combinations that is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121.

If it is determined in step 063AKS710 that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 063AKS710; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS712).

If it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is not set to the on state (step 063AKS712; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the normal state small win fixed decoration pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-28(b) to determine one of the first small win pattern to the fifth small win pattern shown in FIG. 14-28(a) as the fixed decoration pattern (final stop pattern) that will be the small win combination, depending on whether the small win type is "small win A" to "small win E" (step 063AKS713). Whether the small win type is "small win A" to "small win E" can be determined based on the display result designation command sent from the main board 11. On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is set to the on state (step 063AKS712; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs a random number lottery using the time-saving mode small win fixed decorative pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-28(c) to determine one of the first small win pattern to the fifth small win pattern shown in FIG. 14-28(a) as the fixed decorative pattern (final stopping pattern) that will be the small win combination, depending on whether the small win type is "small win A" to "small win E" (step 063AKS714).

The first small win pattern shown in FIG. 14-28(a) is a combination of decorative patterns in which a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a rectangular decorative pattern in red showing the message "V" suggesting that the game will be controlled to a big win game state is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. The second small win pattern is a combination of decorative patterns in which a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a rectangular decorative pattern in blue showing the message "V" suggesting that the game will be controlled to a big win game state is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. The third small win pattern is a combination of decorative patterns in which a decorative pattern showing the number "7" is displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a rectangular decorative pattern in red showing the message "time" suggesting that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state is displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. The fourth small win pattern is a combination of a number "7" displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a blue rectangular decorative pattern showing the message "time" in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state. The fifth small win pattern is a combination of a number "7" displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and a white rectangular decorative pattern showing the message "small" in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. The first small win pattern and the second small win pattern are combinations of decorative patterns suggesting that the game will be controlled to a big win game state. The third small win pattern and the fourth small win pattern are combinations of decorative patterns suggesting that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state.

In the determined decorative pattern determination table for small wins in the normal state shown in Figure 14-28 (b), when the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B" in which the game ball passes through the large win area 063AK19, the determined decorative pattern is determined to be the fourth small win pattern at a higher rate than the fifth small win pattern, the third small win pattern at a higher rate than the fourth small win pattern, the second small win pattern at a higher rate than the third small win pattern, and the first small win pattern at a higher rate than the second small win pattern. With this configuration, the expectation of the game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19 and being controlled to the big win game state after the small win game state ends is higher when the first small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern than when the second small win pattern is derived and displayed, higher when the second small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern than when the third small win pattern is derived and displayed, higher when the third small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern than when the fourth small win pattern is derived and displayed, and higher when the fourth small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern than when the fifth small win pattern is derived and displayed. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to which of the first small win pattern to the fifth small win pattern is derived and displayed as the determined decorative pattern, which can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the normal state small win fixed decoration pattern determination table is configured so that the fixed decoration pattern can be determined to be the third small win pattern and the fourth small win pattern, which suggest that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, as shown in FIG. 14-28(b). With this configuration, in the normal state, the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern, which suggests that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, is derived and displayed as the fixed decoration pattern, so that the player can have a sense of anticipation that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state by the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 and time-saving transition control is performed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Specifically, in the table for determining the confirmed decorative pattern when a small win occurs in the normal state, as shown in Figure 14-28 (b), when the type of small win is "small win C" or "small win D" in which the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the confirmed decorative pattern is determined to be the first small win pattern at a higher rate than the fifth small win pattern, the second small win pattern at a higher rate than the first small win pattern, the fourth small win pattern at a higher rate than the second small win pattern, and the third small win pattern at a higher rate than the fourth small win pattern. With this configuration, the expectation of the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 and being controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game state is higher when the third small win symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol than when the fourth small win symbol is derived and displayed, higher when the fourth small win symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol than when the second small win symbol is derived and displayed, higher when the second small win symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol than when the first small win symbol is derived and displayed, and higher when the first small win symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol than when the fifth small win symbol is derived and displayed. With this configuration, the player is made to pay attention to which of the first small win symbol to the fifth small win symbol is derived and displayed as the final decorative symbol, which can increase the interest in the game.

In contrast, the time-saving state small win fixed decoration pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14-28(c) is configured so that the fixed decoration pattern is not determined to be the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern, which suggest that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state. With this configuration, in the time-saving state, even though time-saving transition control based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 is not performed, the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern, which suggests that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, is derived and displayed as the fixed decoration pattern, preventing the player from having expectations that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20, and suppressing a decline in interest in the game. In this way, in this embodiment, the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern, which indicates that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, can be derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern in the normal state, but the game is configured so that the third small win pattern or the fourth small win pattern is not derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern in the time-saving state, allowing for a suitable presentation depending on the state.

Returning to FIG. 14-27, after executing the processing of step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711, step 063AKS713 or step 063AKS714, the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance control pattern (step 063AKS715). In step 063AKS715, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of the multiple types of performance control patterns (performance control patterns during special chart fluctuation) prepared (set) in advance according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main board 11, and sets it as the performance control pattern to be used. If the setting for executing the time-saving count notification performance is performed in step 063AKS703, in step 063AKS715, the performance control pattern corresponding to the time-saving count notification performance (time-saving count notification performance control pattern) is selected and set as the performance control pattern to be used. If the setting for executing time-saving entry performance control is performed in step 063AKS707, in step 063AKS715, a performance control pattern corresponding to the time-saving entry performance is selected and set as the performance control pattern to be used (time-saving entry performance control pattern).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS715, the performance control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a specified area of RAM 122 according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command received from the main board 11 (step 063AKS716).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS716, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to start variable display of decorative patterns, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 (step 063AKS717). In step 063AKS717, the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5 by, for example, sending a display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 to the VDP of the display control unit 123.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS717, the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to update the pending display and active display displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to the start of the variable display (step 063AKS718).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS718, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "2", which corresponds to the performance processing during variable display (step 063AKS719), and ends the variable display start setting processing.

Figure 14-29 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S172 of the performance control process as a variable display performance process for feature part 063AK.

When variable display performance processing is started, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the special chart fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed, for example, based on the timer value of the performance control process timer (step 063AKS801). Specifically, in step 063AKS801, the performance control CPU 120 updates the timer value of the performance control process timer, for example by subtracting 1, and determines whether an end code has been read out corresponding to the updated timer value from the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special chart fluctuation) determined in step 063AKS715, thereby determining whether the variable display time has elapsed.

If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step 063AKS801; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is a reach performance period in which a reach performance is executed based on the timer value of the performance control process timer, etc. (step 063AKS802). The reach performance period may be predetermined, for example, in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special chart change) determined in step 063AKS715. If it is determined that it is a reach performance period (step 063AKS802; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute the reach performance (step 063AKS803).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS803, or if it is determined in step 063AKS802 that it is not a reach display period (step 063AKS802; No), the display control CPU 120 determines whether it is a time-saving count notification display period in which a time-saving count notification display is executed based on the timer value of the display control process timer or the like (step 063AKS804). The time-saving count notification display period may be predetermined, for example, in the display control pattern (time-saving count notification display control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. If it is determined that it is a time-saving count notification display period (step 063AKS804; Yes), the display control CPU 120 controls the execution of the time-saving count notification display (step 063AKS805).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS805, or if it is determined in step 063AKS804 that it is not the time-saving count notification display period (step 063AKS804; No), the display control CPU 120 determines whether it is the time-saving suggestion display period in which the time-saving suggestion display is executed based on the timer value of the display control process timer or the like (step 063AKS806). The time-saving suggestion display period may be predetermined, for example, in the display control pattern (special chart change time display control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. If it is determined that it is the time-saving suggestion display period (step 063AKS806; Yes), the display control CPU 120 controls the execution of the time-saving suggestion display (step 063AKS807).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS807, or if it is determined in step 063AKS806 that the time-saving indication effect period is not in progress (step 063AKS806; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the time-saving effect period is in which the time-saving effect is to be executed, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, etc. (step 063AKS808). The time-saving effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern (time-saving effect control pattern) determined in step 063AKS715. If it is determined that the time-saving effect period is in progress (step 063AKS808; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls the execution of the time-saving effect (step 063AKS809).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS809, or if it is determined in step 063AKS808 that the time-saving performance period is not in progress (step 063AKS808; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to execute performance during variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, based on the settings in the performance control pattern determined in step 063AKS715 (step 063AKS810), and ends the performance processing during variable display.

If it is determined in step 063AKS801 that the variable display time has elapsed (step 063AKS801; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a pattern determination command has been received from the main board 11 (step 063AKS811). If it is determined that a pattern determination command has not been received (step 063AKS811; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the performance processing during variable display.

If it is determined that a pattern confirmation command has been received (step 063AKS811; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 derives and displays the confirmed decorative pattern as the final stopping pattern determined in step 063AKS709, step 063AKS711 or step 063AKS712 in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123 (step 063AKS812).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS812, the performance control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step 063AKS813), updates the value of the performance process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting processing (step 063AKS814), and ends the variable display performance processing.

Figure 14-30 (a) is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S173 of the performance control process as a special chart hit waiting process for feature section 063AK.

When the special winning wait process starts, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the waiting time for receiving the winning start command has elapsed (step 063AKS901). If it is determined that the waiting time for receiving the winning start command has elapsed (step 063AKS901; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS902).

When it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS902; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS903). When it is determined that the sub-side time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS903; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time-saving flag and sets it to the OFF state (step 063AKS904), clears the right-hit promotion performance flag and sets it to the OFF state (step 063AKS905), and then controls to end the right-hit promotion performance (step 063AKS906).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS906, or if it is determined in step 063AKS902 that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS902; No), or if it is determined in step 063AKS903 that the sub-side time-saving count value is not "0" (step 063AKS903; No), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 063AKS907), and ends the special chart hit waiting process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS901 that the waiting time for receiving the winning start command has not elapsed (step 063AKS901; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning start command corresponding to a jackpot has been received (step 063AKS908).

When it is determined that a hit start designation command corresponding to a jackpot has been received (step 063AKS908; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the jackpot start performance time (step 063AKS909). In step 063AKS909, the jackpot start performance time timer value, which is the stored value of the jackpot start performance time timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the predetermined jackpot start performance time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS909, the performance control CPU 120 controls the start of the jackpot start performance (step 063AKS910), updates the value of the performance process flag to "6", which is the value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 063AKS911), and ends the special chart hit waiting processing.

If it is determined in step 063AKS908 that a hit start command corresponding to a big hit has not been received (step 063AKS908; No), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance determines whether or not a hit start command corresponding to a small hit has been received (step 063AKS912). If it is determined that a hit start command corresponding to a small hit has not been received (step 063AKS912; No), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance ends the special chart hit waiting process.

When it is determined that a hit start designation command corresponding to a small hit has been received (step 063AKS912; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the small hit start presentation time to one of the first to third specific times (step 063AKS913). Specifically, in step 063AKS913, the presentation control CPU 120 determines the small hit start presentation time to one of the first to third specific times depending on whether the small hit type is "small hit A" to "small hit E" by referring to the small hit start presentation time determination table shown in FIG. 14-30 (b), and sets the small hit start presentation time timer value, which is the stored value of the small hit start presentation time timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 122, to a value corresponding to the determined small hit start presentation time. The small hit type may be determined based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 14-30(b), in this embodiment, if the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B", the small hit start presentation time is set to the third specific time, if the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the small hit start presentation time is set to the second specific time, and if the small hit type is "small hit E", the small hit start presentation time is set to the first specific time.

Returning to FIG. 14-30(a), after executing the processing of step 063AKS913, the presentation control CPU 120 performs control to start the small win start presentation (step 063AKS914), updates the value of the presentation process flag to "4", which corresponds to the small win mid-presentation processing (step 063AKS915), and then ends the special chart winning wait processing.

Figure 14-31 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S174 of the presentation control process as a small win presentation process for feature part 063AK.

When the small win mid-performance processing starts, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the small win start performance time set in step 063AKS913 has elapsed (step 063AKS1001). In step 063AKS1001, the small win start performance time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the small win start performance time has elapsed is determined depending on whether the updated small win start performance time timer value is "0". If it is determined that the small win start performance time has not elapsed (step 063AKS1001; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the small win mid-performance processing.

If it is determined that the small win start presentation time has elapsed (step 063AKS1001; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the small win start presentation end flag provided in a specified area of the RAM 122 is on or not (step 063AKS1002). If it is determined that the small win start presentation end flag is not on (step 063AKS1002; No), the presentation control CPU 120 performs control to end the small win start presentation (step 063AKS1004) and sets the small win start presentation end flag to the on state (step 063AKS1005).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS1005, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on or not (step 063AKS1006). If it is judged that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1006; No), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the normal time passing prompting performance (step 063AKS1007) and ends the small win performance processing. On the other hand, if it is judged that the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS1006; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the time-saving time passing prompting performance (step 063AKS1008) and ends the small win performance processing.

In step 063AKS1002, if it is determined that the small win start presentation end flag is on (step 063AKS1002; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not a win end designation command corresponding to the small win has been received (step 063AKS1003). If it is determined that a win end designation command corresponding to the small win has not been received (step 063AKS1003; No), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the small win presentation processing.

If it is determined that a hit end designation command corresponding to a small hit has been received (step 063AKS1003; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 clears the small hit start presentation end flag and sets it to the off state (step 063AKS1009), performs control to end the normal time passing prompting presentation or the time-saving time passing prompting presentation that is being executed as the passing prompting presentation (step 063AKS1010), and then updates the value of the presentation process flag to "5", which is the value corresponding to the small hit end presentation processing (step 063AKS1011).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS1011, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether it has received either small hit end designation command 1 or small hit end designation command 2 as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 063AKS1012).

When it is determined that either the small win end designation command 1 or the small win end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1012; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the third special time (step 063AKS1013). In step 063AKS1013, the passing notification performance time timer value, which is the stored value of the passing notification performance time timer provided in a specified area of the RAM 122, is set to a value corresponding to the third special time.

After executing the processing of step 063AKS1013, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance judges whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on or not (step 063AKS1014). If it is judged that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1014; No), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs control to start the notification of passage of the jackpot area during normal time (step 063AKS1015) and ends the processing of the performance during the small win. If it is judged that the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS1014; Yes), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance performs control to start the notification of passage of the jackpot area during time-saving (step 063AKS1016) and ends the processing of the performance during the small win.

If it is determined in step 063AKS1012 that neither small hit end designation command 1 nor small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1012; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received either small hit end designation command 3 or small hit end designation command 4 as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 063AKS1017).

When it is determined that either the small win end designation command 3 or the small win end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the second special time (step 063AKS1018). In step 063AKS1018, the passing notification performance time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the second special time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS1018, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the time-saving area passing notification performance (step 063AKS1019), and ends the small win performance processing.

If it is determined in step 063AKS1017 that neither the small win end designation command 3 nor the small win end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1017; No), the performance control CPU 120 sets the passing notification performance time to the first special time (step 063AKS1020). In step 063AKS1020, the passing notification performance time timer value is set to a value corresponding to the first special time. After executing the processing of step 063AKS1020, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to start the miss area passing notification performance (step 063AKS1021), and ends the small win performance processing.

Figure 14-32 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S175 of the presentation control process as a small win end presentation process for feature part 063AK.

When the small win end presentation processing is started, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether the passing notification presentation time set in step 063AKS1013, step 063AKS1018, or step 063AKS1020 has elapsed (step 063AKS1101). In step 063AKS1101, the passing notification presentation time timer value is updated by subtracting 1, and whether the passing notification presentation time has elapsed is judged depending on whether the updated passing notification presentation time timer value is "0". If it is judged that the passing notification presentation time has not elapsed (step 063AKS1101; No), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the small win end presentation processing.

When it is determined that the passing notification presentation time has elapsed (step 063AKS1101; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received either the small win end designation command 1 or the small win end designation command 2 as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small win (step 063AKS1102). When it is determined that either the small win end designation command 1 or the small win end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1102; Yes), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a predetermined time as the hit start designation command reception waiting time (step 063AKS1103), updates the value of the presentation process flag to "3", which is the value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step 063AKS1104), and ends the small win end presentation process.

If it is determined in step 063AKS1102 that neither the small hit end designation command 1 nor the small hit end designation command 2 has been received (step 063AKS1102; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 as the hit end designation command corresponding to the small hit (step 063AKS1105). If it is determined that either the small hit end designation command 3 or the small hit end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time reduction flag to the on state (step 063AKS1106).

After executing the process of step 063AKS1106, the performance control CPU 120 sets the sub-side time-saving count value based on whether it has received the small win end designation command 3 or the small win end designation command 4 as the win end designation command corresponding to the small win (step 063AKS1107). If it has received the small win end designation command 3 indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled for the period until the variable display is executed five times after the end of the small win game state, then in step 063AKS1107, it sets the sub-side time-saving count value to "5". If it has received the small win end designation command 4 indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled for the period until the variable display is executed one time after the end of the small win game state, then in step 063AKS1107, it sets the sub-side time-saving count value to "1".

If it is determined in step 063AKS1105 that neither the small win end designation command 3 nor the small win end designation command 4 has been received (step 063AKS1105; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS1108). If it is determined that the sub-side time-saving flag is on (step 063AKS1108; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the sub-side time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109).

If it is determined that the sub-side time-saving count value is "0" (step 063AKS1109; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 clears the sub-side time-saving flag and sets it to the OFF state (step 063AKS1110), clears the right-hit promotion performance flag and sets it to the OFF state (step 063AKS1111), and then controls the right-hit promotion performance to end (step 063AKS1112).

After executing the processing of step 063AKS1107 or step 063AKS1112, or if it is determined in step 063AKS1108 that the sub-side time-saving flag is not on (step 063AKS1108; No), or if it is determined in step 063AKS1109 that the sub-side time-saving count value is not "0" (step 063AKS1109; No), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance process flag to "0", which is the value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step 063AKS1113), and ends the small win end performance process.

Below, examples of performance operations related to feature part 063AK are explained with reference to Figures 14-33 to 14-36.

First, referring to Fig. 14-33 and Fig. 14-34, an example of the performance operation when a small win variation is executed in the normal state will be explained. Specifically, below, an example will be explained in which a small win variation is executed in the normal state, and during the small win variation, the reach performance of Super Reach A and the time-saving suggestion performance are executed, and the third small win pattern is derived and displayed as the confirmed decoration pattern.

Figure 14-33(a) shows a state in which a losing symbol ("135") is displayed statically in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in the normal state. Figure 14-33(b) shows a state in which a small win fluctuation has started in the normal state, and variable display of decorative symbols is being performed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Figure 14-33 (c) shows a state in which a reach has been achieved and a reach effect for Super Reach A is being performed in which a character image AK6 representing character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 14-33(d) shows a state in which a time-saving suggestion effect has started and a predetermined losing symbol ("767") is temporarily displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. Figure 14-24(e) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is being displayed again in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C during a time-saving suggestion effect. Figure 14-33(f) shows a state in which a time-saving suggestion symbol is temporarily displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R during a time-saving suggestion effect. Figure 14-33(g) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is being displayed again in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R during a time-saving suggestion effect.

Figure 14-33 (h) shows the state in which the third small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the small win variation has ended.

Figure 14-33(i) shows a state in which control to the small win game state has begun, and a small win start effect is being executed in which a right arrow image AK8, which has the shape of an arrow pointing to the right and shows the message "Aim to the right!", and a small win start image AK9, which shows the shape of the special variable winning ball device 7 and shows the message "Put the ball here!" are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the state shown in Figure 14-33(i), in response to the start of control to the small win game state, a right hit promotion effect is started, and a right hit promotion image AK7, which shows an arrow pointing to the right, is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the normal state, the performance operation shown in FIG. 14-33(i) is executed, and then the performance operation shown in FIG. 14-34(a) is executed. FIG. 14-34(a) shows the state in which the normal time passing prompting performance is executed. In the normal time passing prompting performance, as shown in FIG. 14-34(a), the screen of the image display device 5 displays the normal time passing prompting image AK1 including the jackpot area passing prompting image AK2, the time-saving area passing prompting image AK3, and the miss area passing prompting image AK4, and the jackpot area light emitting unit 063AK25, the time-saving area light emitting unit 063AK26, and the miss area light emitting unit 063AK27 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 are illuminated, and the normal time passing prompting sound showing the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a time-saving? Is it a miss?" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The following describes the performance that occurs when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 during the normal passing incentive performance in the normal state.

In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 14-34(a) ends, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 14-34(b) is executed. FIG. 14-34(b) shows the state in which the normal jackpot area passage notification presentation is executed, and the normal jackpot area passage notification image AK10 showing the message "V" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 14-34(c) shows a state in which, after the small win game state ends, the game is controlled to the big win game state, and a performance is executed on the screen of the image display device 5 to display, as a big win start performance, a first big win start image AK11 in the shape of an arrow pointing to the right and showing the message "Aim right!", and a second big win start image AK12 showing the message "Put the ball in the attacker!". The second big win start image AK12 is a performance image that encourages the player to win the game ball in the special variable winning ball device 7. In the state shown in Figure 14-34(c), the right hit promotion performance is executed following the time when the game was controlled to the small win game state, and the right hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, we will explain the presentation operation that occurs when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 while the normal passing incentive presentation is being executed in the normal state.

In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 14-34(a) ends, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 14-34(d) is executed. FIG. 14-34(d) shows a state in which the time-saving area passage notification presentation is executed, and a time-saving area passage notification image AK13 showing the message "Lucky!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 14-34 (e) shows a state in which, after the small win game state ends, the normal state is controlled to the time-saving state in response to the start of the next variable display, and a time-saving entry effect is executed in which a first time-saving entry image AK14 showing the message "Time-saving!" and a second time-saving entry image AK15 showing the message "Aim to the right and put the ball in the electric chute!" are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the state shown in Figure 14-34 (e), a right-hit promotion effect is executed following the control to the small win game state, and a right-hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Also, in the state shown in Figure 14-34 (e), a time-saving count notification effect is executed in response to the control to the time-saving state, and a time-saving count notification image AK16 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in a display mode indicating that the number of time-saving times is four.

Next, we will explain the presentation operation that occurs when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21 while the normal passing incentive presentation is being executed in the normal state.

In the normal state, when the game ball passes through the losing area 063AK21, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 14-34(a) ends and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 14-34(f) is executed. FIG. 14-34(f) shows the state in which the losing area passing notification presentation is executed and the losing area passing notification image AK17 showing the message "Too bad!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 14-34 (g) shows the state in which, after the small win game state ends, when the game state is controlled to the normal state without any change, the next variable display starts and variable display is being performed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the "left," "center," and "right."

Below, referring to Fig. 14-35 and Fig. 14-36, an example of the performance operation when a small win variation is executed in the time-saving state will be explained. Specifically, below, an example will be explained in which a small win variation is executed in the time-saving state, a reach performance of Super Reach A is executed during the small win variation, and the third small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed decoration pattern.

Figure 14-35(a) shows a state in which a losing symbol ("135") is displayed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 during time-saving mode. In the state shown in Figure 14-35(a), a right-hit promotion effect is being executed, and a right-hit promotion image AK7 is being displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Also, in the state shown in Figure 14-35(a), a time-saving count notification effect is being executed, and a time-saving count notification image AK16 is being displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in a display mode indicating that the number of time-saving times is four.

Figure 14-35(b) shows a state in which, in the time-saving state, small win fluctuation has started and variable display of decorative symbols is being executed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the state shown in Figure 14-35(b), the display mode of the time-saving count notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time-saving count is 3.

Figure 14-35 (c) shows a state in which a reach has been achieved, the reach performance of super reach A is executed, and a character image AK6 representing character A is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 14-35 (d) shows the state in which the second small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the small win variation has ended.

Figure 14-35 (e) shows a state in which control to a small win game state has begun, a small win start effect has been executed, and a right arrow image AK8 and a start image AK9 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the state shown in Figure 14-35 (e), in response to the start of control to a small win game state, the right hit promotion effect continues to be executed, and a right hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

In the time-saving state, the performance operation shown in FIG. 14-35(e) is executed, and then the performance operation shown in FIG. 14-36(a) is executed. FIG. 14-36(a) shows the state in which the time-saving time passing prompting performance is executed. In the time-saving time passing prompting performance, as shown in FIG. 14-36(a), a time-saving time passing prompting image AK5 including a jackpot area passing prompting image AK2 and a miss area passing prompting image AK4 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, and the jackpot area light-emitting unit 063AK25 and the miss area light-emitting unit 063AK27 are illuminated without illuminating the time-saving area light-emitting unit 063AK26 provided in the special variable winning ball device 7, and a time-saving time passing prompting sound showing the message "Is it a jackpot? Is it a miss?" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

The following describes the performance that occurs when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 during the time-saving mode while the time-saving passage teasing performance is being executed.

When the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 during the time-saving mode, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 14-36(a) ends, and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 14-36(b) is executed. FIG. 14-36(b) shows the state in which the time-saving jackpot area passing notification presentation is executed, and the time-saving jackpot area passing notification image AK18 showing the message "BONUS!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 14-36 (c) shows a state in which, after the small win game state ends, the game state is controlled to a big win game state, the big win start effect is executed, and the first big win start image AK11 and the second big win start image AK12 are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In the state shown in Figure 14-36 (c), the right hit promotion effect is executed following the state when the game state was controlled to a small win game state, and the right hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, we will explain the presentation operation when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 or the miss area 063AK21 while the time-saving time passing teasing presentation is being executed in the time-saving state. In the time-saving state, the same presentation operation is executed when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 and when the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21.

When the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK or the loss area 063AK21 during the time-saving state, the presentation operation shown in FIG. 14-36(a) ends and the presentation operation shown in FIG. 14-36(d) is executed. FIG. 14-36(d) shows the state in which the loss area passing notification presentation is executed and the loss area passing notification image AK17 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

Figure 14-36 (e) shows a state in which, after the small win game state ends, when the game state is controlled to the time-saving state without changing, the next variable display starts, and the variable display is executed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In the state shown in Figure 14-36 (e), the display mode of the time-saving count notification image AK16 is updated in response to the start of the variable display, and is displayed in a display mode indicating that the time-saving count is two. Also, in the state shown in Figure 14-36 (e), the right-hit promotion performance is executed following the control of the small win game state, and the right-hit promotion image AK7 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As explained above, in the characteristic part 063AK, when in the normal state, a small win pattern (special display result) is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special chart game, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 formed in the special variable winning ball device 7 (variable means) is controlled to an open state, if the game ball (game medium) passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 (special area), time-saving transition control is performed based on the passage, and control is performed from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state); on the other hand, when in the time-saving state, a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the special chart game, and when the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to an open state, if the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, time-saving transition control is not performed based on the passage. Furthermore, in the characteristic section 063AK, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the normal state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state, and the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, different effects can be executed, and when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the time-saving state and the large winning opening 063AK4 is controlled to be in an open state, and the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the characteristic section 063AK is configured to be able to execute different effects. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control according to the state.

In addition, the feature section 063AK is configured to be able to execute the same effect when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state and when the game ball does not pass through either the jackpot area 063AK19 or the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state. This configuration can prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the feature section 063AK is configured to be able to execute different effects when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the time-saving state and when the game ball passes through the jackpot area 063AK19 in the normal state. This configuration can increase interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 063AK, different effects can be executed during variable display when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the normal state and when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the time-saving state. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the state.

In addition, in the feature section 063AK, when a small win symbol is derived and displayed in the special game in the normal state, a time-saving suggestion effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state can be executed during execution of the variable display as an effect that suggests that the small win symbol will be derived and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. With this configuration, a variety of effects can be executed, increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in feature unit 063AK, when a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the second special game, the time-saving state is controlled at a higher rate than when a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the first special game. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to whether a small win pattern is derived and displayed as a confirmed special pattern in the second special game, thereby increasing interest in the game.

This invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all of the technical features shown in the above embodiment, but may have a part of the configuration shown in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art.

In the above embodiment, as a pre-reading preview performance, the display mode of the reserved display displayed on the image display device 5 may be displayed in a display mode different from the display mode during normal times, so that a reserved display change performance can be executed that notifies the player that the variable display corresponding to the reserved display will be controlled to a small win game state, or that a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 063AK4, which is controlled to an open state in the small win game state, will pass through either the large win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21.

For example, the display color of the reserve display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started can be changed from the normal white color to blue, green, or red by the reserve display change effect, thereby making it possible to recognize the change in the display state of the reserve display and to indicate that the game is being controlled to a small win game state, or that the game ball that has entered the large winning hole 063AK4, which is controlled to an open state in the small win game state, will pass through either the large win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21.

Specifically, when the reserve display change performance is configured to be executable as a pre-reading notice, a pre-reading judgment may be made in the start winning judgment process executed in step S101 of the special pattern process processing based on the occurrence of a start winning. In the pre-reading judgment, for example, a random number lottery may be performed by referring to the first special pattern display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(a) or the second special pattern display result determination table shown in FIG. 14-12(b) to determine whether the variable display result is a "big win", a "small win", or a "miss", and if the variable display result is determined to be a "small win", a random number lottery may be performed by referring to the small win type determination table shown in FIG. 14-14(b) to determine whether the small win type is a "small win A" to a "small win E". After that, in the start winning judgment process, a setting may be made to send a start winning command indicating the result of the pre-reading judgment.

The start winning command set for transmission in the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing a command control process in step S27 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. The start winning command transmitted from the main board 11 may be stored in a start winning command buffer provided in a specified area of the RAM 122 by, for example, executing a command analysis process in step S75 of the performance control main process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6.

In this case, in the pre-reading preview setting process executed in step S161 of the performance control process, depending on the reception of the start winning command from the main board 11, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the hold display change performance as a pre-reading preview performance, and the execution mode.

When the hold memory stored when deciding whether or not to execute the hold display change performance and the execution mode includes a hold for which the variable display result is a "big hit" and a hold for which the variable display result is a "small hit" and the small hit type is a "small hit C" or "small hit D" in which the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, the variable display result and the change pattern may differ between the time of the pre-read and the time of the execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold that is the pre-reading target, due to the change from the normal state to the time-saving state after the end of the variable display that is executed first, that is, before the execution of the variable display corresponding to the hold that is the pre-reading target. In such a case, an inconsistency occurs between the suggested content of the hold display change performance as a pre-reading notification performance and the actual variable display result and change pattern, which may cause the player to distrust and reduce interest in the game.

Therefore, if the stored reserves include either a reserve for which the variable display result is a "big win" or a reserve for which the variable display result is a "small win" and the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D", the execution of the reserve display change presentation may be restricted. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

For example, in the pre-reading notice setting process, if the reserved items stored do not include either a reserved item whose variable display result is a "big hit" or a reserved item whose variable display result is a "small hit" and whose small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the execution status and execution mode of the reserved display change presentation may be determined according to the variable display result and the small hit type in accordance with the determination ratio shown in the normal reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 14-37(a). On the other hand, if the reserved items stored include either a reserved item whose variable display result is a "big hit" or a reserved item whose variable display result is a "small hit" and whose small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", the execution status and execution mode of the reserved display change presentation may be determined according to the variable display result and the small hit type in accordance with the determination ratio shown in the normal reserve change determination table shown in the limit reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 14-37(b). Whether the stored reserves include reserves for which the variable display result is a "big win" and reserves for which the variable display result is a "small win" and the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D" can be determined by checking the contents of the start winning buffer.

In the normal reserve change determination table, as shown in FIG. 14-37(a), when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the display mode of the reserve display is determined to be blue at a higher rate than when the reserve display change performance is not executed (white), the display mode of the reserve display is determined to be green at a higher rate than when the reserve display is blue, and the display mode of the reserve display is determined to be red at a higher rate than when the reserve display is green. With this configuration, the jackpot expectation is higher when the reserve display is displayed in red than when it is displayed in green, higher when the reserve display is displayed in green than when it is displayed in blue, and higher when the reserve display is displayed in blue than when it is displayed in white (when the reserve display change performance is not executed). In contrast, in the restricted reserve change determination table, as shown in FIG. 14-37(b), the execution of the reserve display change performance in which the jackpot expectation is green or higher is restricted. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 14-37(b), the reserve display change performance in which the reserve display is displayed in blue can be executed, but it may be restricted to only "no execution".

In the normal reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 14-37(a) and the limit reserve change determination table shown in FIG. 14-37(b), an example is shown in which when the variable display result is a "small win", the display mode is determined to be the same as when the variable display result is a "big win", but this is only one example, and there may be a display mode (such as "big win?") that is unique when the variable display result is a "small win" and the small win type is "small win A" or "small win B", or a display mode (such as "time?") that is unique when the variable display result is a "small win" and the small win type is "small win C" or "small win D". With this configuration, the variety of reserve display change presentations increases, making it possible to attract the player's attention.

In the above embodiment, the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game stored after the time-saving state ends may be configured to execute different effects depending on whether the reserved memory contains a reserved memory in which the special game display result is a "small win" and the small win type is a "small win C" or "small win D" in which the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, or whether such a reserved memory is not contained. Such a configuration can increase interest in the game.

For example, if the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game stored after the time-saving state has ended contains a reserved memory in which the special game display result is a "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D," a successful return display can be executed to notify that one of the reserved second special game games (remaining reserves) remaining after the time-saving state has ended will be controlled back to the time-saving state (there is a reserve in the reserve memory corresponding to the second special game in which the special game display result is a "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D"). On the other hand, if the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game stored after the time-saving state ends does not contain a reserved memory in which the special display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D", a return failure effect may be executed to notify that none of the remaining reserved memory will be controlled to the time-saving state again (there is no reserved memory in the reserved memory corresponding to the second special game in which the special display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D"). As an example, both the return success effect and the return failure effect may be an effect in which a combination of different decorative patterns is stopped and displayed after executing an effect that teases whether or not the time-saving state will be controlled again as a common effect.

In the above embodiment, as a performance corresponding to the small win fluctuation, a big win teasing performance that suggests that the game ball that entered the big winning opening 063AK4 controlled to an open state in the small win game state will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 and that the game ball will pass through the big win area 063AK19 and the miss area 063AK21 may be configured to be executable, and a rescue performance that suggests that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 and will be controlled to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game state based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state after a miss performance that suggests that the game ball did not pass through the big win area 063AK19 may be configured to be executable. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

For example, as a jackpot teasing effect, as shown in FIG. 14-38(a), a performance may be configured to be executable in which a jackpot teasing image AK19 including a jackpot suggesting image AK20 showing a message "jackpot" and suggesting that the game ball will pass through the jackpot area 063AK19, and a miss suggesting image AK21 showing a message "miss" and suggesting that the game ball will pass through the miss area 063AK21 is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In this case, as a miss effect, a performance may be executed in which the miss suggesting image AK21 included in the jackpot teasing image AK19 is highlighted as shown in FIG. 14-38(b) based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20. In the state shown in FIG. 14-38(b), the frame of the miss suggesting image AK21 is displayed thicker than the frame of the jackpot suggesting image AK20 that is not highlighted, so that the miss suggesting image AK21 is highlighted. After performing the performance operation shown in FIG. 14-38(b) as a miss performance, as a rescue performance, as shown in FIG. 14-38(c), a message "Time Reduction" is displayed in part of the area where the miss suggestion image AK21 is displayed, a time-saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed to suggest that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20, and the highlighting of the miss suggestion image AK21 is ended and a performance that highlights the time-saving suggestion image AK22 is executed. In the state shown in FIG. 14-38(c), the frame of the time-saving suggestion image AK22 is displayed thicker than the frame of the jackpot suggestion image AK20 and the miss suggestion image AK21, which are not highlighted, so that the time-saving suggestion image AK22 is highlighted.

In the above embodiment, in the normal processing of the special pattern shown in the flowchart of FIG. 14-11, after determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "big hit" (step 063AKS106), when it is determined in step 063AKS106 that the special pattern display result is not determined to be a "big hit" (step 063AKS107; No), it is determined whether or not the special pattern display result is a "small hit" (step 063AKS118). However, this is only one example, and the process of determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "big hit" and the process of determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "small hit" can be executed in any order. For example, after executing the process of determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "small hit", when it is not determined in the process that the special pattern display result is a "small hit", the process of determining whether or not the special pattern display result is a "big hit" may be executed. Alternatively, the process for determining whether the special chart display result is a "big hit," "small hit," or "miss" may be executed simultaneously with the process for determining whether the special chart display result is a "big hit" and the process for determining whether the special chart display result is a "small hit."

In the above embodiment, it has been explained that only one of the game balls that enter the large winning port 063AK4 in a small winning game state flows down through the distribution section supply path 063AK8 to the distribution section 063AK18, and the game balls other than that one game ball are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning ball device 7 through the discharge path 063AK9. However, this is merely one example, and it is also possible to configure the game so that multiple game balls that enter the large winning port 063AK4 in a small winning game state enter the distribution section 063AK18 through the distribution section supply path 063AK8. Such a configuration can increase the interest in the game.

When configured in this manner, after one game ball enters the distribution unit 063AK18 and passes through one of the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, and the miss region 063AK21, at least one other game ball may enter the distribution unit 063AK18 and pass through another of the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, and the miss region 063AK21. In this case, the game state after the end of the small win game state may be controlled based on whether the game ball that first entered the distribution unit 063AK18 passed through the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20, or the miss region 063AK21 among the multiple game balls that entered the distribution unit 063AK18 during the small win game state. For example, if the first game ball to enter the distribution unit 063AK18 in a small win game state passes through the big win area 063AK19, even if other game balls pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 or the miss area 063AK21 after that passage, the game state can be controlled to the big win game state after the end of the small win game state based on the first game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19.

Alternatively, the game state after the end of the small win game state may be controlled based on whether the last game ball to enter the distribution unit 063AK18 among the multiple game balls that entered the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small win game state passed through the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the miss area 063AK21. For example, if the last game ball to enter the distribution unit 063AK18 in the small win game state passes through the big win area 063AK19, even if other game balls passed through the time-saving area 063AK20 or the miss area 063AK21 before the passing, the game state may be controlled to the big win game state after the end of the small win game state based on the last game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19.

Alternatively, a priority order may be set in advance between the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21, and when a plurality of game balls that have entered the distribution section 063AK18 in a small win game state pass through a plurality of areas among the jackpot area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21, the game state after the small win game state ends may be controlled based on the passage of the game balls through the area with the highest priority among the areas through which they have passed. For example, the priority order of the jackpot area 063AK19 may be set higher than the priority order of the time-saving area 063AK20, and the priority order of the time-saving area 063AK20 may be set higher than the priority order of the miss area 063AK21. In this case, when multiple game balls that have entered the distribution unit 063AK18 pass through the big win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, and the miss area 063AK21, respectively, the game ball is controlled to a big win game state after the small win game state ends based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the big win area 063AK19, which has the highest priority.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that in the time-saving state, when a game ball that has entered the large prize winning port 063AK4, which has been controlled to be open in the small win game state, passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, time-saving transition control based on the passage is not performed. However, this is merely one example, and in the time-saving state, when a game ball that has entered the large prize winning port 063AK4, which has been controlled to be open in the small win game state, passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, time-saving transition control is performed based on the passage, and the period controlled to the time-saving state can be extended by controlling the state to the time-saving state for a predetermined period after the small win game state ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the game.

In this case, the game may be configured to be capable of implementing an effect that notifies the player that the period controlled to the time-saving state has been extended based on the game ball that entered the large prize opening 063AK4 passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 while in the time-saving state. Such a configuration can increase interest in the game. For example, a time-saving count recovery effect that increases the number of time-saving times indicated by the time-saving count notification image AK16 may be implemented as an effect that notifies the player that the period controlled to the time-saving state has been extended.

In this case, when the time-saving state is active, instead of a time-saving passage prompting effect that suggests passage through the jackpot region 063AK19 and the miss region 063AK21 without suggesting passage through the time-saving region 063AK20 (suggesting that the game ball will pass through the jackpot region 063AK19 and the miss region 063AK21 without suggesting that the game ball will pass through the time-saving region 063AK20), a normal time passage prompting effect that suggests passage through the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20 and the miss region 063AK21 (suggesting that the game ball will pass through the jackpot region 063AK19, the time-saving region 063AK20 and the miss region 063AK21). This configuration can increase the interest in playing games.

In the above embodiment, as a presentation corresponding to the small win fluctuation, a presentation suggesting whether the game ball that enters the large prize opening 063AK4 controlled to be in an open state in the small win game state will pass through the large win area 063AK19, the time-saving area 063AK20, or the loss area 063AK21 may be configured to be executable during the execution of the small win fluctuation. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game. For example, if the small hit type is "small hit A" or "small hit B" where the game ball passes through the big hit area 063AK19, a presentation suggesting that the game ball will pass through the big hit area 063AK19 is executed during the small hit variation, if the small hit type is "small hit C" or "small hit D" where the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20, a presentation suggesting that the game ball will pass through the time-saving area 063AK20 is executed during the small hit variation, and if the small hit type is "small hit E" where the game ball passes through the miss area 063AK21, a presentation suggesting that the game ball will pass through the miss area 063AK21 is executed during the small hit variation.

In the above embodiment, the normal time passing prompting effect and the time-saving time passing prompting effect were described as being started after the small win fluctuation has ended, the small win start effect has ended, and the opening and closing of the large prize opening has started. However, this is merely one example, and the normal time passing prompting effect and the time-saving time passing prompting effect may be configured to be able to start while the small win fluctuation is being executed. Such a configuration can increase the interest in playing the game. In particular, if the normal time passing prompting effect can be executed while a small win fluctuation is being executed, by displaying the normal time passing prompting image AK1 while a small win fluctuation is being executed, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the game state will be controlled to a big win game state after the small win game state ends based on the game ball passing through the big win area 063AK19 during the small win game state, the degree of expectation that the game state will be controlled to a time-saving state after the small win game state ends based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 during the small win game state, and the degree of expectation that the game ball will pass through the miss area 063AK21 during the small win game state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, a time-saving area passing notification effect is executed in which a time-saving area passing notification image AK13 showing a message "Lucky!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, while when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state, a failure area passing notification effect is executed in which a failure area passing notification image AK17 showing a message "Too bad!" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. However, this is merely one example, and the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state may be any effect different from the effect executed when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state. For example, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, the time-saving area light-emitting unit 063AK26 may be illuminated, whereas when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state, the time-saving area light-emitting unit 063AK26 may not be illuminated (turned off). Alternatively, when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the normal state, a notification sound indicating the message "Time-saving!" may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, whereas when the game ball passes through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the time-saving state, the notification sound may not be output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 has been described as having a jackpot area 063AK19, a time-saving area 063AK20, and a miss area 063AK21, but this is merely one example. The special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to have a time-saving area 063AK20, but not have a jackpot area 063AK19 or a miss area 063AK21. Such a configuration can reduce manufacturing costs.

In the above embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 may be configured to have a plurality of time-saving areas 063AK20. In this case, depending on which of the plurality of time-saving areas 063AK20 the game ball has passed through in the small win game state, the device may be configured to be controlled to a time-saving state for different periods after the small win game state ends. For example, the time-saving area 063AK20 may be configured to have a first time-saving area and a second time-saving area, and when the game ball passes through the first time-saving area in the small win game state, the device may be controlled to a time-saving state for a period until the variable display is executed five times after the small win game state ends, while when the game ball passes through the second time-saving area in the small win game state, the device may be controlled to a time-saving state for a period until the variable display is executed one time after the small win game state ends. This configuration allows the player to pay attention to which of the multiple time-saving areas 063AK20 the game ball will pass through during a small win game state, increasing the player's interest in the game.

In the above embodiment, it has been described that in the low probability low base state as the normal state, time-saving transition control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state, and the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends. However, this is merely one example, and it may be configured such that in the high probability low base state, time-saving transition control is performed based on the game ball passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 in the small win game state, and the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the small win game state ends.

Any part or all of the above configurations may be combined with each other in any manner.

Each configuration of feature 063AK may be combined with some or all of the configurations of the other features, as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of the other features, as appropriate.

For example, the feature 079SG may be introduced into the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the feature 063AK. Specifically, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the feature 063AK, during a first period of a predetermined effect such as a normal time passing prompting effect, a time-saving time passing prompting effect, or a reach effect such as Super Reach A to Super Reach C, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a display means, and during a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined effect may be configured to be output by the speakers 8L and 8R as sound output means at the same speed for the performance sound in both the first period and the second period. With this configuration, the progression speed of the effect video of the specified effect changes between the first and second periods, but the speed of the effect sounds corresponding to the specified effects such as the normal time passing prompting effect, the time-saving time passing prompting effect, and the reach effects of Super Reach A to Super Reach C does not change between the first and second periods, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 063AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 063AK is
In a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a variable display and capable of controlling a player to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed as a variable display result,
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103, etc.) capable of controlling the display to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state, etc.) in which the variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A variable means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7) that has a special area (e.g., a time-saving area 063AK20) and can be controlled between a first state (e.g., an open state) in which a game medium (e.g., a game ball) can easily enter and a second state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or has difficulty entering;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a performance corresponding to a variable display;
The variable means is controlled to the first state when a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern, etc.) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result (e.g., FIG. 14-6, FIG. 14-8, FIG. 14-23, etc.),
The state control means includes:
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and the variable means is controlled to the first state, if the game medium passes through the special area, the normal state is controlled to the special state based on the passage (e.g., FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-26, etc.);
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state and the variable means is controlled to the first state, if the game medium passes through the special area, no control based on the passage is performed (for example, FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-26, etc.);
The performance execution means is capable of executing different performances in a case where the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, and in a case where the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state and the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state (e.g., FIG. 14-8, FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-24, FIG. 14-31, FIG. 14-34, FIG. 14-36, etc.).
It is characterized by:
With this configuration, appropriate control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
The variable means has a specific area (for example, a big win area 063AK19, etc.),
The state control means is capable of controlling the game medium to the advantageous state when the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-26, etc.),
The effect execution means can execute the same effect when the game medium passes through the special area in the special state and when the game medium does not pass through either the specific area or the special area in the special state (e.g., FIG. 14-8, FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-24, FIG. 14-31, FIG. 14-36, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (2) relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
The performance execution means can execute different performances when the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (e.g., FIG. 14-8, FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-24, FIG. 14-31, FIG. 14-34, FIG. 14-36, etc.),
This may be done.
Such a configuration can increase the interest in the game.

(4) In any one of the gaming machines according to (1) to (3) above relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
The performance execution means is capable of executing different performances during execution of the variable display when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state (e.g., Figures 14-8, 14-9, 14-15, 14-16, 14-19, 14-33, 14-35, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, it is possible to provide suitable effects depending on the situation.

(5) In any one of the gaming machines according to (1) to (4) above relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an effect (e.g., a time-saving suggestion effect, etc.) that suggests that the special display result is controlled to the special state as an effect that suggests that the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state during execution of the variable display (e.g., Figs. 14-8, 14-9, 14-15, 14-16, 14-19, 14-33, 14-35, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, a variety of effects can be implemented, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines according to (1) to (5) above relating to the characteristic part 063AK,
A variable display of the first identification information (e.g., a first special game, etc.) and a variable display of the second identification information (e.g., a second special game, etc.) can be executed.
When the special display result is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the second identification information, the special state is controlled at a higher rate than when the special display result is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the first identification information (e.g., FIG. 14-14, etc.),
This may be done.
According to this configuration, the player can pay attention to whether the special display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the second identification information, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 064AK)
The characteristic portion 063AK includes the characteristic portion 064AK shown below.
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 064AK is
In a gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can execute variable display and can be controlled to a favorable state (such as a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103, etc.) capable of controlling the display to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state, etc.) in which the variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A variable means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7) that has a specific area (e.g., a big win area 063AK19) and a special area (e.g., a time-saving area 063AK20) and can be controlled between a first state (e.g., an open state) in which a game medium (e.g., a game ball) can easily enter and a second state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot enter or has difficulty entering;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120, etc.) capable of executing a performance corresponding to a variable display;
The state control means includes:
The advantageous state can be controlled based on the game medium passing through the specific area (for example, FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-26, etc.),
The game medium can be controlled from the normal state to the special state based on the passage of the special area (for example, FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-26, etc.),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a special effect (such as a normal passing prompting effect) that suggests passage between the specific area and the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state (e.g., FIG. 14-8, FIG. 14-10, FIG. 14-31, FIG. 14-34, etc.),
When the game medium passes through the special area when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the state control means does not control the game medium to the special state until the variable means is controlled to the second state (for example, FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-26, etc.),
It is characterized by:
With this configuration, appropriate control can be performed according to the state.

(2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The performance execution means includes:
In the normal state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, the special performance is executed (for example, FIG. 14-8, FIG. 14-10, FIG. 14-31, FIG. 14-34, etc.),
In the special state, when the variable means is controlled to the first state, a specific performance (e.g., a time-saving time passing promotion performance) is executed to suggest the passage of the specific area without suggesting the passage of the special area (e.g., FIG. 14-8, FIG. 14-10, FIG. 14-31, FIG. 14-36, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, it is possible to provide suitable effects depending on the situation.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2) relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The performance execution means can execute different performances when the game medium passes through the specific area in the special state and when the game medium passes through the specific area in the normal state (e.g., FIG. 14-8, FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-24, FIG. 14-31, FIG. 14-34, FIG. 14-36, etc.),
This may be done.
This configuration can increase the player's interest in playing the game.

(4) In the gaming machine according to the above (3) relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The variable means is controlled to the first state when a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern, etc.) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result (e.g., FIG. 14-6, FIG. 14-8, FIG. 14-23, etc.),
The performance execution means is capable of executing different performances during execution of the variable display when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state and when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the special state (e.g., Figures 14-8, 14-9, 14-15, 14-16, 14-19, 14-33, 14-35, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, it is possible to provide suitable effects depending on the situation.

(5) In the gaming machine according to the above (3) or (4) relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The effect execution means is capable of executing an effect (such as a time-saving suggestion effect) suggesting that the special display result is controlled to the special state as an effect suggesting that the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result when the special display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result in the normal state during execution of the variable display (e.g., FIG. 14-8, FIG. 14-9, FIG. 14-15, FIG. 14-16, FIG. 14-19, FIG. 14-33, FIG. 14-35, etc.),
This may be done.
With this configuration, a variety of effects can be implemented, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines according to (3) to (5) above relating to the characteristic part 064AK,
The effect execution means is capable of executing different effects when the game medium passes through the specific area and when the game medium passes through the special area when the special display result is derived as a variable display result and the variable means is controlled to the first state and then the variable means is controlled to the second state (e.g., FIG. 14-8, FIG. 14-23, FIG. 14-24, FIG. 14-31, FIG. 14-34, FIG. 14-36, etc.),
This may be done.
According to this configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the presentation that is executed when the variable means is controlled to the second state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 065AK)
The characteristic part 065AK will be described. In the characteristic part 065AK, the description of the parts (configuration, processing, etc.) common to the basic description will be omitted.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the basic description, after being controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it is possible to control it to a high base state (time-saving state). In the pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, when in the low base state (normal state), if the display result of the variable display of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display device 20 becomes a predetermined "time-saving pattern" among "normal pattern misses", it is controlled to the high base state (time-saving state) regardless of the display result of the variable display of the special pattern. This allows the game to transition from the low base state to the high base state without passing through the jackpot gaming state, providing an element of surprise in the game.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, when the display result of the normal pattern becomes a "time-saving pattern," the state transitions from a low base state to a high base state even if the variable display of the special pattern is being performed.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 65AK1 with feature part 065AK can execute a predetermined effect that suggests or notifies the player of the display result of a normal pattern or a special pattern. The predetermined effect can suggest or notify the player that the display result of a normal pattern will be a "normal hit" or a "time-saving pattern," or that the display result of a special pattern will be a "jackpot." Such a predetermined effect can make the player anticipate which display result will be suggested or notified, increasing the player's interest.

(Configuration of characteristic part 065AK)
Fig. 15-1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 with a characteristic part 065AK, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko gaming machine 65AK1 with a characteristic part 065AK has a different layout of some components from the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the basic description shown in Fig. 1. Note that here, mainly the parts that differ from Fig. 1 will be described, and the same components will be assigned the same numbers and will not be described.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 with characteristic part 065AK shown in FIG. 15-1, the game ball launched from the ball launching device is guided to the lower side of the game area via the first path, which is the path on the left side of the frame surrounding the image display device 5, or the second path, which is the path on the right side of the frame surrounding the image display device 5, and either enters (enters) each winning hole or is taken into the outlet without entering any winning hole.

Shooting a game ball so that it passes through the first path on the left side of the image display device 5 is called a left hit, and shooting a game ball so that it passes through the second path on the right side of the image display device 5 is called a right hit. The area to which a game ball hit from the left can be guided is called the left area, and the area to which a game ball hit from the right can be guided is also called the right area.

In the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, the winning ball device 6A is located below the image display device 5 in the left area of the game area, as in the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic explanation, while the variable winning ball device 6B and the special variable winning ball device 7 are located below and to the right of the image display device 5 in the right area of the game area. Therefore, in the high base state where the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port) is open, and in the jackpot game state where the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning port) is open, the game is played by hitting from the right, and in the low base state where the winning port is not open, the game is played by hitting from the left.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, the pass gate 41 is provided in the left and right areas, so that the normal game can be easily played even in a low base state where the game is played by hitting from the left. This ensures that in the low base state, the display result of the normal pattern becomes a "time-saving pattern", and there is an opportunity to transition to a high base state.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, the general winning opening 10 is provided in the left area and the right area. Note that the general winning opening 10 may be provided in either one of the areas.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK, a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacca lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d are provided as game effect lamps 9. The main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, the frame lamp 9b is provided so as to surround the game area, and the attacca lamp 9c is provided in a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. A movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided above the image display device 5 of the game board 2, and the movable body lamp 9 is provided on the movable body 32.

Next, the operation of the pachinko game machine 65AK1 of the characteristic part 065AK will be described. FIG. 15-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol process executed in step S26 of FIG. 5. In the normal symbol process, when the CPU 103 detects that the gate switch 21 has been turned on, i.e., that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 41 (step S411; Yes), it executes the gate switch passing process (step S412).

In the gate switch passing process of step S412, the CPU 103 checks whether the count value of the gate passing memory counter (gate passing memory number) has reached the maximum value ("4" in this example). If the maximum value has not been reached, the CPU 103 increments the count value of the gate passing memory counter by +1, extracts the value of the random number for determining normal symbols, which is a software random number, and stores it in a storage area corresponding to the value of the gate passing memory number. The CPU 103 also increments the number of lit normal symbol reserve indicators 25C by 1. After that, depending on the value of the normal symbol process flag, the CPU 103 executes one of the processes in steps S400 to S404 as shown below.

In the normal processing of normal symbols in step S400, if the state is such that the normal symbol variation can be started (for example, the normal symbol display device 20 is not displaying the normal symbol variation and the variable winning ball device 6B is not in the open state) and the gate passing memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses the value of the normal symbol winning judgment random number stored in the storage area and the normal symbol determination table shown in FIG. 15-3 to determine whether or not there is a win (whether or not the stopped normal symbol is to be the winning symbol) and whether or not it is to be the time-saving symbol. If the game state is in a low base state (if the time-saving flag is not set), the table shown in FIG. 15-3 (A) is used, and if it is in a high base state (if the time-saving flag is set), the table shown in FIG. 15-3 (B) is used. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation pattern setting process (step S401).

In the normal symbol variation pattern setting process of step S401, the CPU 103 starts the normal symbol process timer by setting the normal symbol process timer to a value equivalent to the variable display time (normal symbol variation time) from when the normal symbol is variably displayed until it is derived and displayed. The CPU 103 also executes control to send a command specifying the start of normal symbol variation to the performance control board 12. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is updated to a value ("2" in this example) corresponding to the normal symbol variation process (step S402).

The CPU 103 executes the variable display (variation) of the normal pattern in the normal pattern variation process of step S402. Then, it checks whether the normal pattern process timer has timed out, and if so, updates the value of the normal pattern process flag to a value (in this example, "3") indicating the normal pattern stop processing (step S403).

In the normal pattern stop processing of step S403, the CPU 103 stops the fluctuation of the normal pattern on the normal pattern display 20. Then, the normal pattern process timer is started by setting a value equivalent to the normal pattern pattern determination time (stop pattern display time) to the normal pattern process timer, and when the timer times out, it is confirmed whether the stopped normal pattern is a winning pattern or not. If it is not a winning pattern (if it is a losing pattern), if it is a time-saving pattern, a process for starting the time-saving state is executed. Also, if it is not a winning pattern (if it is a losing pattern), the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "0") indicating the normal pattern normal processing (step S400). If the stopped normal pattern is a winning pattern, the normal pattern process timer is started by setting a value equivalent to the normal electric role opening time to the normal pattern process timer. Then, the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to a value (in this example, "4") indicating the normal electric role opening processing (step S404).

The CPU 103 opens the variable winning ball device (normal electric device) 6B during the normal electric device open process in step S404. When the normal symbol process timer times out, the CPU 103 closes the variable winning ball device 6B and updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (in this example, "0") indicating normal symbol normal processing (step S400).

Figure 15-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a normal pattern determination table in which a judgment value is set regarding the normal pattern display result that determines the display result of the normal pattern in the normal normal pattern processing of step S400. In this embodiment, the range that the normal pattern judgment random number can take is 1 to 250, and a judgment value is set in the normal pattern determination table to be compared with the normal pattern judgment random number value.

Figure 15-3 (A) shows the normal symbol determination table used in the low base state. As shown in Figure 15-3 (A), in the low base state, if the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 1 or 2, it is determined to be a win (normal symbol win). If it is determined to be a normal symbol win, the variable winning ball device 6A is in an open state for 5 seconds. If the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 3 to 230, it is determined to be a miss (normal symbol miss). If it is determined to be a normal symbol miss, the variable winning ball device 6A is not in an open state. In the case of a normal symbol win or a normal symbol miss, the normal symbol variation time is 10 seconds, and the symbol determination time is 0.5 seconds.

In addition, if the random number value for determining the normal pattern is between 231 and 240, it is determined to be a miss (time-saving pattern A). If it is determined to be time-saving pattern A, the variable winning ball device 6A does not enter an open state, but is controlled to a high base state (time-saving state). In the case of time-saving pattern A, the normal pattern fluctuation time is 10 seconds, and the pattern determination time is 10 seconds.

Also, if the random number value for determining the normal pattern is between 241 and 250, it is determined to be a miss (time-saving pattern B). If it is determined to be time-saving pattern B, the variable winning ball device 6A does not enter an open state, but is controlled to a high base state (time-saving state). In the case of time-saving pattern B, the normal pattern fluctuation time is 15 seconds, and the pattern determination time is 10 seconds.

In this way, the time-saving symbol is part of a miss (a regular miss), and part of the judgment value corresponding to a regular miss is assigned to the time-saving symbol.

In addition, in the normal processing of the normal symbols in step S400, after judging (determining) whether or not a normal symbol is a winning symbol, a judgment is made as to whether or not to make it a time-saving symbol. By doing this, in cases where a normal symbol is both a winning symbol and a time-saving symbol is judged due to a random number error, etc., the normal symbol can be prioritized. Note that in a low base state, since it is more advantageous for the player to have a time-saving symbol than a normal symbol, it is also possible to first judge whether or not to make it a time-saving symbol, and then judge whether or not to make it a normal symbol.

In this embodiment, two types of time-saving patterns are provided, and the period of the high base state (ending condition, number of time-saving times) differs between when time-saving pattern A is displayed and when time-saving pattern B is displayed. As shown in FIG. 15-4 (A), when the display result of the normal pattern becomes "time-saving pattern A" in a low base state, the high base state continues until the special pattern changes 50 times (the number of time-saving times becomes 50). Also, when the display result of the normal pattern becomes "time-saving pattern B" in a low base state, the high base state continues until the special pattern changes 100 times (the number of time-saving times becomes 100). Therefore, time-saving pattern B is more advantageous for the player than time-saving pattern A.

In this embodiment, whether or not a time-saving pattern is to be used in the event of a normal miss and the type of time-saving pattern are determined by the random number value for determining normal patterns, but a different random number may be used to determine whether or not a time-saving pattern is to be used and the type of time-saving pattern. Also, the number of types of time-saving patterns is not limited to two, and there may be one type or three or more types. When there is one type of time-saving pattern, the process of determining the display result is made easier by determining whether or not a time-saving pattern is to be used by the random number value for determining normal patterns.

As shown in FIG. 15-3(A), the pattern determination time for normal hits and misses is 0.5 seconds, while the pattern determination time for time-saving patterns is longer at 10 seconds. In this way, by lengthening the pattern determination time for time-saving patterns, it is possible to execute notifications to transition to a high base state (time-saving state) or to hit to the right during the pattern determination time, thereby preventing or reducing the risk of a sudden transition to a high base state that puts the player at a disadvantage due to lack of preparation. Note that the pattern determination time may be constant regardless of the display result.

The change time when the time-saving pattern B is displayed is 15 seconds, and when other display results are displayed is 10 seconds. This allows the display result to be predicted by the change time of the normal pattern. The change time may be determined according to the display result, or the change time for all display results may be the same (for example, 10 seconds).

Figure 15-3 (B) shows a normal symbol determination table used in the high base state. As shown in Figure 15-3 (B), in the high base state, if the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 1 to 229, it is determined to be a hit (normal symbol hit). If it is determined to be a normal symbol hit, the variable winning ball device 6A is in an open state for 7.5 seconds. If the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 230, it is determined to be a miss (normal symbol miss). If the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 231 to 240, it is determined to be a miss (time-saving symbol A). If the random number value for determining the normal symbol is 241 to 250, it is determined to be a miss (time-saving symbol B). Even if the time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol A, B) appears in the high base state, as shown in Figure 15-4 (B), the number of time-saving times (termination condition of the high base state) is not updated, and the high base state is not affected during control. In other words, in the high base state, the time-saving pattern is treated the same as a normal miss. If it is determined to be a normal miss, the variable winning ball device 6A will not be in the open state.

When in a high base state, regardless of the display result, the normal pattern change time is 1.5 seconds, and the pattern determination time is 0.5 seconds. This allows the normal pattern to change repeatedly and quickly.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15-3, the change time is determined according to the display result of the normal pattern, but the change time (change pattern) of the normal pattern may be determined based on the display result of the determined normal pattern. In this case, if the display result is a normal miss, the change time determination ratio may be different depending on whether or not it is a time-saving pattern. In this way, it is possible to suggest whether or not the normal pattern will become a time-saving pattern depending on the change time of the normal pattern.

As shown in Figures 15-3 (A) and (B), the time required for the time-saving symbol to be determined in the high base state is 0.5 seconds, whereas the time required for the time-saving symbol to be determined in the low base state is longer at 10 seconds. In this way, by lengthening the time required for the time-saving symbol to be determined in the low base state, a notification that the player will transition to the high base state (time-saving state) or hit to the right can be issued during the pattern determination time, which can prevent or reduce the player from suddenly transitioning to the high base state and being at a disadvantage due to lack of preparation. Also, since such a notification is not necessary even if the normal symbol is displayed as a time-saving symbol in the high base state, the pattern determination time can be shortened to quickly execute the change of the next normal symbol. Note that the pattern determination time may be constant regardless of the game state.

In this embodiment, the game is controlled to the time-saving state even after the display result of the special symbol becomes a jackpot and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. As shown in FIG. 15-5(A), "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided as jackpot types when the display result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot, and after the jackpot game state of "jackpot A" is reached, the high base state continues until the special symbol is changed 50 times (the number of time-saving times becomes 50), and after the jackpot game state of "jackpot B" is reached, the high base state continues until the special symbol is changed 100 times (the number of time-saving times becomes 100). The display result of the first special symbol becomes a jackpot basically when the base state is low. Also, as shown in FIG. 15-5(B), when the display result of the second special chart is a jackpot, a "jackpot C" is set as the jackpot type, and after the "jackpot C" jackpot game state is reached, the high base state continues until the special chart changes 100 times (the number of time-saving cycles becomes 100). Note that the display result of the second special chart is basically a jackpot when the high base state is reached.

In this way, in this embodiment, the end conditions (number of time-saving cycles) of the high base state (time-saving state) are more favorable when the display result of the second special symbol is a jackpot than when the display result of the first special symbol is a jackpot. This prevents the end conditions of the high base state from being disadvantageous to the player when the normal symbol becomes a time-saving symbol and transitions to the high base state, thereby reducing disappointment for the player. Also, during a high base state, the end conditions of the high base state (time-saving state) in the event of a jackpot are more favorable than those of the low base state, making it easier to maintain the high base state for a long time once the high base state has been reached.

In addition, in the feature part 065AK, it is sufficient that the number of rounds of "jackpot A" to "jackpot C" and the presence or absence of the variable probability control are optional as long as the game is controlled to a jackpot game state and then controlled to at least a time-saving state. Also, the jackpot types and the number of time-saving times shown in FIG. 15-5 are only examples, and there may be more or fewer jackpot types than in FIG. 15-5, or the number of time-saving times may all be the same, for example.

Figure 15-6 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing when a normal pattern stops in step S403 in Figure 15-2. In the processing when a normal pattern stops, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the normal pattern confirmation display flag is set (step 065AKS001). The normal pattern is displayed from the time the display result is derived and displayed until the pattern confirmation time has elapsed. In other words, the pattern confirmation time can be said to be the period from the time the display result of the normal pattern is derived and displayed until the next normal pattern change begins. If it is the pattern confirmation time, the normal pattern confirmation display flag is set.

If the normal pattern confirmation display flag is not set (step 065AKS001; No), the display result of the normal pattern (confirmed normal pattern) is derived and displayed on the normal pattern display device 20 (step 065AKS002), and a setting is executed to send a normal pattern stop designation command that designates the stop of the normal pattern fluctuation to the performance control board 12 (step 065AKS003). In step 065AKS003, the normal pattern stop designation command according to the display result is set so that the display result of the normal pattern can be specified on the performance control board 12. Then, the game state (high base state, low base state) and the pattern confirmation period according to the normal pattern display result (see Figure 15-3) are set (step 065AKS004), and the normal pattern confirmation display flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS005). After that, the normal pattern stop processing is terminated.

If the normal symbol confirmation display flag is set (step 065AKS001; Yes), it is determined whether the normal symbol confirmation period has elapsed (step 065AKS011). In the processing of step 065AKS011, for example, a timer value corresponding to the symbol confirmation period set in step 065AKS004 is subtracted and it is determined whether it has become 0. If the symbol confirmation period has not elapsed (step 065AKS011; No), the normal symbol stop processing is terminated.

If the pattern determination period has elapsed (step 065AKS011; Yes), it is determined whether the display result is a normal winning pattern (step 065AKS012). If the display result is a normal winning pattern (step 065AKS012; Yes), the normal pattern process timer is set to the normal electric role opening time (step 065AKS013), the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to a value indicating processing during the opening of the normal electric role (e.g., "4") (step 065AKS014), and processing when the normal pattern has stopped is terminated.

If the display result is not a normal winning pattern (step 065AKS012; No), it is determined whether the display result is a time-saving pattern (step 065AKS015). If the display result is a time-saving pattern (step 065AKS015; Yes), it is determined whether the high base state is present by determining whether the time-saving flag is set (step 065AKS016). If the high base state is not present (step 065AKS016; No), it is determined whether the jackpot game state is present by, for example, checking the value of the special pattern process flag (step 065AKS017). In this embodiment, if the jackpot game state is present, the state is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, so that the transition to the time-saving state based on the time-saving pattern is not performed. In addition, if the special pattern is changing and the display result of the change is a jackpot, the game will be controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state based on the jackpot ends, so it is possible not to transition to the time-saving state based on the time-saving pattern.

If the game is not in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; No), the time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS018), and the time-saving count counter is set to the number of time-saving times corresponding to the time-saving symbol (see FIG. 15-4 (A)) (step 065AKS019). This allows a transition to the high base state (time-saving state). In addition, in response to the transition to the time-saving state, settings are made to send a game state designation command specifying that the game is in the time-saving state to the performance control board 12 (step 065AKS020).

If the display result is not a time-saving pattern but a normal miss (step 065AKS015; No), if the game is in a high base state (step 065AKS016; Yes), if the game is in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS017; Yes), or after the processing of step 065AKS020 has been executed, the value of the normal pattern process flag is updated to a value indicating normal processing of normal patterns (e.g., "0") (step 065AKS021), and the processing when the normal pattern stops is terminated.

Figure 15-7 is a flow chart showing an example of the performance control process processing (step S76) shown in Figure 8 of characteristic part 065AK. In addition to the performance control process processing of the basic explanation shown in Figure 9, the performance control process processing of characteristic part 065AK also includes a general map linked performance control process (step 065AKS1) and a time-saving notification setting process (step 065AKS2) after the advance notice setting process (step S161).

Figure 15-8 is a flow chart showing an example of the normal symbol linked performance control process (step 065AKS1) executed in the performance control process of Figure 15-7. The normal symbol linked performance is a performance that suggests and notifies the display result of the normal symbol in conjunction with the execution of the normal symbol variation. The normal symbol linked performance is included in the predetermined performance. In the normal symbol linked performance control process, control is performed to execute the normal symbol linked performance.

In the normal picture linking performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the normal picture linking performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS031). The normal picture linking performance execution flag is set when the execution of the normal picture linking performance is started as a specified performance. If the normal picture linking performance execution flag is not set (step 065AKS031; No), it checks whether the special picture linking performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS032). The special picture linking performance execution flag is set when the execution of the special picture linking performance is started. In this embodiment, it is also possible to execute a special picture linking performance that suggests and notifies the display result of the special picture in conjunction with the execution of the variation of the special picture (decorative picture) as a specified performance. The special picture linking performance will be described later. If the special chart linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS032; Yes), that is, if a special chart linked performance is being executed as a specified performance, a new specified performance (regular chart linked performance) will not be executed, and the regular chart linked performance control process will end.

If the special symbol linked performance execution flag is not set in step 065AKS032 (step 065AKS032; No), it is confirmed whether or not a normal symbol change start command has been received (step 065AKS051). If a normal symbol change start command has not been received (step 065AKS051; No), the normal symbol linked performance control process is terminated.

When the normal symbol variation start command is set (step 065AKS051; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not the high base state is present by determining whether or not the sub time-saving flag is on (step 065AKS052). When the high base state is present (step 065AKS052; Yes), the frequency of normal symbol variation is high and the display results are almost always normal hits, so the normal symbol linked performance control process is terminated without executing the normal symbol linked performance.

If it is not in the high base state (step 065AKS052; No), it is confirmed whether or not it is in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053). Whether or not it is in the jackpot game state is confirmed, for example, by the value of the performance control process flag. In that case, it is considered to be in the jackpot game state when the value of the performance control process flag is 6 or more. If it is in the jackpot game state (step 065AKS053; Yes), in order not to interfere with the performance during the jackpot and because it will be controlled to the high base state after the jackpot game state ends, the normal map linked performance control process is terminated without executing the normal map linked performance.

If the game is not in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS053; No), it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the Super Reach is being executed (step 065AKS056). Here, the fluctuation is being executed according to a fluctuation pattern accompanied by the Super Reach, and it may be determined by whether or not the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation exceeds the start timing of the Super Reach. If the reach effect of the Super Reach is being executed (step 065AKS056; Yes), the normal map linked effect control process is terminated without executing the normal map linked effect in order to draw attention to the reach effect of the Super Reach. Note that the normal map linked effect may not be executed even during the execution of effects other than the reach effect of the Super Reach (such as the advance notice effect on the image display device 5, the action effect of the movable body 32, and effects with a high expectation of a jackpot).

If the reach effect of the Super Reach is not being executed (step 065AKS056; No), a predetermined effect pattern is determined according to whether or not to execute the normal symbol linked effect and the effect type if executed (step 065AKS059). In step 065AKS059, as shown in FIG. 15-8 (B), whether or not to execute the normal symbol linked effect and the predetermined effect pattern are determined according to the display result of the normal symbol specified by the normal symbol variation start command.

Figure 15-8 (C) is a diagram showing the predetermined performance patterns. The predetermined performance is a performance that suggests and notifies the display result of a normal pattern or a special pattern, and the predetermined performance pattern SP1 is a pattern that suggests that both the normal pattern and the special pattern will be a miss, the predetermined performance pattern SP2 is a pattern that notifies that it will be a "normal hit", and the predetermined performance pattern SP3 is a pattern that notifies that it will be a "time-saving pattern". The predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5 are patterns that suggest that the special pattern will be a jackpot pattern, and the expected probability of a jackpot is higher for the predetermined performance pattern SP5 than for the predetermined performance pattern SP4. In this embodiment, the predetermined performance of all the predetermined performance patterns starts in the same manner, and then the result according to the predetermined performance pattern is notified. Therefore, even if the predetermined performance pattern SP1 suggests a miss, it can be expected that the start of the performance will be another predetermined performance pattern.

In addition, after suggesting the display result or the display result of the special pattern, a false pattern may be set to suggest that it will be a miss. For example, after displaying an image such as "Maybe it's time-saving?" to execute an effect suggesting that the display result of the normal pattern will be a time-saving pattern, a pattern may be set to display an image such as "Too bad" to indicate that it will not be a time-saving pattern.

The predetermined performance patterns corresponding to the normal map linked performance are SP1 to SP3, and in step 065AKS059, the execution of the normal map linked performance and which of the predetermined performance patterns SP1 to SP3 will be selected are determined at the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 15-8 (B). As shown in FIG. 15-8 (B), when the display result of the normal pattern (normal map display result) is "normal map hit", the ratio of the predetermined performance pattern SP2 is high, when it is "normal map miss", the ratio of the predetermined performance pattern SP1 is high, and when it is "time-saving pattern A" or "time-saving pattern B", especially when it is "time-saving pattern B" with a large number of time-saving times, the ratio of the predetermined performance pattern SP3 is high. This allows the normal map linked performance (predetermined performance) to suggest and notify the normal map display result. Note that the determination ratio shown in FIG. 15-8 (B) is one example, and any ratio may be used as long as the normal map linked performance (predetermined performance) can suggest and notify the normal map display result. In addition, a predetermined presentation pattern other than the predetermined presentation patterns SP1 to SP3 may be set as a predetermined presentation pattern for the normal map linked presentation.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it has been decided to execute the normal map linked performance (step 065AKS064). If it has not been decided to execute the normal map linked performance (step 065AKS064; No), the normal map linked performance control process ends.

If it has been decided to execute the normal map linked performance (step 065AKS064; Yes), the normal map linked performance timer is set to a value corresponding to the execution time of the normal map linked performance according to the decision result (predetermined performance pattern) in step 065AKS059 (step 065AKS078). Then, the normal map linked performance (predetermined performance) is started based on the performance control data corresponding to the predetermined performance pattern (step 065AKS079). Then, in response to the start of the normal map linked performance, the normal map linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS080), and the normal map linked performance control process is terminated.

If the normal map linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS031; No), the value of the normal map linked performance timer is subtracted by 1 (step 065AKS034), and it is determined whether the value of the normal map linked performance timer has become 0 (step 065AKS035). If the value of the normal map linked performance timer is not 0 (step 065AKS035; No), the normal map linked performance control process is terminated.

When the value of the normal map linked performance timer becomes 0 (step 065AKS035; Yes), the normal map linked performance is ended (step 065AKS036), the normal map linked performance execution flag is reset to the off state (step 065AKS037), and the normal map linked performance control process is ended.

Figure 15-9 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a special chart linked performance determination process for determining whether or not to execute a special chart linked performance as a predetermined performance and the predetermined performance pattern when it is executed. The special chart linked performance determination process is executed in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the performance control process shown in Figure 15-7 before the decorative pattern starts to change. In the special chart linked performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the normal chart linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS091). If the normal chart linked performance execution flag is set (step 065AKS091; Yes), that is, if the normal chart linked performance is being executed as the predetermined performance, the special chart linked performance determination process is terminated since a new predetermined performance (special chart linked performance) is not executed. If the normal chart linked performance execution flag is not set (step 065AKS091; No), it is checked whether or not the high base state is in place by determining whether or not the sub time reduction flag is on (step 065AKS092). If the base state is high (step 065AKS092; Yes), the average special chart change time is short and the period for executing the special chart linked performance cannot be secured, so the special chart linked performance is not executed and the special chart linked performance decision process is terminated.

The special chart linked performance determination process is executed when the decorative pattern starts to change, so the special chart linked performance is not determined and executed in the case of a big win game state or a small win game state. If the high base state is not in place (step 065AKS092; No), it is confirmed whether the current start of the change is a Super Reach Miss or a Super Reach Big Win change pattern (step 065AKS093). It is possible to determine whether the change pattern is a Super Reach Miss or a Super Reach Big Win change pattern by checking the change pattern specified by the change pattern designation command. If the change pattern is not a Super Reach Miss or a Super Reach Big Win change pattern (step 065AKS093; No), the special chart linked performance determination process is terminated. In this way, in this embodiment, if the change pattern is not accompanied by a Super Reach, the special chart linked performance is not executed, but even if the change pattern is not accompanied by a Super Reach, the special chart linked performance (for example, the specified performance of the specified performance pattern SP1) may be executed at a specified rate.

If the fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach Miss or Super Reach Big Hit (Step 065AKS093; Yes), a predetermined presentation pattern is determined according to whether or not to execute a special symbol linked presentation and the presentation style if executed (Step 065AKS094). In Step 065AKS094, as shown in FIG. 15-9 (B), whether or not to execute a special symbol linked presentation and the predetermined presentation pattern are determined according to the display result of the special symbol (decorative symbol).

The predetermined performance patterns corresponding to the special chart linked performance are SP1, SP4, and SP5, and in step 065AKS094, the execution of the special chart linked performance and the predetermined performance pattern SP1, SP4, or SP5 are determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 15-9 (B). As shown in FIG. 15-9 (B), when the special chart display result is a "jackpot", the predetermined performance pattern SP5 is determined at a high rate, and when the special chart display result is a "miss", the predetermined performance pattern SP4 is determined at a high rate. As a result, the predetermined performance pattern SP5 has a higher jackpot expectation (reliability) than the predetermined performance pattern SP4. The predetermined performance patterns SP4 and SP5 are determined when they are variable patterns accompanied by a super reach, so when the special chart linked performance of these predetermined performance patterns is executed, it is possible to notify that a super reach will occur. Also, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 15-9, a jackpot may occur even when the predetermined performance pattern SP1 is selected, so a performance with a sense of surprise can be executed. The determination ratio shown in FIG. 15-9(B) is an example, and any ratio may be used as long as the special chart linkage effect (predetermined effect) can suggest and notify the special chart display result. In addition, a predetermined effect pattern other than the predetermined effect patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 may be set as the predetermined effect pattern for the special chart linkage effect.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it has been decided not to execute the special chart linked performance (step 065AKS095). If it has been decided not to execute the special chart linked performance (step 065AKS095; Yes), the special chart linked performance decision process is terminated. If it has been decided to execute the special chart linked performance (step 065AKS095; No), settings are made to execute the special chart linked performance corresponding to the determined predetermined performance pattern (step 065AKS096). In step 065AKS096, for example, performance control data corresponding to the predetermined performance pattern is set as usage data in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Then, the special chart linked performance execution flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS097), and the special chart linked performance decision process is terminated.

Figure 15-10 is a flow chart showing an example of the time-saving notification setting process (step 065AKS2) executed in the performance control process of Figure 15-7. The time-saving notification setting process is a process for notifying the user of a transition to the time-saving state when the display result of the normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern and the high base state (time-saving state) is controlled accordingly.

In the time-saving notification setting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a regular pattern stop designation command specifying that the time-saving pattern has stopped has been received (step 065AKS101). If a regular pattern stop designation command specifying that the time-saving pattern has stopped has not been received (step 065AKS101; No), the time-saving notification setting process ends.

If a normal symbol stop command specifying that the time-saving symbol has stopped is received (step 065AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether the sub time-saving flag is on to confirm whether the high base state is in effect (step 065AKS102). If the high base state is in effect (step 065AKS102; Yes), control based on the time-saving symbol being activated is not executed, and the time-saving notification setting process is terminated.

If the high base state is not reached (step 065AKS102; No), the sub time-saving flag is set to the ON state (step 065AKS103). The sub time-saving flag is also set to the ON state when the jackpot game state ends and control is exercised to the time-saving state.

Next, it is determined whether or not the game is in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS104). If the game is in a jackpot game state (step 065AKS104; Yes), the game is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state, and the time-saving notification setting process is terminated without notifying the gamer that the game has transitioned to the time-saving state.

If the jackpot game state is not reached (step 065AKS104; No), a right-hit display instructing the player to hit to the right is displayed at a specified position on the image display device 5 (step 065AKS105).

Then, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the Super Reach is being executed (step 065AKS106). If the reach effect of the Super Reach is not being executed (step 065AKS106; No), settings are made to start a notification of the transition to the time-saving state (time-saving transition notification) and a notification of the right hit (right hit notification) (step 065AKS107).

Also, if the reach performance of the Super Reach is being executed (step 065AKS106; Yes), a setting is made to start a right-hit notification at the start of the next fluctuation (step 065AKS108). Thus, in this embodiment, when the reach performance of the Super Reach is being executed, in order to draw attention to the reach performance of the Super Reach, the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification are not executed, and the right-hit notification is executed at the next fluctuation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the reach performance of the Super Reach from being hindered. Note that the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification may not be executed even during the execution of a performance other than the reach performance of the Super Reach (such as a notice performance on the image display device 5, a performance of the movable body 32, a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, etc.). Also, although the time-saving state may have already been entered at the start of the next fluctuation, the time-saving transition notification may be executed at the next fluctuation.

Although the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification are not executed, the right-hit display is displayed, so that it is possible to at least indicate that the transition to the time-saving state has occurred, reducing the disadvantage suffered by the player due to not being able to understand the game status.

After executing the processing of step 065AKS107 or step 065AKS108, the time-saving notification setting process ends.

Figure 15-11 is a timing chart showing the effects when the time-saving transition occurs. In Figure 15-11, "Special pattern change" ON indicates that the special pattern is changing, and OFF indicates that the special pattern is stopped. "Regular pattern change" ON indicates that the regular pattern is changing, and OFF indicates that the regular pattern is stopped. "Right-hit image" ON indicates that the right-hit image is displayed on the image display device 5, and OFF indicates that the right-hit image is not displayed.

Figure 15-11 (A) is a timing chart for when the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed when the time-saving symbol stops. As shown in Figure 15-11 (A), when the time-saving symbol stops as a result of the display of the normal symbol while the special symbol is changing, the time-saving transition notification and the right-hit notification are executed. Also, the right-hit image is displayed at the timing when the time-saving symbol stops. Then, the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed, and the time-saving control will start when the next normal symbol starts to change. In this way, by executing the time-saving transition notification and the right-hit notification during the symbol determination time of the time-saving symbol before the time-saving control actually starts, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that they will be transitioning to the time-saving state and that they will be playing by hitting to the right, even if they are transitioning to the time-saving state while the special symbol is changing.

Figure 15-11 (B) is a timing chart when the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed when the time-saving pattern stops. As shown in Figure 15-11 (B), when the super reach occurs during the fluctuation of the special pattern, and the time-saving pattern stops as a result of the display of the normal pattern during the reach effect of the super reach, the right-hit image is displayed at the timing when the time-saving pattern stops, but the time-saving transition notification and the right-hit notification are not executed. Then, the right-hit notification is executed at the start of the next fluctuation after the end of the fluctuation accompanied by the super reach. Note that if the timing of the next fluctuation start is after the pattern determination time of the time-saving pattern, the time-saving state is already in effect, so in this embodiment, when the time-saving pattern stops during the reach effect of the super reach, the time-saving notification is not executed at the start of the next fluctuation. On the other hand, the time-saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation. For example, as shown in Figure 15-11 (B), if the pattern determination time of the time-saving pattern has passed after the start of the next fluctuation, the time-saving notification may be executed at the start of the next fluctuation.

In addition, if the timing of the end of the special pattern change that is being performed when the time-saving pattern stops is before the time for the time-saving pattern to be determined, which is the timing when the time-saving control actually starts, there is no need to hastily execute the time-saving transition notification or right-hit notification while the current special pattern is changing, so the time-saving transition notification or right-hit notification may be executed in the period after the start of the next special pattern change but before the time for the time-saving pattern to be determined has passed.

Next, an example of the performance of the characteristic part 065AK will be described. Figures 15-12 to 15-14 show an example of the performance of the predetermined performance of the characteristic part 065AK. In Figure 15-12 (A), a downward arrow indicates that the decorative pattern is being changed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". A small pattern that is always visible to the player is also changed in the upper left of the image display device 5. In addition, a predetermined performance area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, a predetermined performance (normal pattern linked performance, special pattern linked performance) is executed in the predetermined performance area 65AK11. The predetermined performance area 65AK11 may be displayed on the image display device 5 at all times, or may be displayed when the predetermined performance is executed. For example, the predetermined performance area 65AK11 may be erased in a high base state or a jackpot game state in which the predetermined performance is not executed.

When it is decided to execute a specified performance, as shown in FIG. 15-12(B), a performance image is scrolled in the specified performance area 65AK11 and the specified performance begins. In FIG. 15-12(B), a downward arrow indicates that the performance image is being scrolled. After that, the performance result according to the specified performance pattern is announced.

When the specified performance pattern SP1 is selected, as shown in FIG. 15-12(C), an "X" performance image is displayed in the specified performance area 65AK11 and stops. This notifies the user that the specified performance has failed and that the expected probability of the normal or special pattern display being a winning combination is low.

When the specified performance pattern SP2 is selected, as shown in FIG. 15-12(D), a "○" performance image is displayed in the specified performance area 65AK11 and stops. This notifies the user that the specified performance has been successful and that the normal pattern is a winning combination.

When the specified performance pattern is SP4, as shown in FIG. 15-12(E), a musical note performance image is displayed and stops in the specified performance area 65AK11. This notifies the user that the specified performance has been successful, and that there is a high probability that the special symbol will result in a jackpot, or that a super reach will be executed.

When the specified effect pattern is SP5, as shown in FIG. 15-12 (F), an effect image of the character "Heat" is displayed in the specified effect area 65AK11 and stops. This notifies the user that the specified effect has been successful, and that there is a high probability that the special symbol will result in a jackpot, or that a super reach will be executed.

In the case of the specified performance patterns SP4 and SP5, for example as shown in Figures 15-12 (E) and (F), decorative symbols of the same number stop in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and after a reach is reached, the performance result of the specified performance (a performance image of a musical note or the character "heat") is displayed. By doing this, if a specified performance is executed during a reach, it can be expected that it will become a super reach.

The predetermined performance patterns SP1 and SP2 are executed as normal pattern linked performances, and the predetermined performance patterns SP1, SP4, and SP5 are executed as special pattern linked performances. The normal pattern linked performances are executed regardless of the change in the special pattern (decorative pattern), so they can be executed at any timing while the special pattern (decorative pattern) is changing.

Figure 15-13 shows an example of the performance operation when the specified performance (normal symbol linked performance) of the specified performance pattern SP3 is executed. Figure 15-13 (A) shows that the decorative symbols are changed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R. Small symbols that are always visible to the player are also changed in the upper left of the image display device 5. In addition, a specified performance area 65AK11 is provided in the lower center part of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute a specified performance, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (B), a performance image is scrolled in the specified performance area 65AK11 and the specified performance begins.

If the specified effect pattern is SP3, as shown in FIG. 15-13(C), the "hour" effect image is displayed and stops in the specified effect area 65AK11. This notifies the user that the specified effect has been successful and that the normal pattern display will be a time-saving pattern.

When the time-saving pattern stops, as shown in FIG. 15-13 (D), a right-hit display instructing the player to hit right is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, and a time-saving transition notification is executed in which an image of the words "Entering time-saving mode!" is displayed in the center portion of the image display device 5. At this time, the number of times the time-saving mode has been activated is displayed in the upper left portion of the image display device 5. Here, "100 times" is displayed in response to the time-saving pattern B being activated.

After that, as shown in FIG. 15-13(E), a right-hit notification is executed, in which an image of the text "Aim right!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-13(F), the right-hit notification image is erased, and the right-hit notification ends. At this time, the "time" effect image is also erased in the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Thus, in this embodiment, even if the special pattern (decorative pattern) is fluctuating, if the display result of the normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern, the time-saving state is transitioned to. In that case, a predetermined effect that notifies the player that the time-saving pattern will stop can be executed, and a time-saving transition notification or a right-hit notification as shown in FIG. 15-13(D) and (E) is executed, so that the transition to the time-saving state can be conveniently notified. This allows the player to continue playing without confusion.

Figure 15-14 shows an example of the performance operation when a specified performance (normal symbol linked performance) of the specified performance pattern SP3 is executed during the reach performance of a super reach. Figure 15-14 (A) shows that the decorative symbols showing the number "7" have stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5C have changed to result in a reach. Small symbols that are always visible to the player are also changed in the upper left of the image display device 5. In addition, a specified performance area 65AK11 is provided in the lower central part of the image display device 5.

When it is decided to execute the specified performance, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (B), the performance image is scrolled in the specified performance area 65AK11 and the specified performance starts. At this time, the reach performance of the super reach starts on the image display device 5.

If the specified effect pattern is SP3, as shown in FIG. 15-14(C), the "hour" effect image is displayed and stops in the specified effect area 65AK11. This notifies the user that the specified effect has been successful and that the normal pattern display will be a time-saving pattern.

When the time-saving symbol stops during the Super Reach performance, as shown in FIG. 15-14 (D), a right-hit display instructing the player to hit right is displayed in the lower right portion of the image display device 5, but the image display device 5 does not notify the player of the time-saving transition or right-hit, and the Super Reach performance continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 15-14(E), the decorative symbol showing the number "6" stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the middle, resulting in a miss. At this time, the "hour" effect image is also erased from the predetermined effect area 65AK11. Then, as shown in FIG. 15-14(F), as the next decorative symbol starts to change, a right-hit notification is executed in which an image of the words "Aim right!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. At this time, the number of time-saving times is displayed in the upper left part of the image display device 5. Here, "49 times" is displayed in response to the time-saving symbol A. Note that here, the time-saving state was entered during the previous change, and as one change has been consumed, the number of time-saving times has been reduced from 50 to 49.

In this embodiment, if the display result of the normal pattern during the reach performance of the Super Reach becomes a time-saving pattern, the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification are not executed, and the reach performance of the Super Reach is executed with priority. If the Super Reach results in a jackpot, the game will be controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot. Therefore, even if a time-saving transition notification is executed during the reach performance of the Super Reach, there is a possibility that the notification will be wasted or the performance will be uninteresting, so the reach performance of the Super Reach is prioritized. And if the display result is a miss, a right-hit notification is executed at the time of the next change, so that it is possible to appropriately notify that the game has transitioned to the time-saving state and that a right hit will be performed. In addition, if the display result of the normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern during the reach performance of the super reach, and the display result of the change accompanying the super reach becomes a jackpot, the notification corresponding to the display result of the normal pattern becoming a time-saving pattern (time-saving transition notification, right-hit notification) may not be executed, or a notification corresponding to the display result of the normal pattern becoming a time-saving pattern may be executed in the first change after the end of the jackpot game state.

(Modification of characteristic part 065AK)
This characteristic part is not limited to this embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible, and further features may be added. The process contents and determination ratios of the flowcharts shown in the above embodiment and modified examples, and the method of determining various effects are only examples, and any method may be used as long as it can achieve the same effect as the above embodiment and can perform the effects shown in the above embodiment. In addition, the example of the performance operation shown in the above embodiment is only an example, and can be changed as appropriate as long as it can achieve the same performance effect. In addition, not all of the configurations described in the above embodiment are essential configurations, and some of them may be missing. In addition, this characteristic part may be combined with other characteristic parts as appropriate.

When the display result of the special pattern is read in advance and a pre-reading preview performance is executed, if the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance may be restricted. For example, if the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern, the pre-reading preview performance may not be executed until the time-saving pattern stops and the game transitions to the time-saving state. In addition, the display result of the normal pattern before the start of the fluctuation is read in advance, and if there is reserved data of a normal pattern that will become a time-saving pattern, the pre-reading preview performance that predicts the display result of the special pattern may be restricted. In this way, it is possible to prevent the game state from being changed after the pre-reading preview performance is executed, which changes the fluctuation pattern between the time of the pre-reading and the time of the actual fluctuation execution, and causes it to become inconsistent with the performance content of the pre-reading preview performance.

In addition to the jackpot signal (output during a jackpot) and special prize signal (output during a jackpot and during time-saving), a time-saving signal (output only during time-saving) may be provided as a signal to be output externally to the hall computer or data display device.

In the above embodiment, if the display result of the normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern in the jackpot game state, control to the time-saving state is not performed, but if a jackpot occurs in a low base state, control to the time-saving state may be performed based on the time-saving pattern in the jackpot game state corresponding to the jackpot. In this case, the order is jackpot game state start → time-saving control start based on the time-saving pattern → jackpot game state end, and the base changes before and after the jackpot game state. Therefore, the setting of the number of time-saving times based on the control to the jackpot game state may be performed at the start of the change after the jackpot game state ends. For example, if the number of time-saving times when a jackpot occurs in a low base state is 50 times or 100 times, and the number of time-saving times when a jackpot occurs in a high base state is 100 times, if the time-saving pattern stops during the jackpot game state, the number of time-saving times after the jackpot game state ends is set to 100 times. By setting the number of time-saving times when the fluctuation starts after the end of the jackpot game state, it is possible to make an appropriate state transition even if the game state changes during the jackpot. Note that when the jackpot game state is reached, the number of time-saving times may be constant regardless of the game state, or the number of time-saving times may be determined at a fixed rate.

In the above embodiment, the predetermined effects (normal pattern linked effects, special pattern linked effects) that suggest or notify the display result of a normal pattern or a special pattern were effects that scrolled the effect image in the predetermined effect area 65AK11 to display the effect result (Figures 15-12 to 15-14), but any effect that can suggest or notify the display result of a normal pattern or a special pattern may be used. In addition, the predetermined effect may be an effect that at least suggests or notifies whether or not a normal pattern becomes a time-saving pattern, or the display result of a special pattern.

In addition, in the above embodiment, if the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern in a high base state, the number of time-saving times is not updated, but if the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern in a high base state, the number of time-saving times may be updated or added. Also, the number of time-saving times and the determination ratio of the number of time-saving times may be different when the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern in a low base state and when the display result of the normal pattern is a time-saving pattern in a high base state.

In the above embodiment, the execution of the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification was restricted in certain cases, such as during the reach performance of a super reach, but if a transition to a time-saving state occurs in response to a time-saving pattern being reached, regardless of the performance content during execution, the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification may be executed. For example, if the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification are executed on a display means other than the image display device 5, the time-saving transition notification and right-hit notification may be executed regardless of the performance content on the image display device 5.

(Means relating to characteristic part 065AK)
(1) The gaming machine according to the characteristic part 065AK is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 65AK1) that performs variable display of special identification information (e.g., special symbols), and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) in which a gaming medium is likely to enter a special variable means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device 7 (a big winning hole)) based on the result of the variable display of the special identification information becoming a specific display result (e.g., a big winning symbol),
A variable control means (e.g., CPU 103 for executing the process of step S404) for performing a variable display of normal identification information (e.g., normal symbols), and changing the normal variable means (e.g., variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port)) to a predetermined state (e.g., open state) in which the game medium can easily enter the normal variable means (e.g., variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port)) based on the result of the variable display of the normal identification information becoming a predetermined result (e.g., a normal winning pattern);
A state control means (e.g., a CPU 103 that executes the process of step 065AKS018) capable of controlling the normal variable means to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the normal variable means is more likely to change to the predetermined state than the normal state;
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
The state control means can control from the normal state to the special state based on the variable display result of the normal identification information becoming a special result (e.g., a time-saving pattern) different from the predetermined result (e.g., executing the process of step 065AKS018),
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (e.g., a specific effect of a specific effect pattern SP4, a specific effect of a specific effect pattern SP5, a special picture linkage effect) that suggests that a variable display result of the special identification information will be the specific display result, and a special effect (e.g., a specific effect of a specific effect pattern SP3, a normal picture linkage effect) that suggests that a variable display result of the normal identification information will be the special result,
The state control means is capable of controlling from the normal state to the special state (for example, executing the processing of step 065AKS018) even if the variable display of special identification information is being executed when the variable display result of normal identification information becomes the special result.
According to such a configuration, the state transition can be performed appropriately, and interest in the game can be increased.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A predetermined notification means for performing a predetermined notification (for example, a time-saving transition notification, a right-hit notification) based on the normal variable means changing to the predetermined state;
It may also be possible to provide a predetermined notification limiting means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that executes the processing of steps 065AKS106 and 065AKS108) that limits the predetermined notification depending on the performance content during the variable display of the special identification information.
With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from interfering with the presentation during the variable display of the special identification information.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The effect execution means may be capable of executing an effect that suggests that, in the normal state, the variable display result of the normal identification information will be the specified result, the variable display result of the normal identification information will be the special result, or the variable display result of the special identification information will be the specific display result (for example, capable of executing a specified effect of specified effect patterns SP1 to SP5; Figures 15-12 and 15-13).
According to this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the display results of both the normal identification information and the special identification information.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The state control means can control the state to the special state based on the fact that the state control means has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 15-5 );
When starting the variable display of the special identification information after control to the advantageous state, the termination condition of the special state, which is controlled based on control to the advantageous state, may be made different depending on whether the state is the normal state or the special state.
With this configuration, the state transition can be performed appropriately.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above,
When the variable display result of the normal identification information is the special result, the time from when the variable display result is displayed to when it is confirmed may be longer (for example, Figure 15-3 (A)) than when the variable display result of the normal identification information is the specified result.
With this configuration, the state transition can be performed appropriately.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
In the normal state, the time from when the special result is displayed as a variable display result of the normal identification information to when it is determined may be longer than when the special state is selected (e.g., Figures 15-3 (A) and (B)).
With this configuration, the state transition can be performed appropriately.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration of the characteristic portion may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other characteristic portions as appropriate. The combined characteristics or individual uncombined characteristics may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other characteristic portions as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 079SG)
Next, the characteristic part 079SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present characteristic part 079SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 16-1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 in the present characteristic part 079SG. As shown in FIG. 16-1, the sound control board 13 in the present characteristic part 079SG is equipped with a sound synthesis IC 079SG132 that cooperates with the performance control CPU 120 to generate sounds (performance sounds) output from the speakers 8L and 8R, an amplifier circuit (amplifier) 079SG134 that amplifies the output sound of the sound generated by the sound synthesis CI 079SG132, and a sound data ROM 079SG133. The performance control CPU 120 outputs sound number data to the sound synthesis IC 079SG132 based on a performance control command from the main board 11, and causes the sound synthesis IC 079SG132 to generate a sound corresponding to the sound number data.

When sound number data is input from the performance control CPU 120, the voice synthesis IC 079SG132 generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the input sound number data individually for each speaker 8L, 8R and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 079SG134. The amplifier circuit 079SG134 amplifies the voice and sound effects output from the voice synthesis IC 079SG132 and outputs them to each speaker 8L, 8R.

The sound data ROM 079SG133 stores control data for each speaker 8L, 8R, which is associated with sound number data and is used to output sounds corresponding to the performance executed by the performance command to which the sound number data corresponds. In other words, this control data is a collection of data including sound data that chronologically describes the output mode (frequency characteristics, timing (delay), etc.) of sounds such as sound effects and BGM (music) output from each speaker 8L, 8R during the performance period (for example, the decorative pattern variable display period).

Figure 16-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 079. The display area of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 079SG is formed in a rectangular shape with a height L and a left-right width L when viewed from the front. Most of the display area constitutes a first display area 079SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns, reach effects, operation promotion effects and still image display effects described later. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 constitutes a second display area 079SG005Sa including a first reserved memory display area 079SG005D that can display the first reserved memory number by the number of reserved displays in white circles, a second reserved memory display area 079SG005U that can display the second reserved memory number by the number of reserved displays in white circles, and a caption display area 079SG005T that can display a caption indicating the game status.

In other words, the entire display area of the image display device 5 excluding the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb becomes the first display area 079SG005F.

The second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb are display areas that display information related to the game (reserved display, subtitle display, display of the fourth symbol, and display of the number of reserved memories) at the periphery of the display area of the image display device 5, closer to the first display area 079SG005F. In other words, the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this characteristic part 079SG are also UI (user interface) display areas in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The upper right corner of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 079SG005Sb that includes a fourth pattern 079SG005J, which indicates that the special pattern is being variably displayed, and a display of the number of reserved first special patterns and the number of reserved second special patterns.

Of these, the second display area 079SG005Sa is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, with a height that is less than half the height H of the entire display area of the image display device 5, and a left-right width that is the same as the left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5. The third display area 079SG005Sb is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, but its height and left-right width are much shorter than the height H and left-right width L of the entire display area of the image display device 5.

For this reason, in this characteristic part 079SG, the area of the first display region 079SG005F relative to the entire display region of the image display device 5 is larger than the combined area of the second display region 079SG005Sa and the third display region 079SG005Sb.

As shown in FIG. 16-2 (B), in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, the performance control CPU 120 executes the pending display operation process (see FIG. 8-13) described below, which allows each pending display to be rotated around the vertical axis at a constant speed (for example, rotation speed V3).

As shown in FIG. 16-2 (C), in the caption display area 079SG005T, the performance control CPU 120 executes the caption operation process (see FIG. 16-13) described below, which makes it possible to display a message according to the game status or the performance being performed (for example, if a specific reach performance is in progress, a message according to the status of the performance such as "XX mode in progress!") while moving from left to right at a constant speed (for example, movement speed V3).

When the characters included in the message corresponding to the game status reach the right end of the caption display area 079SG005T and cease to be displayed, they are simultaneously displayed again at the left end of the caption display area 079SG005T and moved again from left to right. Therefore, when a message corresponding to the game status is displayed while moving in the caption display area 079SG005T, the entire message corresponding to the game status is always displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T, making it easier for the player to recognize the current game status.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, an example is shown in which the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the caption display area 079SG005T are rotated and moved at a common constant speed (V3), but the invention is not limited to this, and the pending display in the first pending memory display area 079SG005D and the second pending memory display area 079SG005U and the message in the caption display area 079SG005T may each be rotated and moved at different constant speeds.

As shown in FIG. 16-2 (D), the fourth symbol 079SG005J has an upper symbol 079SG005Ja and a lower symbol 079SG005Jb, and these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb flash alternately at a regular interval to indicate that the special symbol is being variable displayed. Also, if the variable display result is a miss, both of these upper symbol 079SG005Ja and lower symbol 079SG005Jb are turned off (OFF) at the end of the variable display, whereas if the variable display result is a jackpot or miss, both are lit (ON) at the end of the variable display.

The display of the first special pattern reserved memory count and the display of the second special pattern reserved memory count in the third display area 079SG005Sb are displays that change only when a new reserved memory occurs and when a new variable display starts. In other words, unlike the fourth pattern 079SG005J, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T, the display mode of the display of the first special pattern reserved memory count and the second special pattern reserved memory count in the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change except when the variable display starts.

Next, the display control unit 123 in this feature unit 079SG will be described. The CGROM in the display control unit 123 stores multiple types of image data for displaying an image on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 can display a specific image on the image display device 5 based on one image data stored in the CGROM based on an instruction from the performance control CPU 120, and can display a specific performance screen by arranging multiple types of image data and displaying an image on the image display device 5. When preventing a specific image from being displayed on the image display device 5, depending on the situation, there are cases where other image data is arranged in front of the image data of the specific image with a transmittance of 0%, thereby controlling so that an image based on the image data of the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen, and cases where an image is displayed on the image display device 5 that has created display data in which the image data of the specific image is not arranged, thereby controlling so that the specific image is not displayed on the performance screen.

As shown in Figures 16-3 (A) to 16-3 (D), for example, when an image is displayed on the image display device 5, the image is displayed on the image display device 5 based on display data created by arranging multiple image data including image data 1 to 3.

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (A), image data 1 is data that is drawn to display the first pending memory display area 079SG005D, the second pending memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa, and the fourth pattern 079SG005J in the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is also data that is drawn to display the small pattern of the image data 1 decorative pattern in the first display area 079SG005F (to the left of the third display area 079SG005Sb).

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (B), image data 2 is data that is drawn to display images of chance-up effects, still image display effects, and operation promotion effects, which will be described later, in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (C), image data 3 is data that is drawn to display variable decorative symbols and reach effects in the first display area 079SG005F.

As shown in Fig. 16-3(A) to Fig. 16-3(C), display priorities are set for these image data 1, image data 2, and image data 3 for displaying images on the image display device 5. The display priority is set highest for image data 1, and lowest for image data 3 (image display priority on the image display device 5: image data 1>image data 2>image data 3). That is, on the image display device 5, an image based on image data 1 is displayed as the topmost image, an image based on image data 2 is displayed as an image lower than an image based on image data 1, and an image based on image data 3 is displayed as an image lower (lowest layer) than images based on image data 1 and image data 2. Therefore, on the image display device 5, an image based on image data 2 is displayed with priority over an image based on image data 3, and an image based on image data 1 is displayed with priority over images based on image data 2 and image data 3, as shown in Fig. 16-3(D).

As shown in FIG. 16-3 (D), when an image based on image data 1, an image based on image data 2, and an image based on image data 3 are simultaneously displayed on the image display device 5, the image based on image data 3 is displayed as the image at the lowest hierarchical level, and therefore at least a portion of the image based on image data 3 may be difficult to view or may be impossible to view due to the image based on the first data and the image based on image data 2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, the details of which will be described later, images based on image data 1 and image data 2 are always displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images with a constant progression speed, while images based on image data 3 are displayed on the image display device 5 as moving images or still images with multiple progression speeds based on data previously stored in the CGROM.

In particular, in this feature section 079SG, the details of which will be described later, during the reach performance of a super reach, the video of the reach performance can be displayed at the normal progression speed V1 and at a progression speed V2 (slow motion) slower than V1. This is because data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V1 and data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V2 are stored in advance in the CGROM, but the invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to store in advance only the data for the performance video to be displayed at the progression speed V1 in the CGROM, and perform a predetermined process on that data to make it possible to display part of the performance video of the reach performance at the progression speed V2.

In this way, in this characteristic part 079SG, the video progression speed, which is the speed at which the presentation video changes, is set to V1, resulting in a non-slow motion period in which the player perceives the progress of the reach presentation as being a first speed that is fast, and the video progression speed is set to V2, which is slower than V1, resulting in a slow motion period in which the player perceives the progress of the reach presentation as being a second speed that is slower. In other words, the slow motion video, which is a presentation video with a slow presentation progress speed in this characteristic part 079SG, may be a video whose video progress speed is slower than the non-slow motion video, which is displayed before the slow motion video and has a video progress speed of V1.

In addition, this feature section 079SG shows an example in which a slow motion period is provided in all super reach performances (see Figs. 16-18 to 16-25), but this invention is not limited to this. For example, the content of the performance video displayed on the image display device 5 as a super reach performance is the same as the content of the super reach performance shown in Figs. 16-18 to 16-25, but the video progression speed does not change from V1 to V2, that is, a super reach performance that does not enter a slow motion period may be executed, making it easier for the player to recognize that a slow motion period has begun in the super reach performance shown in Figs. 16-18 to 16-25.

In other words, when a super reach performance is executed in which the content of the performance video is the same but the video progression speed does not change to V2, the performance video with the second speed slower than the first speed in this invention corresponds to a performance video with the same content that is displayed at a video progression speed V2 that is slower than the video progression speed V1 in a non-slow motion super reach performance, and thus is displayed for a longer period of time than a non-slow motion super reach performance.

In addition, as described above, in this feature section 079SG, the image progression speed of the effect video is slowed down to create a slow-motion effect in which the player feels that the reach effect is progressing slowly, and an example is given in which the sound output from speakers 8L, 8R does not change from the playback speed V3, but this invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to create a pseudo-slow-motion effect in which the player feels that the reach effect is progressing slowly by not changing the image progression speed of the effect video (keeping it at V1) and instead speeding up the playback speed of the sound output from speakers 8L, 8R and the light emission cycle of game effect lamp 9.

In other words, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 079SG is provided with a plurality of effect output means, including a display means capable of displaying effect videos, and by making the speed at which the effect is performed by at least one of these effect output means differ between slow motion periods and non-slow motion periods, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect being performed is in slow motion during the slow motion period.

Note that in this feature section 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the display of the reach effect video is always executed at a progression speed V2 during the slow motion period, but the invention is not limited to this, and the progression speed of the display of the reach effect video during the slow motion period may be variable (for example, the progression speed may gradually decrease over time, or the progression speed may increase or decrease within a predetermined range).

Figure 16-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature section 079SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 16-4 (A) is just an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 16-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (B), for example, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination (big win type determination result) of which of several types of big win types the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win".

For example, as shown in FIG. 16-4 (B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big win opening notification command and the big win opening after notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds executed in the big win state (for example, "1" to "10") described later.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

The commands shown in FIG. 16-4(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 16-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 16-5, in this feature section 079SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 shown in FIG. 16-10.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 16-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature part 079SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature part 079SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature part 079SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 079SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 079SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In addition, FIG. 16-6(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this feature part 079SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result determination table 2 in this feature part 079SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 16-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 079SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 079SG will be explained using FIG. 16-7 (B). In this feature section 079SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", and "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state, and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot gaming state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a jackpot that repeats 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a jackpot that repeats 5 rounds (so-called 5 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a jackpot that repeats 2 rounds (so-called 2 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. The jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a jackpot that repeats 2 rounds (so-called 2 rounds) that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, "probable chance jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) probable chance jackpot, "probable chance jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probable chance jackpot, "probable chance jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) probable chance jackpot, and "non-probable chance jackpot" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) non-probable chance jackpot.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature part 079SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this feature part 079SG). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, or variable probability jackpot C will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 079SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-7(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 16-7(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is the special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 16-8 shows the variation patterns in this feature part 079SG. In this feature part 079SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that in this feature section 079SG, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but this invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, .... Also, multiple super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided in the super reach fluctuation pattern, such as super reach α, super reach β, ....

The variation patterns in this feature part 079SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small winning".

As shown in Figure 16-8, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 079SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 16-9 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature 079SG. In this feature 079SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-9, if the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α3 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-5 (super reach β3 jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, if the variable display result is a probability jackpot A or probability jackpot B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A.

As shown in FIG. 16-9, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table have different numbers of judgment values assigned to PB1-2 to PB1-5. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 45 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 150 to PB1-3, 300 to PB1-4, and 500 to PB1-5, respectively, and in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 30 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 135 to PB1-3, 315 to PB1-4, and 515 to PB1-5, respectively. In other words, in this feature part 079SG, when the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot, the Super Reach β type fluctuation patterns PB1-3 and PB1-4 are determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win jackpot, so that it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation patterns in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small win, the special win fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern) using the special win fluctuation pattern determination table.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach β2 miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-5 (super reach β3 miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 miss), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α3 miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 miss), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β3 miss).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α2 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α3 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach β2 miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-5 (super reach β3 miss fluctuation pattern).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature part 079SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable chart being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 16-8, the reach effect of super reach α1 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-2) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot after the first half of the first reach effect described below is executed, the reach effect of super reach α2 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-2) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a miss after the first and second half of the first reach effect described below is executed, and the reach effect of super reach α3 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-3 or PB1-3) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot or miss after the first and second half of the first reach effect described below is executed and then the second reach effect described below is executed.

The variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is set so that the longer the special chart variable display time is, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the probability of a jackpot being expected), as shown in Figures 16-8 and 16-9. In other words, the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is set so that the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the second reach performance is performed is higher than the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the first reach performance is performed.

The reach effect of Super Reach β1 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PB1-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot after the first half of the third reach effect described below is executed, the reach effect of Super Reach β2 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-4) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a miss after the first and second half of the third reach effect described below is executed, and the reach effect of Super Reach β3 (a reach effect executed by the variable display of the variation pattern PA2-5 or PB1-5) is a reach effect in which the variable display result is a jackpot or miss after the first and second half of the third reach effect described below is executed, and then the fourth reach effect described below is executed.

The variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is set so that the longer the special chart variable display time is, the higher the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the probability of a jackpot being expected), as shown in Figures 16-8 and 16-9. In other words, the variable display of these variable patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is set so that the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the fourth reach performance is performed is higher than the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot when the third reach performance is performed.

Note that, in this feature 079SG, an example has been given in which the second reach performance is always executed after the first reach performance, and the fourth reach performance is always executed after the third reach performance, but this invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases in which the second reach performance and the fourth reach performance are executed by themselves.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, during variable display, each reach performance can be executed as a combination of the first reach performance and the second reach performance, and also as a combination of the third reach performance and the fourth reach performance. However, this invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases where the reach performance is executed in combinations other than these (for example, a combination of the first reach performance and the fourth reach performance, the second reach performance and the third reach performance, etc.).

In addition, in this feature part 069SG, as shown in FIG. 16-9, the Super Reach β system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) are generally set to have a higher probability of the variable display result being a jackpot (jackpot expectation rate) than the Super Reach α system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3), but this invention is not limited to this, and some of the Super Reach β system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB1-4, PB1-5) may have a lower jackpot expectation rate than any of the Super Reach α system fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB1-2, PB1-3).

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 079SG is provided with a game control data holding area 079SG150 as shown in FIG. 16-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 079SG150 shown in FIG. 16-10 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 079SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 079SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 079SG151C, a game control flag setting section 079SG152, a game control timer setting section 079SG153, a game control counter setting section 079SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 079SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151A stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151A thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 079SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 079SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 079SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 079SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 079SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 079SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 079SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 079SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 3 is provided with a performance control data holding area 079SG190 as shown in Figure 16-11 (A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 079SG190 shown in Figure 16-11 (A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 079SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 079SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 079SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 079SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 079SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 079SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 079SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 079SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 079SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 079SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A as shown in FIG. 16-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 079SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 079SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, two commands, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command) and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

When a start win is made in the first start win port, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A, and when a start win is made in the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special chart reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 079SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory or the second special chart reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 079SG194A shown in FIG. 16-11(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 16-11(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 079SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIG. 16-12. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (step 079SGS101). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (step 079SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 079SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting part 079SG154. If the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; N), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "1" (step 079SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 079SGS101 (step 079SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 079SGS102 (step 079SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (step 079SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 079SGS104; Y), it is judged whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 079SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 079SGS105 (step 079SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 079SG155 is set to "2" (step 079SGS106).

After executing either step 079SGS103 or step 079SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 079SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 079SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 079SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 079SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 079SG154 (step 079SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 079SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 079SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 079SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 079SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 079SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

Following the processing of step 079SGS111, settings are made to send the pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 079SGS113). The pending memory count notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

After executing the process of step 079SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 079SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS115), and the process proceeds to step 079SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 079SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 079SGS116), and the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 16-13 is a part of a flowchart showing the performance control process processing in this feature part 079SG. In the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), then updates the hold display in the first hold memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U, executes a hold display operation process (step 079SG162) to operate (rotate display) the hold display displayed in the first hold memory display area 079SHSG005D and the second hold memory display area 079SG005U, executes a telop operation process (step 079SGS163) to perform a telop operation display in the telop display area 079SG005T, and executes a fourth pattern display process (step 079SG164) to perform a variable display of the fourth pattern 079SG005J, and then executes one of the processes in steps S170 to S177 depending on the value of the performance control process flag.

Figure 16-14 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 9. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271). If the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 079SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, if the first variable start command reception flag is off in step 079SGS271 (step 079SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273). If the second variable start command reception flag is off (step 079SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 079SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer 079SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 079SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 079SGS272 or step 079SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 079SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 079SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 079SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to "7" as the stopping symbol. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B or the probability variable jackpot C, the stopping symbol is determined from among a plurality of combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned to even symbols as the stopping symbol. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a small win, the stopping pattern is determined from among the chance combinations "334", "778", etc. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command, which corresponds to a loss, the stopping pattern is determined to be a decorative pattern of three mismatched patterns, a combination other than the chance combinations described above (a loss pattern).

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is a super reach change pattern (step 079SGS277). If the change pattern of the variable display is a non-reach or normal reach change pattern (step 079SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 079SGS283, and if the change pattern of the variable display is a super reach change pattern (step 079SGS277; Y), the process executes a chance up performance decision process (step 079SGS278) to decide whether to execute a chance up performance in the latter half of the first reach performance or the latter half of the third reach performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16-15, if the variable display result is a miss, there is a 20% chance that the chance up effect will be executed, and an 80% chance that the chance up effect will not be executed. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is an 80% chance that the chance up effect will be executed, and an 20% chance that the chance up effect will not be executed. In other words, in the variable display of the reach of this feature part 079SG, when the chance up effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is set higher than when the chance up effect is not executed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, as shown in Figures 16-27 and 16-32, only one presentation pattern is provided as the presentation mode of the chance up effect, but this invention is not limited to this, and multiple presentation patterns may be provided as the presentation mode of the chance up effect, and the expectation of a jackpot may differ depending on which presentation pattern the chance up effect is executed with.

Furthermore, in this feature part 079SG, as shown in Figures 16-27 and 16-32, there is only one timing for starting the Chance Up effect, but the invention is not limited to this, and multiple timings for starting the Chance Up effect may be provided, and the probability of winning may differ depending on which timing the Chance Up effect starts from.

After determining whether or not to execute the chance-up effect in step 079SGS278, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279). If the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach α3 (PA2-3 or PB1-3) (step 079SGS279; Y), a still image display effect determination process (step 079SGS280) is executed to determine the effect pattern of the still image display effect that displays the still image that was displayed at the end of the second reach effect on the image display device 5 during the period from the end of the second reach effect to the start of the notification effect (jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect), and proceeds to step 079SGS283.

In the still image display effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 16-16(A), if the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the still image display effect to be pattern SG-1 with a probability of 100%, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, determines the effect pattern of the still image display effect to be pattern SG-1 with a probability of 80%, and pattern SG-2 with a probability of 20%.

As shown in FIG. 16-16(B), still image display pattern SG-1 is a presentation pattern in which the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach performance is displayed as a still image, and still image display pattern SG-2 is a presentation pattern in which the image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 at the end of the second reach performance is displayed as a still image, and then the color of the still image is changed.

In particular, pattern SG-2 is a presentation pattern that is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, so when the second reach presentation is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the still image display presentation is executed with pattern SG-2 (whether or not the color of the still image changes).

In addition, if the variation pattern of the variable display is not a Super Reach α3 in step S079SGS281 (step S079SGS281; N), it is further determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach β3 (PA2-5 or PB1-5) (step S079SGS282). If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern other than a Super Reach β3 (step S079SGS282; N), the process proceeds to step S079SGS283. If the variation pattern of the variable display is a variation pattern of a Super Reach β3 (step S079SGS281; Y), the process executes an operation promotion effect determination process (step S079SGS282) for determining the presentation pattern of an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B during the execution of the fourth reach presentation, and then proceeds to step S079SGS283.

In the operation promotion effect determination process, as shown in FIG. 16-17(A), if the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect to be pattern SS-1 with a probability of 80% and pattern SS-2 with a probability of 20%. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect pattern of the operation promotion effect is determined to be pattern SS-1 with a probability of 20% and pattern SS-2 with a probability of 80%.

As shown in FIG. 16-17 (B), operation promotion presentation pattern SS-1 is a presentation pattern in which an image of push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and operation promotion presentation pattern SS-2 is a presentation pattern in which an image of push button 31B is displayed in a larger size than pattern SS-1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5.

In other words, as for the operation promotion effect in this characteristic part 079SG, when a large-sized image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-2), there is a higher probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (a jackpot notification effect will be executed) than when a normal-sized image of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 (when the operation promotion effect is executed in pattern SS-1). Therefore, the player can be drawn to the size of the image of the push button 31B displayed on the image display device 5 when the operation promotion effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In step 079SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects whether or not to execute each of the aforementioned chance-up performances, still image display performances, operation promotion performances, etc., and selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the performance pattern and the variable pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 079SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 079SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this feature section 079SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 079SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 079SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 079SGS288).

In addition, in the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts (-1) the value of the process timer each time the variable display performance processing is executed, and determines whether the process timer after the subtraction has timed out. If the process timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to that process timer, and if the process timer after the subtraction has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process timer is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data.

Next, the presentation of the variable display of Super Reach α1 to α3 and Super Reach β1 to β3 in this feature part 079SG will be explained based on Figures 16-18 to 16-35.

First, regarding the variable display of Super Reach α1 to α3 shown in Figures 16-18, 16-19, and 16-26(A) to 16-26(G), when the variable display starts, a performance video such as a variable display of a decorative pattern starts at a normal progression speed V1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the telop from left to right (the progression speed of the video in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at a normal progression speed V3, and BGM and performance sounds corresponding to the variable display start from the speakers 8L and 8R at a normal playback speed V4.

In the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light (blink) at a fixed cycle, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at a fixed cycle. Hereinafter, the blinking or lighting of the game effect lamp 9 in this characteristic part 079SG means that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are all synchronously blinked or lit, but the invention is not limited to this, and the blinking or lighting of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d do not necessarily have to be synchronized.

As shown in Fig. 16-18, Fig. 16-19, Fig. 16-26(A) to Fig. 16-26(C), when the timing for the reach effect to develop comes as a result of the progression of the variable display, the first reach effect first half execution period is entered, and a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A begins. As the battle effect progresses and approaches the second half of the first reach effect first half execution period, a video of ally character A attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from the aforementioned V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character A punching enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when friendly character A's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α1, when the first reach performance first half execution period ends, as shown in FIG. 16-18 and FIG. 16-26(E) to FIG. 16-26(G), a video of ally character A's attack succeeding and enemy character A falling is displayed as a jackpot notification performance in the first display area 079SG005F, and then the decorative symbols stop in a jackpot combination to notify that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. In particular, when the jackpot notification performance starts, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification performance is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-26(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

During the jackpot notification performance, the animation showing the part where friendly character A's attack is successful is displayed at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 16-26 (E)), and the animation showing the part where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progression speed V2 slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 16-26 (F)). Then, the animation showing the decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination and controlling the jackpot game state is displayed again at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 16-26 (G)).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a Super Reach α2 or Super Reach α3 variable display, when the first half of the first reach performance execution period ends, as shown in Figures 16-19 and 16-26 (D), ally character A's attack is not successful and the game moves to the second half of the first reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figure 16-19 and Figure 16-27 (A) to Figure 16-27 (B), when the second half of the first reach effect execution period starts, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A continues.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the first reach effect, when the effect video of the battle effect is executed at the progression speed V1, a chance-up effect may be executed as shown in FIG. 16-27 (B). The chance-up effect is executed at the progression speed V1, just like the effect video of the battle effect.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance, a video of ally character A attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. As a result, the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 displays in slow motion ally character A punching enemy character A.

In addition, during the period when ally character A's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

If the variable display is that of Super Reach α2, when the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance ends, as shown in Figure 16-19 and Figure 16-27 (E) to Figure 16-27 (G), in the first display area 079SG005F, after friendly character A's attack fails and he is defeated by enemy character A, a miss notification performance is displayed, whereby the decorative patterns stop in a miss combination to notify that the variable display result is a miss.

During the miss notification performance, the animation display is executed at the normal progression speed V1 during the part where ally character A's attack fails and the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a miss.

During the loss notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at the same progression speed V3, and the BGM and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-27 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 is switched to the normal background image display before the reach performance. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is displayed without lighting (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are displayed without lighting).

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach α3, then as shown in Figures 16-20, 16-21, and 16-27 (D), ally character A's attack is successful and enemy character A is defeated during the second half of the first reach performance execution period. Then, the game moves to the first half of the second reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figures 16-20, 16-21, and 16-28(A) to 16-28(B), when the second reach effect first half execution period starts, the battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

When the battle performance progresses and the second half of the execution period of the first half of the second reach performance is reached, as shown in FIG. 16-20, FIG. 16-21, and FIG. 16-28(C), as an effect performance, converging lines start to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and a video of ally character A attacking enemy character B starts to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video starts, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, ally character A is displayed in slow motion punching enemy character B.

In addition, during the period when the attack of ally character A towards enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (the period when the moving image of the battle performance in the first display area 079SG005F is moving at V2), the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right are executed at the same moving speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth pattern 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking period of the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005Jb, while the blinking period of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking period becomes faster). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 16-28 (D), the number of convergence lines as the effect performance described above is gradually increased.

In other words, during the execution period of the latter half of the second reach effect, the progression speed of the battle effect video slows down to V2, causing the number of concentration lines displayed in the first display area 079SG005F to increase and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 to become more intense. This increase in the number of concentration lines and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 makes it possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the performance result of the battle effect (whether a jackpot notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed).

Then, after the execution period of the latter half of the second reach effect ends, as shown in Figures 16-20, 16-21, and 16-28 (E), the image displayed at the end of the battle effect (in this feature part 079SG, the image displayed immediately before ally character A's attack hits enemy character B) is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as a still image display effect.

During the execution of the still image display effect, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F switches from V1 to 0, but the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 returns to the cycle before the progression speed of the battle effect video slowed to V2.

When pattern SG-2 is determined as the presentation pattern for the still image display presentation, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle presentation is inverted as the still image display presentation, as shown in FIG. 16-29(A) to FIG. 16-29(E). After the still image display presentation with the inverted color ends, the jackpot notification presentation is notified that the attack of ally character A hits enemy character B, and that enemy character B will be defeated and then controlled to the jackpot game state. In particular, when the decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification presentation, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made non-displayable, and the images of the jackpot notification presentation are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-29(F), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

As shown in FIG. 16-20, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2, the animation of friendly character A's attack hitting enemy character B is displayed at a progression speed V1, while the animation of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progression speed V2. Then, the animation of decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination after enemy character B falls is displayed at a progression speed V1. In particular, when decorative symbols stop in a combination indicating a jackpot as the jackpot notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if pattern SG-1 is determined as the still image display effect, the color of the image displayed at the end of the battle effect is not inverted as the still image display effect, and a jackpot notification effect as described above is executed as shown in Figures 16-30(A) to 16-30(D), or a miss notification effect is executed as shown in Figures 16-30(F) to 16-30(H).

In the case where the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the jackpot notification effect is the same as the case where the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-2. As shown in FIG. 16-20, the animation of ally character A's attack hitting enemy character B is displayed at a progression speed V1, but the animation of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progression speed V2. After enemy character B falls, it is displayed at a progression speed V1. During the jackpot notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a progression speed V3, and the BGM and effect sounds are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth pattern 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-30(E), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

In addition, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SG-1, the miss notification effect is that the attack of ally character A does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, after enemy character B's attack hits ally character A and ally character A falls, the decorative patterns stop in a miss combination, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 16-21, the loss notification effect is a video of friendly character A's attack not hitting and being defeated by enemy character B, which is displayed at a progression speed of V1. During the loss notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a progression speed of V3, and the background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed of V4, without any change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-30(I), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image display before the reach effect effect. After the variable display ends, the combination of decorative and small symbols will be displayed as stopped during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol will be turned off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb will be turned off).

Next, for the variable display of Super Reach β1 to β3 shown in Figures 16-22, 16-23, and 16-31(A) to 16-31(H), when the variable display starts, a performance video such as a variable display of decorative symbols starts at the normal progression speed V1 in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. At this time, in the second display area 079SG005Sa, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the telop from left to right (the progression speed of the video in the second display area 079SG005Sa) are executed at the normal progression speed V3, and BGM and performance sounds corresponding to the variable display start from the speakers 8L and 8R at the normal playback speed V4.

In addition, in the third display area 079SG005Sb, the upper pattern 079SG005Ja and the lower pattern 079SG005jb in the fourth pattern 079SG005J start to alternately light up (blink) at regular intervals, and the game effect lamp 9 starts to blink at regular intervals.

As shown in Fig. 16-22, Fig. 16-23, Fig. 16-31(A) to Fig. 16-31(C), when the timing for the reach effect to develop comes as a result of the progression of the variable display, the third reach effect first half execution period is entered, and a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A is started. As the battle effect progresses and approaches the second half of the third reach effect first half execution period, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character A is started to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video is started, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video is switched from the above-mentioned V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the ally character B punching enemy character A is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when ally character B's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

When the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β1, when the execution period of the first half of the third reach performance ends, as shown in FIG. 16-22 and FIG. 16-31(E) to FIG. 16-31(G), a video of ally character B's attack succeeding and enemy character A falling is displayed as a jackpot notification performance in the first display area 079SG005F, and then it is notified that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. In particular, when the jackpot notification performance starts, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are made non-displayable, and images of the jackpot notification performance are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-31(H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

During the jackpot notification performance, the animation showing friendly character B's successful attack is displayed at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 16-30(E)), and the animation showing the enemy character being defeated thereafter is displayed at a progression speed V2 slower than V1 (corresponding to FIG. 16-30(F)). Then, the animation showing the decorative symbols stopping in a jackpot combination and the player being controlled to a jackpot game state is again displayed at the normal progression speed V1 (corresponding to FIG. 16-30(G)).

During the jackpot notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a Super Reach β2 or Super Reach β3 variable display, when the first half of the third reach performance execution period ends, as shown in Figures 16-23 and 16-31 (D), ally character B's attack is not successful and the game moves to the second half of the third reach performance execution period.

As shown in Figure 16-23 and Figure 16-32 (A) to Figure 16-32 (B), when the second half of the third reach effect execution period begins, the battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A continues.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

In addition, during the execution period of the second half of the third reach effect, when the presentation video of the battle effect is executed at the progression speed V1, as shown in FIG. 16-32 (B), a chance-up effect may be executed. The chance-up effect is executed at the progression speed V1, just like the presentation video of the battle effect.

In particular, on the image display device 5, the small symbols are displayed with priority over the chance up effect video, while the chance up effect video is displayed with priority over the decorative symbols (the "7" displayed at the top left and right of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 16-32 (B)). Therefore, in this feature part 079SG, during the execution period of the chance up effect, the player can recognize that a variable display is being performed by visually checking the small symbols, and by displaying the chance up effect video with priority over the decorative symbols, an area for displaying the chance up effect video on the image display device 5 can be reliably secured.

In this feature section 079SG, the chance-up effect animation is displayed with priority over the decorative symbols, but the invention is not limited to this, and the decorative symbols may be displayed with priority over the chance-up effect animation. By doing so, the player can easily recognize which decorative symbol combination the currently executing reach effect has developed from, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the second half of the first reach performance, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5. When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. As a result, the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5 displays in slow motion ally character B punching enemy character A.

In addition, during the period when ally character B's attack on enemy character A is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the pending display in second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and background music and sound effects are output from speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without any change in cycle.

If the variable display is that of Super Reach β2, when the execution period of the latter half of the third reach effect ends, as shown in Figure 16-23 and Figure 16-32 (E) to Figure 16-32 (G), in the first display area 079SG005F, after ally character B's attack has failed and he has been defeated by enemy character A, a miss notification effect is displayed, indicating that the variable display result is a miss.

During the miss notification performance, the animation is displayed at the normal progression speed V1 in the part where ally character B's attack fails and in the part where the variable display result is notified that it is a miss.

During the loss notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at the same progression speed V3, and the BGM and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-32 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss, and the display on the image display device 5 is switched to the normal background image display before the reach performance. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a loss during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is displayed as off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are displayed as off).

On the other hand, if the variable display is that of Super Reach β3, then as shown in Figures 16-24, 16-25, and 16-32 (D), ally character B's attack is successful and he defeats enemy character A during the second half of the execution period of the third reach performance. Then, the game moves to the first half of the execution period of the fourth reach performance.

As shown in Figures 16-24, 16-25, and 16-33(A) to 16-33(B), when the first half of the fourth reach effect execution period begins, a battle effect between ally character AB and enemy character B progresses.

At this time, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, the presentation video of the battle presentation is executed at the normal progression speed V1. Furthermore, the rotation of the reserved display and the movement of the caption from left to right in the second display area 079SG005Sa are executed without change, maintaining the progression speed V3, and the background music and presentation sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R without change, maintaining the playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle.

As the battle performance progresses and approaches the second half of the execution period of the first half of the fourth reach performance, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character B begins to be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, as shown in Figures 16-24, 16-25, and 16-33 (C). When the display of the video begins, the progression speed of the video displayed in the first display area 079SG005F including the video switches from V1 to V2, which is slower than V1. Therefore, in the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, ally character B punching enemy character B is displayed in slow motion.

In addition, during the period when the attack of ally character B towards enemy character B is displayed in slow motion (the period when the progression speed of the battle animation in the first display area 079SG005F is V2), the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the caption from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a constant progression speed of V3, and the background music and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L, 8R at a constant playback speed of V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J is executed without changing the alternating blinking cycle of the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb, while the blinking cycle of the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 becomes shorter (the blinking cycle becomes faster).

In other words, during the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the speed of the battle effect animation slows down to V2, causing the game effect lamp 9 to blink more intensely, so that the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 can effectively draw the player's attention to the result of the battle effect (whether a big win notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed).

Then, as the latter half of the fourth reach effect progresses, an operation prompting effect is executed. If the effect pattern of the operation prompting effect is determined to be pattern SS-1, an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba resembling the shape of the push button 31B is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, along with a meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B and an effect image 079SG005E, and an updated display of the meter 079SG005M and an enlarged updated display of the effect image 079SG005E toward the periphery of the image display device 5 are started. As mentioned above, these operation prompting effect images are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 16-3), and are therefore displayed as moving images with a constant progression speed regardless of the progression speed of the battle effect.

As shown in FIG. 16-33(D), during the execution of the operation prompting effect, the meter 079SG005M is updated to notify the player of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, while the effect image 079SG005E is enlarged and updated. Note that since the effect image 079SG005E has a predetermined transparency (for example, 10% to 50%), the player can view the battle effect through the effect image 079SG005E, and the visibility of the battle effect is reduced compared to when the operation prompting effect is not being executed. Since the execution of the operation prompting effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at a progression speed V2 even during the execution of the operation prompting effect.

As shown in Figures 16-33 (D) and 16-33 (E), the battle presentation continues at a progression speed of V2 while the operation prompting presentation is being executed, but at the end of the operation prompting presentation (the end of operation acceptance of push button 31B), the presentation does not progress to the scene where it is known whether or not ally character B's attack will hit enemy character B; in other words, the big hit notification presentation or miss notification presentation does not start.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16-34(A) to FIG. 16-34(E), when the presentation pattern of the operation prompting presentation is determined to be pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, which is larger than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and is an operation prompting image that imitates the shape of the push button 31B, is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F of the image display device 5, and the meter 079SG005M indicating the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is also displayed, and the update display of the meter 079SG005M is started. Note that, as described above, these operation prompting presentation images are displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as images based on the image data 2 (see FIG. 16-3), and therefore are displayed as moving images with a constant progression speed regardless of the progression speed of the battle presentation.

As shown in FIG. 16-34(D), during the execution of the operation prompting effect, the update display of the meter 079SG005M notifies the player of the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, while the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb conceals most of the image of the battle effect. As mentioned above, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is an image that is larger in size than the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and has a transparency of 0%. Therefore, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the visibility of the battle effect is lower than when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-1. Since the execution period of the operation prompting effect is included in the latter half of the fourth reach effect, the battle effect continues at the progression speed V2 even during the execution of the operation prompting effect.

As shown in Figures 16-34 (D) and 16-34 (E), the battle presentation continues at a progression speed V2 while the operation prompting presentation is being executed, but at the end of the operation prompting presentation (the end of operation acceptance of push button 31B), the presentation does not progress to the scene where it is clear whether ally character B's attack will hit enemy character B or not; in other words, the big hit notification presentation or miss notification presentation does not start.

If the player operates the push button 31B during the execution period of the operation prompting effect, or if the operation prompting effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B (if the operation acceptance period for the push button 31B ends), the jackpot notification effect or loss notification effect will be executed from the timing when the player operates the push button 31B or when the operation prompting effect ends.

As shown in Figures 16-24 and 16-35(A) to 16-35(C), the big win notification performance after the operation promotion performance is a video of friendly character B's attack hitting enemy character B, which is displayed at a progressing speed V1, while the video of enemy character B falling is displayed at a progressing speed V2. The video after enemy character B falls is displayed at a progressing speed V1. During the big win notification performance, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a progressing speed V3, while the background music and performance sounds are output from speakers 8L and 8R at a constant playback speed V4. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth pattern 079SG005J and the flashing of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-35(D), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot, and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image before the reach effect. Furthermore, the display of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T is resumed. After the variable display ends, the decorative symbols and small symbols are displayed in a combination indicating a jackpot during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol is lit (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb are lit).

As shown in FIG. 16-25 and FIG. 16-35(E) to FIG. 16-35(G), the miss notification effect after the operation prompting effect is that the attack of ally character B does not hit enemy character B, and conversely, after enemy character B's attack hits ally character B and ally character B falls, it is notified that the game state is not controlled to a jackpot. In particular, when the miss notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T are hidden, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa.

As shown in FIG. 16-25, the loss notification effect is a video that is displayed at a speed of V1 until the attack of ally character B does not hit and the decorative symbols stop in a loss combination. During the loss notification effect, the rotation of the reserved display in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the movement of the telop from left to right remain unchanged and are executed at a speed of V3, and the BGM and performance sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a playback speed of V4 without change. Furthermore, the variable display of the fourth symbol 079SG005J and the blinking of the game effect lamp 9 are also executed without changing the cycle. Then, as shown in FIG. 16-35 (H), when the variable display ends, the decorative symbols stop in a loss combination and the display on the image display device 5 switches to the normal background image display before the reach effect effect. After the variable display ends, the combination of decorative and small symbols will be displayed as stopped during the symbol determination period, and the fourth symbol will be turned off (both the upper symbol 079SG005Ja and the lower symbol 079SG005Jb will be turned off).

As shown in Figs. 16-26(H), 16-27(H), 10-29(F), 16-30(E), 16-30(I), 16-31(H), 16-32(H), 16-35(D), and 16-35(H), this characteristic part 079SG illustrates an example in which, at the end timing of the variable display, the caption display area 079SG005T including the caption (message) is displayed on the image display device 5, but the invention is not limited to this. At the end timing of the variable display, while the caption display area 079SG005T itself is displayed on the image display device 5, the display of the caption (message) itself in the caption display area 079SG005T may not be executed.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, in the variable display of Super Reach α3 and Super Reach β3, an embodiment has been exemplified in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened only during the slow motion period immediately prior to the notification effect (the period during which the display of the reach effect performance video is executed at the progression speed V2), but this invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during the slow motion period other than immediately prior to the notification effect. Also, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be shortened during part of the period during which the display of the reach effect performance video is executed at the progression speed V1 (non-slow motion period).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 16-19 to 16-25, during the execution period of the first half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, a video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V1, and during the execution period of the second half of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, a video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at a progressing speed V2. Therefore, while the video of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5 at the progressing speed V2, it is possible to increase the degree of empathy of the player with the ally character displayed during the reach performance and to increase the sense of anticipation for the execution of the jackpot notification performance, thereby improving the interest in the game. On the other hand, during the first and second half of the first, second, third, and fourth reach performances, the output of background music and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R remains unchanged and is output at the normal playback speed of V4, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, the sound output unit in this feature section 079SG includes a voice synthesis IC 079SG132, an amplifier circuit 079SG134, and speakers 8L and 8R, so that highly reproducible background music (music), sound effects, and other performance sounds can be output from speakers 8L and 8R at an appropriate volume during variable displays, including when reach effects are being performed, and when jackpot games are being played, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Also, as shown in Figures 16-20, 16-21, 16-24, and 16-25, during the second half of the second reach effect and during the second half of the fourth reach effect, the game effect lamp 9 flashes at a shorter cycle than normal, so that the game effect can be improved by flashing the game effect lamp 9 at a shorter cycle during the period when the progression speed of the effect video is V2.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the latter half of the second reach performance or the latter half of the fourth reach performance, but this invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be gradually shortened according to the progress of the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance. In this way, the player can recognize from the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 that the notification performance will be executed soon, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 is shortened during the execution period of the latter half of the second reach performance or during the execution period of the latter half of the fourth reach performance, but this invention is not limited to this, and the blinking cycle of the game effect lamp 9 may be executed at any timing during the first reach performance to the fourth reach performance.

In addition, as shown in Figures 16-19 to 16-25, during the execution of each of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the progression speed of the reach performance video changes between V1 and V2, while the rotation speed of the reserved display and the movement speed of the caption are both constant at V3, and the playback speed of the performance sound output from speakers 8L and 8R is constant at V4, which further prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, an example is given in which the rotation speed of the pending display displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the moving display speed of the caption are both V3, but this invention is not limited to this, and the rotation speed of the pending display and the moving display speed of the caption may be different speeds as long as they are constant regardless of the progress of each reach performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-2 (A), the area of the first display area 079SG005F is larger than the combined area of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, so that while each reach effect is being executed, the player can more easily recognize the reach effect displayed in the first display area 079SG005F than the hold display and captions displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 16-18 to 16-25, during periods other than when the reach effect is in progress, the rotation display of the reserved display is performed at a rotation speed V3 in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the moving display of the caption is performed at a moving speed V3 in the caption display area 079SG005T. In other words, the rotation display of the reserved display and the moving display of the caption are performed at the same speed as when the reach effect is in progress, which prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the reserved display and the caption.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-2 (C), when the characters contained in the caption (message) in the caption display area 079SG005T reach the right end of the caption display area 079SG005T and cease to be displayed, they are simultaneously displayed again at the left end of the caption display area 079SG005T and moved again from left to right, so that the entire caption (message) is always displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T. This allows the player to always recognize the entire moving display of the caption in the caption display area 079SG005T.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, an example is shown in which the entire caption is constantly displayed and moved in the caption display area 079SG005T, but the invention is not limited to this, and there may be times when part of the caption that is displayed and moved in the caption display area 079SG005T is not visible to the player.

As shown in Fig. 16-20, Fig. 16-21, and Fig. 16-28, during the second half of the second reach effect, the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2 and an effect effect of displaying concentrated lines on the image display device 5 is executed, thereby enhancing the effect of the second half of the second reach effect, and increasing the interest in the game. In particular, in this feature section 079SG, as shown in Fig. 16-28(C) and Fig. 148(D), the number of concentrated lines displayed increases as the battle effect progresses, making it easier for the player to recognize that the second reach effect has ended and a jackpot notification effect or a miss notification effect will be executed due to the increase in the number of concentrated lines displayed.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, an example is given of the effect presentation of this invention being the display of converging lines, but this invention is not limited to this, and the effect presentation may be implemented as a predetermined range of movement of the movable body 32, output of a specific sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R, vibration of the stick controller 31A or push button 31B, vibration of the image displayed on the image display device 5 or vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc., and the effectiveness of the effect presentation may be successively increased as the second reach presentation (battle presentation) progresses (for example, by widening the range of movement of the movable body 32, increasing the volume of the specific sound effect from the speakers 8L, 8R, increasing the vibration of the stick controller 31A or push button 31B, increasing the image displayed on the image display device 5 or vibration of the image display device 5 itself, etc.).

In addition, as shown in Figures 16-26 (G), 16-29 (E), 16-30 (D), 16-31 (G), and 16-35 (C), when the decorative symbols stop in a jackpot combination as a jackpot notification effect, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T in the second display area 079SG005Sa are made non-displayable, and the image of the jackpot notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. This further increases the visibility of the jackpot notification effect in the second display area 079SG005Sa, while making it easier for the player to recognize that they are being controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, when the big win notification effect is executed, the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the telop display area 079SG005T displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa are made non-displayable, and the image of the big win notification effect is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved memory display area 079SG005Sa may be displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa. When the memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T are displayed, an image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed in the first display area 079SG005F and the second display area 079SG005Sa (the image of the jackpot notification effect may be displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa, overlapping with the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T).

In this case, the visibility of the jackpot notification image may be improved by making the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the caption display area 079SG005T transparent or reducing the size of the display, or by making only one of the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D, the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U, and the reserved displays displayed within these reserved display areas invisible.

As shown in Fig. 16-28 and Fig. 16-29, during the second half of the second reach effect, a still image display effect can be executed in the first display area 079SG005F, while as shown in Fig. 16-20 and Fig. 16-21, during the still image display effect execution period, the rotating display of the reserved display in the first reserved memory display area 079SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 079SG005U in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the moving display of the telop in the telop display area 079SG005T shown in Fig. 16-2 (C) continue without stopping. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the reserved display is being displayed or that the telop is being moved during the execution period of the still image display effect, and prevents the player from having difficulty recognizing the display of the reserved display or the telop due to the stopping of the rotating display of the reserved display or the moving display of the telop.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 16-16 and 16-29(A) to 16-29(B), when the still image display effect is executed using pattern SG-2, the color of the still image is inverted, so that the player can easily recognize that the still image display effect is being executed by the inversion of the color of the still image.

In this feature section 079SG, as a still image display effect, a form in which the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a form in which the color of the still image is changed may be one in which the color of the still image is changed to black and white, one in which only a portion of the color of the still image is changed, or one in which a new color is added to the still image.

Also, as shown in FIG. 16-29 (B), when the still image display effect is executed with pattern SG-2 and the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F is inverted, the colors of the pending display and caption displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa and the fourth pattern displayed in the third display area 079SG005Sb are not inverted, so the player can easily recognize that the color of the still image has changed by comparing the pending display, caption, fourth pattern, etc. displayed in the second display area 079SG005Sa with the still image.

In addition, in each variable display of the super reach in this feature part 079SG, there is a pattern in which the first reach performance or the third reach performance is executed, followed by a transition to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, and a pattern in which the variable display ends after the first reach performance or the third reach performance is executed, resulting in a transition to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the display of the performance video of the reach performance is executed at the progression speed V2 during the first reach performance or the third reach performance and then transitions to the second reach performance or the fourth reach performance, or whether or not a notification is given that the performance video of the reach performance during the second reach performance or the third reach performance is executed at the progression speed V2 and then the performance is controlled to the jackpot game state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 16-19, 16-20, 16-21, 16-23, 16-24 and 16-25, during the first reach performance and the third reach performance, the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance and the first half execution period of the third reach performance are executed simultaneously at a progression speed V1, so that it is possible to prevent excessively increasing expectations for being controlled into a jackpot game state due to the progression speed when transitioning from the first half execution period of the first reach performance or the first half execution period of the third reach performance to the second half execution period of the third reach performance being different from the progression speed of the performance in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the second half execution period of the first reach performance or the second half execution period of the third reach performance. Furthermore, as shown in Figs. 16-18, 16-20, 16-22, 16-24, 16-25, 16-26(E) to 16-26(G), 16-29(C) to 16-29(E), 16-30(B) to 16-30(D), 16-31(E) to 16-31(G), and 16-35(A) to 16-35(C), in the big win notification performance of the feature 079SG, a video of an enemy character falling down due to a hit by an attack of an ally character is displayed at a progression speed V2, while Figs. 16-19, 16-21, 16-22, 16-23, 16-24, 16-25, 16-26(E) to 16-26(G), 16-29(C) to 16-29(E), 16-30(B) to 16-30(D), 16-31(E) to 16-31(G), and 16-35(A) to 16-35(C), As shown in 6-23, FIG. 16-25, FIG. 16-27(E) to FIG. 16-27(G), FIG. 16-30(F) to FIG. 16-30(H), FIG. 16-32(E) to FIG. 16-32(G), and FIG. 16-35(D) to FIG. 16-35(F), in the miss notification effect, the video of the friendly character falling is displayed at a progression speed of V1, so when the miss notification effect is executed, the video of the miss notification effect is not displayed at a progression speed of V2, which prevents the player from becoming overly dissatisfied and increases the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, when the variable display result of the Super Reach results in a miss notification effect, an example is shown in which the display video of the miss notification effect is executed at a progression speed V1, but this invention is not limited to this, and in some of the variable displays of the Super Reach, the display video of the miss notification effect may be executed at a progression speed V2 that is slower than V1. In this way, it is possible to create variation in the presentation of the miss notification effect, and to increase interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 079SG, the progress speed V1 of the presentation video during the jackpot notification presentation is the third speed in this invention, and the progress speed V2 of the presentation video during the jackpot notification presentation is the fourth speed in this invention, but this invention is not limited to this, and the third speed in this invention may be a speed different from the progress speed V1. Furthermore, the fourth speed in this invention may be a speed different from the progress speed V2 as long as it is a speed slower than the third speed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 16-24 and 16-25, when the video display of the reach effect is being executed at a progression speed V2 during the execution period of the second half of the fourth reach effect, the operation prompting effect is executed, so that the effect of the fourth reach effect can be enhanced by the operation prompting effect.

In this feature 079SG, an example has been given of a form in which the display of the fourth reach effect is executed at a progression speed of V2 while the operation prompting effect is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the fourth reach effect may be executed at a progression speed of V1 while the operation prompting effect is being executed. Furthermore, a suggestion effect that suggests that the operation prompting effect will be executed before the operation prompting effect is executed may be executed, and the display of the fourth reach effect may be executed at a progression speed of V2 while the suggestion effect is being executed.

As the operation prompting effect of this characteristic part 079SG, in addition to the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, a meter 079SG005M that notifies the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and while the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb and the meter 079SG005M are displayed, the display of the fourth reach effect effect animation at the progress speed V2 is continuously executed, but it does not progress to the notification effect. Furthermore, the same big win notification effect or miss notification effect is executed when the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B and when the operation prompting effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B. For this reason, the notification effect will not be executed before the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends (until the operation promotion effect ends), so it is possible to prevent the player from realizing whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B due to the player not operating the push button.

Note that, in this characteristic section 079SG, the detection means in this invention is exemplified as a push button 31B, but this invention is not limited to this, and the detection means may be an operating means other than the push button 31B, such as a stick controller 31A, or a sensor capable of detecting the player's actions, such as a motion sensor or touch sensor.

Also, as shown in Figures 16-18, 16-20, 16-22, 16-24, 16-26(E) to 16-26(G), 16-29(C) to 16-29(E), 16-30(B) to 16-30(D), 16-31(E) to 16-31(G), and 16-35(A) to 16-35C, in the jackpot notification performance in this feature part 079SG, the animation of the part where the ally character's attack hits the enemy character is displayed at a progressing speed of V1, while the animation of the part where the enemy character falls is displayed at a progressing speed of V2. In contrast, as shown in Fig. 16-19, Fig. 16-21, Fig. 16-23, Fig. 16-25, Fig. 16-27(E) to Fig. 16-27(G), Fig. 16-30(E) to Fig. 16-30(G), Fig. 16-32(E) to Fig. 16-32(G), Fig. 16-35(D) to Fig. 16-35(F), the animation of the miss notification effect of this characteristic part 079SG is displayed at a progression speed V1, and is not displayed at a progression speed V2. In other words, when the big win notification effect is executed, a part of the animation of the big win notification effect is displayed at a progression speed V2, so that the player can be impressed that the big win game state is being controlled.

In addition, in this feature section 079SG, a still image display effect can be executed in pattern SG-2 (a still image display effect in which the color is inverted) as a special effect that can be executed only when the variable display result in this invention is a jackpot, so that the player can be drawn to whether or not the color of the still image displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as the still image display effect is inverted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Note that, in this feature 079SG, the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 is exemplified as the special effect of this invention, but this invention is not limited to this, and the special effect of this invention may be an effect other than the still image display effect of pattern SG-2 (for example, an effect in which a specific character is displayed, or an effect in which the color of the effect is gold or rainbow, etc.).

In addition, the operation promotion presentation of this characteristic part 079SG can be executed in either of two presentation patterns: pattern SS-1, in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba that imitates push button 31B is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, and pattern SS-2, in which an operation promotion image 079SG005Bb that is larger in size than operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed in the first display area 079SG005F as an operation promotion image that imitates push button 31B. When the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is visible through the effect image 079SG005E displayed in the first display area 079SG005F, whereas when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-2, the majority of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is concealed by the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba, so the visibility of the battle effect of the fourth reach effect is lower than when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 16-17, the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-2 is lower than the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot when the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1, so that the player can be drawn to whether the operation prompting effect is executed in the pattern SS-1 or the pattern SS-2, and the interest in the game can be improved. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 16-24, 16-25, and 16-33(C) to 16-33(E), when an operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is displayed as an operation promotion effect, the display of the battle effect video is executed at a progression speed V2 while the operation promotion image 079SG005Ba is being displayed, which can increase interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 079SG, when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb is displayed on the image display device 5, and the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb reduces the visibility of the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) that is being displayed at a progression speed V2 (slow motion). However, this invention is not limited to this, and when the operation prompting effect is executed in pattern SS-2, in addition to the display of the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, a dedicated background image may be displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, making the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) completely invisible. Also, during the period in which the fourth reach effect's performance video (battle performance) is completely invisible due to the background image dedicated to the operation prompting effect pattern SS-2, the display of the fourth reach effect's performance video may be executed at a progression speed V1 (non-slow motion).

In addition, in this feature part 079SG, as the reach performance of the super reach, the second reach performance can be executed after the first reach performance, and the fourth reach performance can be executed after the third reach performance. Furthermore, as the variable display of the super reach, the variable display of the super reach α1 which notifies of a jackpot after the first half execution period of the first reach performance, the variable display of the super reach β1 which notifies of a jackpot after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α2 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the first reach performance after the first half execution period of the first reach performance, the variable display of the super reach β2 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α3 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach β4 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α5 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α6 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach β7 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α8 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α9 which notifies of a miss by executing the second half execution period of the third reach performance after the first half execution period of the third reach performance, the variable display of the super reach α1 which notifies of a jackpot after the first half execution period of the first reach performance It is possible to execute variable display of Super Reach α3 which transitions to the second reach performance after the out-exchange part execution period, and variable display of Super Reach α3 which transitions to the fourth reach performance after the third reach performance exchange part execution period. As shown in Figures 16-18 to 16-25, when transitioning from the first reach performance first half execution period to the first reach performance second half execution period, when transitioning from the first reach performance second half execution period to the second reach performance first half execution period, when transitioning from the third reach performance first half execution period to the third reach performance second half execution period, When transitioning from the third reach performance second half execution period to the fourth reach performance first half execution period, the performance video of each reach performance is executed at a progression speed V2, when transitioning from the first reach performance first half execution period to the first reach performance second half execution period, when transitioning from the first reach performance second half execution period to the second reach performance first half execution period, when transitioning from the third reach performance first half execution period to the third reach performance second half execution period, and when transitioning from the third reach performance second half execution period to the fourth reach performance first half execution period, Since background music and sound effects are output from 8L and 8R at the same playback speed V4 as in other periods, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the first reach performance first half execution period transitions to the first reach performance second half execution period, when the first reach performance second half execution period transitions to the second reach performance first half execution period, when the third reach performance first half execution period transitions to the third reach performance second half execution period, and when the third reach performance second half execution period transitions to the fourth reach performance first half execution period. Furthermore, by displaying the performance video of each reach performance at a progression speed V2, it is possible to easily recognize the branching of the reach performance that the player is drawing.

Note that, in the variable display of the Super Reach of this feature part 079SG, an example has been given in which two reach effects can be executed, but the invention is not limited to this, and the variable display of the Super Reach may be capable of executing three or more reach effects, or may be capable of executing only one reach effect.

The characteristic features 079SG of this invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic features, and changes and additions that do not deviate from the gist of this invention are also included in this invention.

For example, in the feature section 079SG, the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance are provided as the reach performance of the super reach, and in all of these reach performances, a form in which a part of the performance video of the reach performance is displayed at a progression speed V2 (slow motion) is exemplified, but this invention is not limited to this, and a pattern in which the performance video is not displayed at the progression speed V2 in each reach performance (a pattern in which the performance video is always displayed at the progression speed V1) and a pattern in which a part of the performance video is displayed at the progression speed V2 may be provided. Furthermore, the performance content may be different between the reach performance in which a part of the performance video is displayed at the progression speed V2 and the reach performance in which the performance video is not displayed at the progression speed V2. In this way, it is possible to create variation in the reach performance of the super reach, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, an example is given of a form in which the sound effects output from speakers 8L, 8R are always output at a constant playback speed (playback speed V4) regardless of whether the display of the performance video is being executed at the progression speed V2 or not; however, the invention is not limited to this, and for example, as modified example 079SG-1, in the first half of the execution period of the second half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the sound effects may be output from speakers 8L, 8R at playback speed V4, the same as in the execution period of the first half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, while in the second half (slow motion period) of the execution period of the second half of each of the reach performances of the first reach performance, the second reach performance, the third reach performance, and the fourth reach performance, the sound effects may be output at a playback speed different from V4 (for example, V5, which is slower than playback speed V4). By doing this, the playback speed of the sound effects can be changed while the reach effect video is being displayed at the progression speed V2, improving the effect of the sound effects on the reach effect, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in FIG. 16-33 and FIG. 16-34, it is possible to reduce the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F during the execution period of the reach performance by displaying the effect image 079SG005E or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, while it is not possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 079SG-2, it may be possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa or the third display area 079SG005Sb.

Furthermore, in cases where it is possible to reduce the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb in this manner, as shown in Figures 16-36 and 16-37, after the reach effect ends, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F may be reduced as part of the notification effect.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 16-36 (A) to 16-36 (D), when the second reach performance is being executed, once the second reach performance has ended along with the still image display performance, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the centre of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification performance or miss notification performance, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed towards the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), a jackpot notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that they will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, or a miss notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that they will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 16-36(E) and FIG. 16-36(F).

Also, as shown in Figures 16-37 (A) to 16-37 (D), when the fourth reach effect is being executed, when the player operates the push button 31B, or when the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B, a circular effect image 079SG005Ea is displayed in the center of the first display area as part of the jackpot notification effect or miss notification effect, and the effect image 079SG005Ea is enlarged and displayed toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea spreads over the entire first display area 079SG005F (when the entire first display area 079SG005F is concealed by the effect image 079SG005Ea), a jackpot notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that they will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, or a miss notification effect will be displayed to notify the player that they will not be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, as shown in FIG. 16-37(E) and FIG. 16-37(F).

The effect image 079SG005Ea shown in Figures 16-36 and 16-37 is an image based on image data 2 shown in Figure 16-3 (B), and by expanding the drawing range as an image based on image data 2, it is possible to reduce only the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F, without reducing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb.

In this way, in this modified example 079SG-2, the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb can be changed, while as shown in Figures 16-36 and 16-37, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by the effect image 079SG005Ea as part of the notification effect after the end of the second reach effect or the end of the fourth reach effect, but the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and Since the visibility of the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change, the change in visibility of the first display area 079SG005F makes it easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the notification effect will be displayed, and since the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb does not change, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty recognizing the hold display, the telop display, the variable display of the fourth pattern, etc.

In addition, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is an image that is drawn as an image of the second image data shown in FIG. 16-3(B), and is drawn so as to be enlarged toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, thereby changing the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F. Therefore, the effect image 079SG005Ea that reduces the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is drawn so as to be enlarged toward the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb, without changing the visibility of the second display area 079SG005Sa and the third display area 079SG005Sb. It is possible to precisely reduce the visibility of only 079SG005F, and because the rendering of the enlarged display of effect image 079SG005Ea as the second image data is performed from the center of first display area 079SG005F toward second display area 079SG005Sa and third display area 079SG005Sb, the visibility of first display area 079SG005F is reduced, making it possible to make it difficult for the visibility of the areas corresponding to second display area 079SG005Sa and third display area 079SG005Sb to change.

In addition, in this modified example 079SG-2, an example is shown in which the operation prompting effect is executed during the fourth reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting effect may be executed as part of the notification effect.

When the operation prompting effect is executed as part of the notification effect, as shown in Fig. 16-38(A) to Fig. 16-38(F) as modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the effect image 079SG005Ea in the same manner as modified example 079SG-2. Then, when the effect image 079SG005Ea has spread to cover the entire first display area 079SG005F, as shown in Fig. 16-38(D), the operation prompting effect is displayed in the center of the first display area 079SG005F as an operation prompting effect, with an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and a meter 079SG005M.

The operation prompt image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M can be displayed as images based on the first image data shown in FIG. 16-2 (A), thereby avoiding reduced visibility due to the effect image 079SG005Ea.

After this, the player will be notified that they will be controlled to the jackpot game state or that they will not be controlled to the jackpot game state based on whether the player operates the push button 31B or the operation promotion effect ends without the player operating the push button 31B.

As described above, in this modified example 079SG-3, the visibility of the first display area 079SG005F is reduced by enlarging the display of the effect image 079SG005Ea, but the visibility of the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba and the meter 079SG005M displayed as images of the first image data is not reduced, so the operation prompting effect can be made to stand out against the fourth reach effect, effectively encouraging the player to operate the push button 31B.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the variable display result is always a jackpot, but this invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 079SG-4, when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, the jackpot type of the jackpot may always be a variable jackpot (or even a variable jackpot A, which is the most advantageous for the player). Furthermore, as a performance pattern when the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2 during the execution period of the second reach performance, a revival effect may be executed that notifies the player that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot state again after a miss notification effect is executed. In addition, in the case where the revival effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, the jackpot type may be a probability variable jackpot or a non-probability variable jackpot (a case where the jackpot game state is controlled to a non-probability variable jackpot and a case where the jackpot game state is controlled to a probability variable jackpot). By doing so, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the jackpot notification effect is executed after the still image display effect is executed in pattern SS-2, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 079SG, a form in which a message indicating the game status is displayed as the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T has been exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this, and the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T may be a message indicating whether or not a variable display that is being executed or a variable display that has not yet started will be controlled to a jackpot game status, the title of the reach performance that is being executed, etc.

In addition, the characteristic section 079SG has been exemplified as a form in which a caption can be displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T according to the state of the currently executing presentation, but this invention is not limited to this, and the caption displayed in the caption display area 079SG005T may be one that can identify the game state, the expectation that the variable display result in the currently executing variable display will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation), an explanation of the currently executing presentation (particularly a reach presentation), a preview presentation that can be executed from a timing prior to a reach presentation, etc.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 16-33 and 16-34, an example is given of a form in which an operation prompting effect (display of operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or operation prompting image 079SG005Bb) is executed during a period in which the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2, but the invention is not limited to this, and the operation prompting effect may be executed after the reach effect video returns from a progression speed V2 to a progression speed V1.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 16-33 and 16-34, an example of displaying an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb on the image display device 5 as an operation prompting effect has been given, but the invention is not limited to this. As an operation prompting effect, it is not necessary to simply display an operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or an operation prompting image 079SG005Bb. For example, as a preliminary effect to displaying the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb, an effect may be executed in which the images of multiple push buttons 31B move toward the center of the image display device 5, and finally the images of the push buttons 31B are overlapped to display the operation prompting image 079SG005Ba or the operation prompting image 079SG005Bb.

When the effect of the images of the multiple push buttons 31B moving toward the center of the image display device 5 is executed as a precursor effect of the operation prompting effect, for example, the speed of the movement display of the images of the multiple push buttons 31B may be slowed down as they approach the center of the image display device 5. This allows the player to accurately recognize that the operation prompting effect is being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 16-20, 16-21, 16-24, and 16-25, when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, but the invention is not limited to this, and when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V2, the number of colors (light emitting colors) of the game effect lamps 9 may be different from when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V1. For example, when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V1, the game effect lamps 9 may be capable of emitting light in multiple colors, whereas when the display of the video of the reach effect is executed at the progression speed V2, the game effect lamps 9 may be capable of emitting light in a single color (for example, only white). By doing this, when the reach effect video is displayed at a progression speed V2, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the light color of the game effect lamp 9.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Figs. 16-20, 16-21, 16-24, and 16-25, when the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) may be shortened, but the invention is not limited to this, and when the display of the reach effect video is executed at the progression speed V2, the blinking cycle of the game effect lamps 9 may be lengthened. By doing so, a sense of unity can be given to the display of the reach effect video and the blinking of the game effect lamps 9, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as shown in Fig. 16-26, Fig. 16-29, Fig. 16-30, Fig. 16-31, and Fig. 16-35, the presentation mode of the jackpot notification presentation is exemplified as a form in which, after the end of the reach presentation, the decorative symbols are displayed while oscillating in a combination indicating a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing for displaying the decorative symbols while oscillating in a combination indicating a jackpot may be during the reach presentation.

This invention may also be applied to a gaming machine that allows the player to select at least a portion of the sound effects, such as background music, to be output from the speakers 8L, 8R during play by operating an operating means that the player can operate. In this way, if the player sets the output of sound effects to suit his/her preferences, when the video display of each reach effect is being executed at the progression speed V1, the sound effects output from the speakers 8L, 8R will be played back at the playback speed V4 without changing, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the sound effects being played back at a speed slower than the playback speed V4, even if the player himself/herself has selected the sound effects to be output from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, as an end indication effect in this invention, an effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character can be executed during the second half execution period of the first reach effect or the second half execution period of the third reach effect, and when this effect is executed, the variable display result is always a miss. However, this invention is not limited to this, and after an effect in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character is executed during the second half execution period of the first reach effect or the second half execution period of the third reach effect, the display on the image display device 5 may be temporarily switched to the normal background image display before the reach effect, and then an effect indicating that the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, a revival effect) may be executed.

When executing the revival effect in this manner, the game effect lamp 9 may be lit or blinked before the video of the revival effect is displayed on the image display device 5, to make the player aware that the revival effect is being executed. Furthermore, the presentation mode of the revival effect may be, for example, an ally character attacking the enemy character again and defeating the enemy character. In particular, when executing the revival effect, a part of the video of the revival effect (for example, a video of a scene in which the enemy character is defeated) may be displayed at a progression speed V2 to enhance the presentation effect of the revival effect.

In addition, although this specification discloses multiple characteristic features and variations, the gaming machine of this invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these characteristic features and variations.

For example, the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 079SG may be a pachinko game machine in which the probability of winning can be changed by changing the setting value as shown in FIG. 1 to FIG. 9. In this case, for example, a pattern may be set in which the variable display result is a miss in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1, and when a high setting value (for example, 6) that is advantageous to the player is set in the pachinko game machine 1, the variable display result in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1 may be a miss at a higher rate than when other setting values are set in the pachinko game machine 1. In this way, the variable display result being a miss in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1 can be used as an indication that a high setting value is set in the pachinko game machine 1, so that it is possible to attract the player's attention to the variable display result being a miss while suppressing a decrease in the player's interest due to the variable display result being a miss in the variable display of the Super Reach α1 or the Super Reach β1.

In addition, in the characteristic part 079SG, a pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as a game machine that performs a predetermined game, but this invention is not limited to this, and the game machine that performs a predetermined game may be a pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine, or a general game machine, as long as it at least performs a predetermined game.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to the feature portion 059AK may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other feature portions such as the feature portion 063AK, the feature portion 065AK, and the feature portion 079SG. The combined feature portions or the individual feature portions not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions. For example, in addition to controlling the time-saving state by stopping and displaying the time-saving pattern as in the feature portion 059AK, the time-saving state may be controlled for a predetermined period after the small win game state ends based on passing through the time-saving area 063AK20 as in the feature portion 063AK. In addition, the time-saving state may be controlled even when the time-saving pattern is stopped and displayed as a result of the variable display of the normal pattern as in the feature portion 065AK. This increases the opportunities for control to the time-saving state, and improves the interest in the game.

In addition, for example, the time-saving prompting effect in feature part 059AK, the normal time passing prompting effect and the time-saving time passing prompting effect in feature part 063AK, the predetermined effect in feature part 065AK, and the reach effects of Super Reach A to Super Reach C may be set as the predetermined effect in feature part 079SG. Then, during a first period of the predetermined effect, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5 as the display means, and during a second period of the predetermined effect after the first period, a performance video in which the performance progresses at a second speed slower than the first speed can be displayed on the image display device 5, and the performance sound corresponding to the predetermined effect may be configured to be output by the speakers 8L and 8R as the sound output means at the same speed for the performance sound in both the first period and the second period. With this, the progression speed of the effect video of the specified effect changes between the first and second periods, but the speed related to the effect sound does not change between the first and second periods, so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 ... Pachinko game machine 5 ... Image display device 9 ... Game effect lamp 9B1 ... Lever lamp 9B2 ... Button lamp 9C ... Upper frame lamp 9M ... Left frame lamp 9N ... Right frame lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Performance control CPU
131 ... Vibration motor

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
An operation means operable by a player;
A performance control means capable of executing a performance,
The game control means includes:
A determination means for determining the advantageous state;
A determination means for determining that the advantageous state will be achieved before the determination by the determination means;
A state control means for controlling a special state in which a variable display is more easily performed than in a normal state;
and an information transmitting means capable of transmitting to the performance control means a plurality of types of information including determination result information capable of identifying that the advantageous state will be controlled when the determination means determines that the advantageous state will be achieved;
The performance control means includes:
A change notice can be executed to change the display mode of the displayed identification information to a different display mode,
A pre-reading effect can be executed based on the judgment result information,
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
After the start of the reach effect, a light emitting effect can be executed in which a light emitting means corresponding to the operation means is illuminated as a gaze guiding effect for guiding a gaze of a player to the operation means ,
a predetermined vibration effect is executed by vibrating the operation means at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to a start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed and a second timing prior to the start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed;
When executing the visual line guidance effect after starting the reach effect, a special vibration effect can be executed in which the operation means is vibrated during a specific effect period that is an execution period of the visual line guidance effect ,
The special vibration effect can be executed even when the line-of -sight guidance effect is not executed after the reach effect is started,
The special vibration effect can be executed in a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode having a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first mode;
When the line-of -sight guiding effect is executed after the start of the reach effect, the special vibration effect can be executed in the second mode at a higher rate than when the line-of -sight guiding effect is not executed after the start of the reach effect,
As the special vibration effect,
A first special vibration effect corresponding to the operation of a movable body for effect different from the operation means during the specific effect period can be executed,
A second special vibration effect corresponding to the image display during the specific effect period can be executed,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting section and a second light emitting section adjacent to the first light emitting section;
The performance control means is capable of executing the light-emitting performance by causing the first light-emitting unit to emit light at a first predetermined timing as the gaze guidance performance, and is also capable of executing the light-emitting performance by causing the first light-emitting unit and the second light-emitting unit to emit light at a second predetermined timing after the first predetermined timing,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed;
The predetermined vibration effect and the first special vibration effect have different aspects,
The predetermined vibration effect and the second special vibration effect have different aspects,
The first special vibration effect and the second special vibration effect have different aspects.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images